Posts

Coaching Behaviors Questionnaire:What is your country of origin?What is your job role?

Coaching Behaviors Questionnaire
PsycTESTS Citation:
de Haan, E., & Nilsson, V. O. (2017). Coaching Behaviors Questionnaire [Database record]. Retrieved from
PsycTESTS. doi: https://dx.doi.org/10.1037/t65300-000
Instrument Type:
Inventory/Questionnaire
Test Format:
The Coaching Behaviors Questionnaire has 72 total items, consisting of 18 forced-choice questions, each having 4
answering categories (the user needs to distribute exactly 10 points over the four categories in such a way that they
correspond as much as possible with how they coach—or, in the feedback questionnaire, how they perceive their
coach/consultant/manager is coaching them).
Source:
de Haan, Erik, & Nilsson, Viktor O. (2017). Evaluating coaching behavior in managers, consultants, and coaches: A
model, questionnaire, and initial findings. Consulting Psychology Journal: Practice and Research, Vol 69(4), 315-333.
doi: https://dx.doi.org/10.1037/cpb0000099
Permissions:
Test content may be reproduced and used for non-commercial research and educational purposes without seeking
written permission. Distribution must be controlled, meaning only to the participants engaged in the research or
enrolled in the educational activity. Any other type of reproduction or distribution of test content is not authorized
without written permission from the author and publisher. Always include a credit line that contains the source citation
and copyright owner when writing about or using any test.
PsycTESTS™ is a database of the American Psychological Association
doi: http://dx.doi.org/10.1037/t65300-000
You are asked to complete this questionnaire on your coaching style in helping conversations. It lists a number
of different ways in which you might act, and asks you to indicate how you tend to act with people as a coach.
You can in principle complete this questionnaire both when you are a qualified (internal or external) executive
coach and when you are a leader or manager, thinking about how you coach others inside your department or
organization, and direct reports.
What is your job role?
❍ Manager (1)
❍ Coach (2)
❍ Consultant (3)
What is your gender?
❍ Male (1)
❍ Female (2)
What is your age?
❍ Under 20 (1)
❍ 21–25 (2)
❍ 26–30 (3)
❍ 31–35 (4)
❍ 36–40 (5)
❍ 41–50 (6)
❍ 51–55 (7)
❍ 56–60 (8)
❍ 61 (9)
What is your country of origin?
Instructions
Listed below are many different ways in which you may act with people as a coach. In the following sets of four
statements, please distribute 10 points over each set, according to how you tend to act with people as a coach.
Please always use all 10 points. You may use zeros, if you feel they are appropriate.
None of these behaviors are good or bad in themselves. So there are no “right” or “wrong” answers. Don’t spend
too long considering your replies: a quick spontaneous answer is likely to be the most valuable. You will get the
most benefit from this exercise if you are completely honest. The questionnaire should take approximately 15
minutes to complete.
Please answer with respect to “how you tend to act with people as a coach” rather than “how you prefer to act.”
Coaching Behaviors Questionnaire
CBQ
PsycTESTS™ is a database of the American Psychological Association
doi: http://dx.doi.org/10.1037/t65300-000
Coaching Behaviors Questionnaire
CBQ
Example
“When working with people as a coach, I tend to do the following . . .”
a _0_ sit still and listen
b _6_ formulate and summarize their goals
c _2_ ask them what they would advise themselves
d _2_ give my own view
_______________________
Total _10_
Questionnaire
Please distribute 10 points over each statement and please answer with respect to “how you tend to act with
people as a coach” rather than “how you prefer to act.”
“When working with people as a coach, I tend to do the following . . .”
1a. let them know how a task, meeting, or job can be done really well _____
1b. capture my understanding of what they say in a model _____
1c. give constructive feedback regarding their mistakes or issues _____
1d. ask them how they feel about a current difficulty _____
“When working with people as a coach, I tend to do the following . . .”
2a. share my understanding of opportunities to learn and improve _____
2b. tell them how to get started on a task _____
2c. encourage them to feel good about themselves _____
2d. let them get on with finding their own answers _____
“When working with people as a coach, I tend to do the following . . .”
3a. note areas where I see room for improvement _____
3b. encourage them to express their feelings and emotions _____
3c. ask for their interpretation of a particular situation _____
3d. show my willingness to help _____
“When working with people as a coach, I tend to do the following . . .”
4a. say, “What else would you like to cover?” _____
4b. say, “You come across to me differently, namely. . .” _____
4c. say, “I would suggest you do . . .” _____
4d. check the logic of a statement _____
PsycTESTS™ is a database of the American Psychological Association
doi: http://dx.doi.org/10.1037/t65300-000
Coaching Behaviors Questionnaire
CBQ
“When working with people as a coach, I tend to do the following . . .”
5a. say, “To my knowledge. . .” _____
5b. say, “How does it feel to talk about this?” _____
5c. say, “How can I help you with this?” _____
5d. make suggestions regarding “homework” for the next meeting _____
“When working with people as a coach, I tend to do the following . . .”
6a. offer positive and affirming feedback _____
6b. point out that they could look at the issue in a different way _____
6c. help them to express more personal insights or feelings _____
6d. advise them of what action to take _____
“When working with people as a coach, I tend to do the following . . .”
7a. reveal how I may be affected in our relationship _____
7b. ask them what next to explore _____
7c. challenge them on the consequences of their actions _____
7d. explain what is known about a task _____
“When working with people as a coach, I tend to do the following . . .”
8a. check whether I am being helpful _____
8b. ask for desired outcomes for the meeting _____
8c. raise what sense I am getting of how they are in the here and now _____
8d. tell them where to go to find information and help _____
“When working with people as a coach, I tend to do the following . . .”
9a. help them to reflect on their experiences _____
9b. express willingness to support them _____
9c. advocate a particular solution or approach _____
9d. make them aware of what they could consider changing _____
“When working with people as a coach, I tend to do the following . . .”
10a. give them honest feedback about the impact of their behavior _____
10b. show them how to correct their mistakes _____
10c. use a model to summarize their queries or issues _____
10d. be honest about my warmth and care _____
PsycTESTS™ is a database of the American Psychological Association
doi: http://dx.doi.org/10.1037/t65300-000
Coaching Behaviors Questionnaire
CBQ
“When working with people as a coach, I tend to do the following . . .”
11a. help them to recognize their own emotions and how these impact on their work _____
11b. challenge them when they are possibly being defensive _____
11c. indicate it might be a good idea to change _____
11d. listen deeply as they review their issues or experiences _____
“When working with people as a coach, I tend to do the following . . .”
12a. persuade them to take a particular approach _____
12b. ask them how they can apply what they have learnt _____
12c. sum up what choices they seem to have _____
12d. speak with them about their emotions, e.g. of being upset or angry _____
“When working with people as a coach, I tend to do the following . . .”
13a. show them how their views can possibly be contradicted _____
13b. offer an explanation of what has happened _____
13c. ask them how they feel about their success _____
13d. offer them support when they are in difficulties _____
“When working with people as a coach, I tend to do the following . . .”
14a. provide opportunities for them to open up more personal queries _____
14b. give them an example of how I would approach the issue _____
14c. appreciate the value of their ideas, beliefs, opinions _____
14d. ask open questions to promote new insights _____
“When working with people as a coach, I tend to do the following . . .”
15a. give information about my own experience _____
15b. welcome them as a person _____
15c. help them to state their present understanding of the issues _____
15d. challenge what they are saying _____
“When working with people as a coach, I tend to do the following . . .”
16a. recommend how to approach or do something _____
16b. give them information that they may use to achieve a task _____
16c. if they are negative or pessimistic, confront them with a positive angle _____
16d. ask them how they feel about a problematic issue _____
PsycTESTS™ is a database of the American Psychological Association
doi: http://dx.doi.org/10.1037/t65300-000
Coaching Behaviors Questionnaire
CBQ
“When working with people as a coach, I tend to do the following . . .”
17a. encourage them to find their own solutions and answers _____
17b. show genuine appreciation for a job well done _____
17c. point to information which may be relevant _____
17d. propose what I believe to be the best course of action _____
“When working with people as a coach, I tend to do the following . . .”
18a. make myself accessible to them when needed _____
18b. ask them to express feelings which may be blocking them _____
18c. inquire into what they want to achieve _____
18d. challenge them about what they may be avoiding _____

What specific techniques have you used to overcome barriers to communication?

The Research Paper will be a comprehensive research review of the significant principles of management communications used to successfully achieve organizational objectives. For this assignment of a minimum of eight pages, you need to integrate material from the readings, multimedia, and class discussion boards, and also reflect on professional experience where possible. It is mandatory to include research from the classroom text as well as from six scholarly sources to support your views. Consider the validity of your resources carefully before using them in academic papers. Use at least one professional example to address the topics below.

The following components must be included in order for the paper to be complete:

Explain effective communication norms in a business setting.
Describe the role of interpersonal communication both as a manager and as an employee. What specific techniques have you used to overcome barriers to communication? Be sure to specify your role in the communication.
Explore the role of international and intercultural interpersonal communications in today’s global businesses.
Describe both verbal and nonverbal management communication.
Explain approaches for effective written management communication.
Analyze various approaches for engaging an audience during a presentation and encouraging active listening.
Describe effective methods of conflict resolution.
Analyze techniques for leading teams and group meetings.

Describe at least three interpretations (each) of the concepts of leadership and management.

AVADO Learning Limited. Registered in England with number 06177616.
Registered office: Landmark House, Hammersmith Bridge Road, London, W6 9EJ. VAT Registration number: 918560018.
Authorized and regulated by the Financial Conduct Authority – Interim Permission Number 611566
5LMS ILD114001
CIPD Candidate Assessment Activity
Title of unit/s Developing Leadership & Management Skills
Unit No/s 5LMS
Level 5
Credit value 6
Assessment method(s) 1. Essay
Learning outcomes Assessment criteria
1 Understand the distinction between
leadership and management.
1.1 Describe a range of meanings attached to
the concepts of leadership and
management.
1.2 Justify distinctions drawn between
leadership and management.
2 Be able to explain different approaches to
developing leaders and managers and the
role of the learning and development
function.
2.1 Evaluate a range of approaches for
developing leaders and managers.
2.2 Discuss the role of the L&D function in
providing leadership and management
development.
3 Understand how to ensure the ownership
and success of leadership and
management development programmes.
3.1 Identify indicators of success for
leadership and management development
programmes.
3.2 Justify methods to ensure the success of
leadership and management development
programmes.
Assessment brief/activity Assessment
Criteria
1.1
1.2
2.1
2.2
3.1
3.2
Drawing on the literature and/or current organisational practice, write an essay where
you should:
• Describe at least three interpretations (each) of the concepts of leadership and
management.
• Explain and justify distinctions drawn between the concepts of leadership and
management.
• Evaluate at least four different approaches for developing leaders and managers
• Provide at least five examples of how the L&D function can support leadership and
management development
• Identifies at least four indicators of success for leadership and management
development programmes
• Provide a rationale for at least three methods to ensure the success of leadership
and
management development programmes
AVADO Learning Limited. Registered in England with number 06177616.
Registered office: Landmark House, Hammersmith Bridge Road, London, W6 9EJ. VAT Registration number: 918560018.
Authorized and regulated by the Financial Conduct Authority – Interim Permission Number 611566
Evidence to be produced/required
A written essay of 3,000 words +/- 10%
All reference sources should be acknowledged correctly, and a bibliography provided where appropriate (these should be excluded from the word count).

When you first met me, what was your impression? In terms of physical characteristics.

Contents
Authors’ Note
Introduction
THE FIRST NIGHT:
Deny Trauma
The Unknown Third Giant
Why People Can Change
Trauma Does Not Exist
People Fabricate Anger
How to Live Without Being Controlled by the Past
Socrates and Adler
Are You Okay Just As You Are?
Unhappiness Is Something You Choose for Yourself
People Always Choose Not to Change
Your Life Is Decided Here and Now
THE SECOND NIGHT:
All Problems Are Interpersonal Relationship Problems
Why You Dislike Yourself
All Problems Are Interpersonal Relationship Problems
Feelings of Inferiority Are Subjective Assumptions
An Inferiority Complex Is an Excuse
Braggarts Have Feelings of Inferiority
Life Is Not a Competition
You’re the Only One Worrying About Your Appearance
From Power Struggle to Revenge
Admitting Fault Is Not Defeat
Overcoming the Tasks That Face You in Life
Red String and Rigid Chains
Don’t Fall for the “Life-Lie”
From the Psychology of Possession to the Psychology of Practice
THE THIRD NIGHT:
Discard Other People’s Tasks
Deny the Desire for Recognition
Do Not Live to Satisfy the Expectations of Others
How to Separate Tasks
Discard Other People’s Tasks
How to Rid Yourself of Interpersonal Relationship Problems
Cut the Gordian Knot
Desire for Recognition Makes You Unfree
What Real Freedom Is
You Hold the Cards to Interpersonal Relationships
THE FOURTH NIGHT:
Where the Center of the World Is
Individual Psychology and Holism
The Goal of Interpersonal Relationships Is a Feeling of Community
Why Am I Only Interested In Myself?
You Are Not the Center of the World
Listen to the Voice of a Larger Community
Do Not Rebuke or Praise
The Encouragement Approach
How to Feel You Have Value
Exist in the Present
People Cannot Make Proper Use of Self
THE FIFTH NIGHT:
To Live in Earnest in the Here and Now
Excessive Self-Consciousness Stifles the Self
Not Self-Affirmation—Self-Acceptance
The Difference Between Trust and Confidence
The Essence of Work Is a Contribution to the Common Good
Young People Walk Ahead of Adults
Workaholism Is a Life-Lie
You Can Be Happy Now
Two Paths Traveled by Those Wanting to Be “Special Beings”
The Courage to Be Normal
Life Is a Series of Moments
Live Like You’re Dancing
Shine a Light on the Here and Now
The Greatest Life-Lie
Give Meaning to Seemingly Meaningless Life
Afterword
About the Authors
Authors’ Note
Sigmund Freud, Carl Jung, and Alfred Adler are all giants in the world of psychology. This book is a
distillation of Adler’s philosophical and psychological ideas and teachings, taking the form of a narrative
dialogue between a philosopher and a young man.
Adlerian psychology enjoys a broad base of support in Europe and the United States, and presents
simple and straightforward answers to the philosophical question: How can one be happy? Adlerian
psychology might hold the key. Reading this book could change your life. Now, let us accompany the
young man and venture beyond the “door.”
On the outskirts of the thousand-year-old city lived a philosopher who taught that the world was simple
and that happiness was within the reach of every man, instantly. A young man who was dissatisfied with
life went to visit this philosopher to get to the heart of the matter. This youth found the world a chaotic
mass of contradictions and, in his anxious eyes, any notion of happiness was completely absurd.
Introduction
YOUTH: I want to ask you once again; you do believe that the world is, in all ways, a simple place?
PHILOSOPHER: Yes, this world is astonishingly simple and life itself is, too.
YOUTH: So, is this your idealistic argument or is it a workable theory? What I mean is, are you saying that
any issues you or I face in life are simple too?
PHILOSOPHER: Yes, of course.
YOUTH: Alright then, but let me explain why I have come to visit you today. Firstly, I want to debate this
with you until I am satisfied, and then, if possible, I want to get you to retract this theory.
PHILOSOPHER: Ha-ha.
YOUTH: Because I have heard all about your reputation. The word is that there is an eccentric philosopher
living here whose teachings and arguments are hard to ignore, namely, that people can change, that the
world is simple and that everyone can be happy. That is the sort of thing I have heard, but I find that view
totally unacceptable, so I wanted to confirm things for myself. If I find anything you say completely off,
I will point it out and then correct you . . . But will you find that annoying?
PHILOSOPHER: No, I would welcome the opportunity. I have been hoping to hear from a young person
just like you and to learn as much as possible from what you can tell me.
YOUTH: Thanks. I do not intend to dismiss you out of hand. I will take your views into consideration and
then look at the possibilities that present themselves. ‘The world is simple and life is simple, too’—if there
is anything in this thesis that might contain truth, it would be life from a child’s point of view. Children
do not have any obvious duties, like paying taxes or going to work. They are protected by their parents
and society, and can spend days free from care. They can imagine a future that goes on forever and do
whatever they want. They don’t have to see grim reality—they are blindfolded. So, to them the world
must have a simple form. However, as a child matures to adulthood the world reveals its true nature.
Very shortly, the child will know how things really are and what he is really allowed to do. His opinion
will alter and all he will see is impossibility. His romantic view will end and be replaced by cruel realism.
PHILOSOPHER: I see. That is an interesting view.
YOUTH: That’s not all. Once grown up, the child will get entangled in all kinds of complicated
relationships with people and have all kinds of responsibilities thrust upon him. That is how life will be,
both at work and at home, and in any role he assumes in public life. It goes without saying that he will
become aware of the various issues in society that he couldn’t understand as a child, including
discrimination, war, and inequality, and he will not be able to ignore them. Am I wrong?
PHILOSOPHER: It sounds fine to me. Please continue.
YOUTH: Well, if we were still living at a time when religion held sway, salvation might be an option
because the teachings of the divine were everything to us. All we had to do was obey them and
consequently have little to think about. But religion has lost its power and now there is no real belief in
God. With nothing to rely on, everyone is filled with anxiety and doubt. Everyone is living for
themselves. That is how society is today, so please tell me—given these realities and in the light of what I
have said—can you still say the world is simple?
PHILOSOPHER: There is no change in what I say. The world is simple and life is simple, too.
YOUTH: How? Anyone can see that it’s a chaotic mass of contradictions.
PHILOSOPHER: That is not because the world is complicated. It’s because you are making the world
complicated.
YOUTH: I am?
PHILOSOPHER: None of us live in an objective world, but instead in a subjective world that we ourselves
have given meaning to. The world you see is different from the one I see, and it’s impossible to share your
world with anyone else.
YOUTH: How can that be? You and I are living in the same country, in the same time, and we are seeing
the same things—aren’t we?
PHILOSOPHER: You look rather young to me, but have you ever drunk well water that has just been
drawn?
YOUTH: Well water? Um, it was a long time ago, but there was a well at my grandmother’s house in the
countryside. I remember enjoying the fresh, cold water drawn from that well on a hot summer’s day.
PHILOSOPHER: You may know this, but well water stays at pretty much the same temperature all year
round, at about sixty degrees. That is an objective number—it stays the same to everyone who measures
it. But when you drink the water in the summer it seems cool and when you drink the same water in the
winter it seems warm. Even though it’s the same water, at the same sixty degrees according to the
thermometer, the way it seems depends on whether it’s summer or winter.
YOUTH: So, it’s an illusion caused by the change in the environment.
PHILOSOPHER: No, it’s not an illusion. You see, to you, in that moment, the coolness or warmth of the
well water is an undeniable fact. That’s what it means to live in your subjective world. There is no escape
from your own subjectivity. At present, the world seems complicated and mysterious to you, but if you
change, the world will appear more simple. The issue is not about how the world is, but about how you
are.
YOUTH: How I am?
PHILOSOPHER: Right . . . It’s as if you see the world through dark glasses, so naturally everything seems
dark. But if that is the case, instead of lamenting about the world’s darkness, you could just remove the
glasses. Perhaps the world will appear terribly bright to you then and you will involuntarily shut your
eyes. Maybe you’ll want the glasses back on, but can you even take them off in the first place? Can you
look directly at the world? Do you have the courage?
YOUTH: Courage?
PHILOSOPHER: Yes, it’s a matter of courage.
YOUTH: Well, alright. There are tons of objections I would like to raise, but I get the feeling it would be
better to go into them later. I would like to confirm that you are saying ‘people can change’, right?
PHILOSOPHER: Of course people can change. They can also find happiness.
YOUTH: Everyone, without exception?
PHILOSOPHER: No exceptions whatsoever.
YOUTH: Ha-ha! Now you’re talking big! This is getting interesting. I’m going to start arguing with you
immediately.
PHILOSOPHER: I am not going to run away or hide anything. Let’s take our time debating this. So, your
position is ‘people cannot change?’
YOUTH: That’s right, they can’t change. Actually, I am suffering myself because of not being able to
change.
PHILOSOPHER: And at the same time, you wish you could.
YOUTH: Of course. If I could change, if I could start life all over again, I would gladly fall to my knees
before you. But it could turn out that you’ll be down on your knees before me.
PHILOSOPHER: You remind me of myself during my own student days, when I was a hot-blooded young
man searching for the truth, traipsing about, calling on philosophers . . .
YOUTH: Yes. I am searching for the truth. The truth about life.
PHILOSOPHER: I have never felt the need to take in disciples and have never done so. However, since
becoming a student of Greek philosophy and then coming into contact with another philosophy, I have
been waiting for a long time for a visit from a young person like you.
YOUTH: Another philosophy? What would that be?
PHILOSOPHER: My study is just over there. Go into it. It’s going to be a long night. I will go and make
some hot coffee.

THE FIRST NIGHT:
Deny Trauma
The young man entered the study and sat slouched in a chair. Why was he so determined to reject the
philosopher’s theories? His reasons were abundantly clear. He lacked self-confidence and, ever since
childhood, this had been compounded by deep-seated feelings of inferiority with regard to his personal
and academic backgrounds, as well as his physical appearance. Perhaps, as a result, he tended to be
excessively self-conscious when people looked at him. Mostly, he seemed incapable of truly appreciating
other people’s happiness and was constantly pitying himself. To him, the philosopher’s claims were
nothing more than the stuff of fantasy.
The Unknown Third Giant
YOUTH: A moment ago, you used the words “another philosophy,” but I’ve heard that your specialty is in
Greek philosophy.
PHILOSOPHER: Yes, Greek philosophy has been central to my life ever since I was a teenager. The great
intellectual figures: Socrates, Plato, Aristotle. I am translating a work by Plato at the moment, and I
expect to spend the rest of my life studying classical Greek thought.
YOUTH: Well, then what is this “other philosophy”?
PHILOSOPHER: It is a completely new school of psychology that was established by the Austrian
psychiatrist Alfred Adler at the beginning of the twentieth century. It is generally referred to as Adlerian
psychology.
YOUTH: Huh. I never would have imagined that a specialist in Greek philosophy would be interested in
psychology.
PHILOSOPHER: I’m not very familiar with paths taken by other schools of psychology. However, I think it
is fair to say that Adlerian psychology is clearly in line with Greek philosophy, and that it is a proper field
of study.
YOUTH: I have a passing knowledge of the psychology of Freud and Jung. A fascinating field.
PHILOSOPHER: Yes, Freud and Jung are both renowned. Adler was one of the original core members of
the Vienna Psychoanalytic Society, which was led by Freud. His ideas were counter to Freud’s, and he
split from the group and proposed an “individual psychology” based on his own original theories.
YOUTH: Individual psychology? Another odd term. So Adler was a disciple of Freud’s?
PHILOSOPHER: No, he was not. That misconception is common; we must dispel it. For one thing, Adler
and Freud were relatively close in age, and the relationship they formed as researchers was founded upon
equal footing. In this respect, Adler was very different from Jung, who revered Freud as a father figure.
Though psychology primarily tends to be associated with Freud and Jung, Adler is recognized
throughout the rest of the world, along with Freud and Jung, as one of the three giants in this field.
YOUTH: I see. I should have studied it more.
PHILOSOPHER: I suppose it’s only natural you haven’t heard of Adler. As he himself said, “There might
come a time when one will not remember my name; one might even have forgotten that our school ever
existed.” Then he went on to say that it didn’t matter. The implication being that if his school were
forgotten, it would be because his ideas had outgrown the bounds of a single area of scholarship, and
become commonplace, and a feeling shared by everyone. For example, Dale Carnegie, who wrote the
international bestsellers How to Win Friends and Influence People and How to Stop Worrying and Start
Living, referred to Adler as “a great psychologist who devoted his life to researching humans and their
latent abilities.” The influence of Adler’s thinking is clearly present throughout his writings. And in
Stephen Covey’s The 7 Habits of Highly Effective People, much of the content closely resembles Adler’s
ideas. In other words, rather than being a strict area of scholarship, Adlerian psychology is accepted as a
realization, a culmination of truths and of human understanding. Yet Adler’s ideas are said to have been
a hundred years ahead of their time, and even today we have not managed to fully comprehend them.
That is how truly groundbreaking they were.
YOUTH: So your theories are developed not from Greek philosophy initially but from the viewpoint of
Adlerian psychology?
PHILOSOPHER: Yes, that’s right.
YOUTH: Okay. There’s one more thing I’d like to ask about your basic stance. Are you a philosopher? Or
are you a psychologist?
PHILOSOPHER: I am a philosopher, a person who lives philosophy. And, for me, Adlerian psychology is a
form of thought that is in line with Greek philosophy, and that is philosophy.
YOUTH: All right, then. Let’s get started.
Why People Can Change
YOUTH: First, let’s plan the points of discussion. You say people can change. Then you take it a step
further, saying that everyone can find happiness.
PHILOSOPHER: Yes, everyone, without exception.
YOUTH: Let’s save the discussion about happiness for later and address change first. Everyone wishes they
could change. I know I do, and I’m sure anyone you might stop and ask on the street would agree. But
why does everyone feel they want to change? There’s only one answer: because they cannot change. If it
were easy for people to change, they wouldn’t spend so much time wishing they could. No matter how
much they wish it, people cannot change. And that’s why there are always so many people getting taken
in by new religions and dubious self-help seminars and any preaching on how everyone can change. Am
I wrong?
PHILOSOPHER: Well, in response, I’d ask why you are so adamant that people can’t change.
YOUTH: Here’s why. I have a friend, a guy, who has shut himself in his room for several years. He wishes
he could go out and even thinks he’d like to have a job, if possible. So he wants to change the way he is. I
say this as his friend, but I assure you he is a very serious person who could be of great use to society.
Except that he’s afraid to leave his room. If he takes even a single step outside, he suffers palpitations, and
his arms and legs shake. It’s a kind of neurosis or panic, I suppose. He wants to change, but he can’t.
PHILOSOPHER: What do you think the reason is that he can’t go out?
YOUTH: I’m not really sure. It could be because of his relationship with his parents, or because he was
bullied at school or work. He might have experienced a kind of trauma from something like that. But
then, it could be the opposite—maybe he was too pampered as a child and can’t face reality. I just don’t
know, and I can’t pry into his past or his family situation.
PHILOSOPHER: So you are saying there were incidents in your friend’s past that became the cause of
trauma, or something similar, and as a result he can’t go out anymore?
YOUTH: Of course. Before an effect, there’s a cause. There is nothing mysterious about that.
PHILOSOPHER: Then perhaps the cause of his not being able to go out anymore lies in the home
environment during his childhood. He was abused by his parents and reached adulthood without ever
feeling love. That’s why he’s afraid of interacting with people and why he can’t go out. It’s feasible, isn’t
it?
YOUTH: Yes, it’s entirely feasible. I’d imagine that would be really challenging.
PHILOSOPHER: And then you say, “Before an effect, there’s a cause.” Or, in other words, who I am now
(the effect) is determined by occurrences in the past (the causes). Do I understand correctly?
YOUTH: You do.
PHILOSOPHER: So if the here and now of everyone in the world is due to their past incidents, according to
you, wouldn’t things turn out very strangely? Don’t you see? Everyone who has grown up abused by his
or her parents would have to suffer the same effects as your friend and become a recluse, or the whole
idea just doesn’t hold water. That is, if the past actually determines the present, and the causes control the
effects.
YOUTH: What, exactly, are you getting at?
PHILOSOPHER: If we focus only on past causes and try to explain things solely through cause and effect,
we end up with “determinism.” Because what this says is that our present and our future have already
been decided by past occurrences, and are unalterable. Am I wrong?
YOUTH: So you’re saying that the past doesn’t matter?
PHILOSOPHER: Yes, that is the standpoint of Adlerian psychology.
YOUTH: I see. The points of conflict seem a bit clearer. But look, if we go by your version, wouldn’t that
ultimately mean that there’s no reason my friend can’t go out anymore? Because you’re saying that past
incidents don’t matter. I’m sorry, but that’s completely out of the question. There has to be some reason
behind his seclusion. There has to be, or there’d be no explanation!
PHILOSOPHER: Indeed, there would be no explanation. So in Adlerian psychology, we do not think about
past “causes” but rather about present “goals.”
YOUTH: Present goals?
PHILOSOPHER: Your friend is insecure, so he can’t go out. Think about it the other way around. He
doesn’t want to go out, so he’s creating a state of anxiety.
YOUTH: Huh?
PHILOSOPHER: Think about it this way. Your friend had the goal of not going out beforehand, and he’s
been manufacturing a state of anxiety and fear as a means to achieve that goal. In Adlerian psychology,
this is called “teleology.”
YOUTH: You’re joking! My friend has imagined his anxiety and fear? So would you go so far as saying that
my friend is just pretending to be sick?
PHILOSOPHER: He is not pretending to be sick. The anxiety and fear your friend is feeling are real. On
occasion, he might also suffer from migraines and violent stomach cramps. However, these too are
symptoms that he has created in order to achieve the goal of not going out.
YOUTH: That’s not true! No way! That’s too depressing!
PHILOSOPHER: No. This is the difference between etiology (the study of causation) and teleology (the
study of the purpose of a given phenomenon, rather than its cause). Everything you have been telling me
is based in etiology. As long as we stay in etiology, we will not take a single step forward.
Trauma Does Not Exist
YOUTH: If you are going to state things so forcibly, I’d like a thorough explanation. To begin with, what is
the difference you refer to between etiology and teleology?
PHILOSOPHER: Suppose you’ve got a cold with a high fever, and you go to see the doctor. Then, suppose
the doctor says the reason for your sickness is that yesterday, when you went out, you weren’t dressed
properly, and that’s why you caught a cold. Now, would you be satisfied with that?
YOUTH: Of course I wouldn’t. It wouldn’t matter to me what the reason was—the way I was dressed or
because it was raining or whatever. It’s the symptoms, the fact that I’m suffering with a high fever now
that would matter to me. If he’s a doctor, I’d need him to treat me by prescribing medicine, giving shots,
or taking whatever specialized measures are necessary.
PHILOSOPHER: Yet those who take an etiological stance, including most counselors and psychiatrists,
would argue that what you were suffering from stemmed from such-and-such cause in the past, and
would then end up just consoling you by saying, “So you see, it’s not your fault.” The argument
concerning so-called traumas is typical of etiology.
YOUTH: Wait a minute! Are you denying the existence of trauma altogether?
PHILOSOPHER: Yes, I am. Adamantly.
YOUTH: What! Aren’t you, or I guess I should say Adler, an authority on psychology?
PHILOSOPHER: In Adlerian psychology, trauma is definitively denied. This was a very new and
revolutionary point. Certainly, the Freudian view of trauma is fascinating. Freud’s idea is that a person’s
psychic wounds (traumas) cause his or her present unhappiness. When you treat a person’s life as a vast
narrative, there is an easily understandable causality and sense of dramatic development that creates
strong impressions and is extremely attractive. But Adler, in denial of the trauma argument, states the
following: “No experience is in itself a cause of our success or failure. We do not suffer from the shock of
our experiences—the so-called trauma—but instead we make out of them whatever suits our purposes.
We are not determined by our experiences, but the meaning we give them is self-determining.”
YOUTH: So we make of them whatever suits our purposes?
PHILOSOPHER: Exactly. Focus on the point Adler is making here when he refers to the self being
determined not by our experiences themselves, but by the meaning we give them. He is not saying that the
experience of a horrible calamity or abuse during childhood or other such incidents have no influence on
forming a personality; their influences are strong. But the important thing is that nothing is actually
determined by those influences. We determine our own lives according to the meaning we give to those
past experiences. Your life is not something that someone gives you, but something you choose yourself,
and you are the one who decides how you live.
YOUTH: Okay, so you’re saying that my friend has shut himself in his room because he actually chooses to
live this way? This is serious. Believe me, it is not what he wants. If anything, it’s something he was forced
to choose because of circumstances. He had no choice other than to become who he is now.
PHILOSOPHER: No. Even supposing that your friend actually thinks, I can’t fit into society because I was
abused by my parents, it’s still because it is his goal to think that way.
YOUTH: What sort of goal is that?
PHILOSOPHER: The immediate thing would probably be the goal of “not going out.” He is creating
anxiety and fear as his reasons to stay inside.
YOUTH: But why doesn’t he want to go out? That’s where the problem resides.
PHILOSOPHER: Well, think of it from the parents’ view. How would you feel if your child were shut up in
a room?
YOUTH: I’d be worried, of course. I’d want to help him return to society, I’d want him to be well, and I’d
wonder if I’d raised him improperly. I’m sure I would be seriously concerned and try in every way
imaginable to help him back to a normal existence.
PHILOSOPHER: That is where the problem is.
YOUTH: Where?
PHILOSOPHER: If I stay in my room all the time, without ever going out, my parents will worry. I can get
all of my parents’ attention focused on me. They’ll be extremely careful around me and always handle
me with kid gloves. On the other hand, if I take even one step out of the house, I’ll just become part of a
faceless mass whom no one pays attention to. I’ll be surrounded by people I don’t know and just end up
average, or less than average. And no one will take special care of me any longer . . . Such stories about
reclusive people are not uncommon.
YOUTH: In that case, following your line of reasoning, my friend has accomplished his goal and is satisfied
with his current situation?
PHILOSOPHER: I doubt he’s satisfied, and I’m sure he’s not happy either. But there is no doubt that he is
also taking action in line with his goal. This is not something that is unique to your friend. Every one of
us is living in line with some goal. That is what teleology tells us.
YOUTH: No way. I reject that as completely unacceptable. Look, my friend is—
PHILOSOPHER: Listen, this discussion won’t go anywhere if we just keep talking about your friend. It will
turn into a trial in absentia, and that would be hopeless. Let’s use another example.
YOUTH: Well, how about this one? It’s my own story about something I experienced yesterday.
PHILOSOPHER: Oh? I’m all ears.
People Fabricate Anger
YOUTH: Yesterday afternoon, I was reading a book in a coffee shop when a waiter passed by and spilled
coffee on my jacket. I’d just bought it and it’s my nicest piece of clothing. I couldn’t help it, I just blew
my top. I yelled at him at the top of my lungs. I’m not normally the type of person who speaks loudly in
public places. But yesterday, the shop was ringing with the sound of my shouting because I flew into a
rage and forgot what I was doing. So how about that? Is there any room for a goal to be involved here?
No matter how you look at it, isn’t this behavior that originates from a cause?
PHILOSOPHER: So you were stimulated by the emotion of anger and ended up shouting. Though you are
normally mild-mannered, you couldn’t resist being angry. It was an unavoidable occurrence, and you
couldn’t do anything about it. Is that what you are saying?
YOUTH: Yes, because it happened so suddenly. The words just came out of my mouth before I had time to
think.
PHILOSOPHER: Then suppose you happened to have had a knife on you yesterday, and when you blew up
you got carried away and stabbed him. Would you still be able to justify that by saying, “It was an
unavoidable occurrence, and I couldn’t do anything about it”?
YOUTH: That . . . Come on, that’s an extreme argument!
PHILOSOPHER: It is not an extreme argument. If we proceed with your reasoning, any offense committed
in anger can be blamed on anger and will no longer be the responsibility of the person because,
essentially, you are saying that people cannot control their emotions.
YOUTH: Well, how do you explain my anger, then?
PHILOSOPHER: That’s easy. You did not fly into a rage and then start shouting. It is solely that you got
angry so that you could shout. In other words, in order to fulfill the goal of shouting, you created the
emotion of anger.
YOUTH: What do you mean?
PHILOSOPHER: The goal of shouting came before anything else. That is to say, by shouting, you wanted to
make the waiter submit to you and listen to what you had to say. As a means to do that, you fabricated
the emotion of anger.
YOUTH: I fabricated it? You’ve got to be joking!
PHILOSOPHER: Then why did you raise your voice?
YOUTH: As I said before, I blew my top. I was deeply frustrated.
PHILOSOPHER: No. You could have explained matters without raising your voice, and the waiter would
most likely have given you a sincere apology, wiped your jacket with a clean cloth, and taken other
appropriate measures. He might have even arranged for it to be dry-cleaned. And somewhere in your
mind, you were anticipating that he might do these things but, even so, you shouted. The procedure of
explaining things in normal words felt like too much trouble, and you tried to get out of that and make
this unresisting person submit to you. The tool you used to do this was the emotion of anger.
YOUTH: No way. You can’t fool me. I manufactured anger in order to make him submit to me? I swear
to you, there wasn’t even a second to think of such a thing. I didn’t think it over and then get angry.
Anger is a more impulsive emotion.
PHILOSOPHER: That’s right, anger is an instantaneous emotion. Now listen, I have a story. One day, a
mother and daughter were quarreling loudly. Then, suddenly, the telephone rang. “Hello?” The mother
picked up the receiver hurriedly, her voice still thick with anger. The caller was her daughter’s homeroom
teacher. As soon as the mother realized who was phoning, the tone of her voice changed and she became
very polite. Then, for the next five minutes or so, she carried on a conversation in her best telephone
voice. Once she hung up, in a moment, her expression changed again and she went straight back to
yelling at her daughter.
YOUTH: Well, that’s not a particularly unusual story.
PHILOSOPHER: Don’t you see? In a word, anger is a tool that can be taken out as needed. It can be put
away the moment the phone rings, and pulled out again after one hangs up. The mother isn’t yelling in
anger she cannot control. She is simply using the anger to overpower her daughter with a loud voice and
thereby assert her opinions.
YOUTH: So anger is a means to achieve a goal?
PHILOSOPHER: That is what teleology says.
YOUTH: Ah, I see now. Under that gentle-looking mask you wear, you’re terribly nihilistic! Whether
we’re talking about anger or my reclusive friend, all your insights are stuffed with feelings of distrust for
human beings!
How to Live Without Being Controlled by the Past
PHILOSOPHER: How am I being nihilistic?
YOUTH: Think about it. Simply put, you deny human emotion. You say that emotions are nothing more
than tools, that they’re just the means for achieving goals. But listen. If you deny emotion, you’re
upholding a view that tries to deny our humanity, too. Because it’s our emotions, and the fact that we are
swayed by all sorts of feelings, that make us human. If emotions are denied, humans will be nothing
more than poor excuses for machines. If that isn’t nihilism, then what is?
PHILOSOPHER: I am not denying that emotion exists. Everyone has emotions. That goes without saying.
But if you are going to tell me that people are beings who can’t resist emotion, I’d argue against that.
Adlerian psychology is a form of thought, a philosophy that is diametrically opposed to nihilism. We are
not controlled by emotion. In this sense, while it shows that people are not controlled by emotion,
additionally it shows that we are not controlled by the past.
YOUTH: So people are not controlled either by emotion or the past?
PHILOSOPHER: Okay, for example, suppose there is someone whose parents had divorced in his past. Isn’t
this something objective, the same as the well water that is always sixty degrees? But then, does that
divorce feel cold or does it feel warm? So this is a “now” thing, a subjective thing. Regardless of what may
have happened in the past, it is the meaning that is attributed to it that determines the way someone’s
present will be.
YOUTH: The question isn’t “What happened?” but “How was it resolved?”
PHILOSOPHER: Exactly. We can’t go back to the past in a time machine. We can’t turn back the hands of
time. If you end up staying in etiology, you will be bound by the past and never be able to find
happiness.
YOUTH: That’s right! We can’t change the past, and that’s precisely why life is so hard.
PHILOSOPHER: Life isn’t just hard. If the past determined everything and couldn’t be changed, we who
are living today would no longer be able to take effective steps forward in our lives. What would happen
as a result? We would end up with the kind of nihilism and pessimism that loses hope in the world and
gives up on life. The Freudian etiology that is typified by the trauma argument is determinism in a
different form, and it is the road to nihilism. Are you going to accept values like that?
YOUTH: I don’t want to accept them, but the past is so powerful.
PHILOSOPHER: Think of the possibilities. If one assumes that people are beings who can change, a set of
values based on etiology becomes untenable, and one is compelled to take the position of teleology as a
matter of course.
YOUTH: So you are saying that one should always take the “people can change” premise?
PHILOSOPHER: Of course. And please understand, it is Freudian etiology that denies our free will and
treats humans like machines.
The young man paused and glanced around the philosopher’s study. Floor-to-ceiling bookshelves
filled the walls, and on a small wooden desk lay a fountain pen and what appeared to be a
partially written manuscript. “People are not driven by past causes but move toward goals that
they themselves set”—that was the philosopher’s claim. The teleology he espoused was an idea
that overturned at the root the causality of respectable psychology, and the young man found
that impossible to accept. So from which standpoint should he start to argue it? The youth took a
deep breath.
Socrates and Adler
YOUTH: All right. Let me tell you about another friend of mine, a man named Y. He’s the kind of person
who has always had a bright personality and talks easily to anyone. He’s like a sunflower—everyone loves
him, and people smile whenever he’s around. In contrast, I am someone who has never had an easy time
socially and who’s kind of warped in various ways. Now, you are claiming that people can change
through Adler’s teleology?
PHILOSOPHER: Yes. You and I and everyone can change.
YOUTH: Then, do you think I could become someone like Y? From the bottom of my heart, I really wish
I could be like him.
PHILOSOPHER: At this point, I’d have to say that’s totally out of the question.
YOUTH: Aha! Now you’re showing your true colors! So are you going to retract your theory?
PHILOSOPHER: No, I am not. Unfortunately, you have almost no understanding of Adlerian psychology
yet. The first step to change is knowing.
YOUTH: So if I can understand just something about Adlerian psychology, can I become a person like Y?
PHILOSOPHER: Why are you rushing for answers? You should arrive at answers on your own, not rely
upon what you get from someone else. Answers from others are nothing more than stopgap measures;
they’re of no value. Take Socrates, who left not one book actually written by himself. He spent his days
having public debates with the citizens of Athens, especially the young, and it was his disciple, Plato, who
put his philosophy into writing for future generations. Adler, too, showed little interest in literary
activities, preferring to engage in personal dialogue at cafés in Vienna, and hold small discussion groups.
He was definitely not an armchair intellectual.
YOUTH: So Socrates and Adler both conveyed their ideas by dialogue?
PHILOSOPHER: That’s right. All your doubts will be dispelled through this dialogue. And you will begin
to change. Not by my words, but by your own doing. I do not want to take away that valuable process of
arriving at answers through dialogue.
YOUTH: So are we going to try and reenact the kind of dialogue that Socrates and Adler carried out? In
this little study?
PHILOSOPHER: Isn’t that good enough for you?
YOUTH: That’s what I’m hoping to find out! So let’s take it as far as we can, until either you retract your
theory or I bow before you.
Are You Okay Just As You Are?
PHILOSOPHER: Okay, let’s go back to your query. So you’d like to be a more upbeat person, like Y?
YOUTH: But you just rejected that and said it was out of the question. Well, I guess that’s just how it is. I
was just saying that to give you a hard time—I know myself well enough. I could never be someone like
that.
PHILOSOPHER: Why not?
YOUTH: It’s obvious. Because we have different personalities, or I guess you could say dispositions.
PHILOSOPHER: Hmm.
YOUTH: You, for instance, live surrounded by all these books. You read a new book and gain new
knowledge. Basically, you keep accumulating knowledge. The more you read, the more your knowledge
increases. You find new concepts of value, and it seems to you that they change you. Look, I hate to
break it to you, but no matter how much knowledge you gain, your disposition or personality isn’t going
to basically change. If your base gets skewed, all you’ve learned will be useless. Yes, all the knowledge
you’ve acquired will come crashing down around you, and then the next thing you know, you’ll be back
to where you started! And the same goes for Adler’s ideas. No matter how many facts I may try to
accumulate about him, they’re not going to have any effect on my personality. Knowledge just gets piled
up as knowledge, until sooner or later it’s discarded.
PHILOSOPHER: Then let me ask you this. Why do you think you want to be like Y? I guess you just want
to be a different person, whether it’s Y or someone else. But what is the goal of that?
YOUTH: You’re talking about goals again? As I said earlier, it’s just that I admire him and I think I’d be
happier if I were like him.
PHILOSOPHER: You think you’d be happier if you were like him. Which means that you are not happy
now, right?
YOUTH: What?
PHILOSOPHER: Right now, you are unable to feel really happy. This is because you have not learned to
love yourself. And to try to love yourself, you are wishing to be reborn as a different person. You’re
hoping to become like Y and throw away who you are now. Correct?
YOUTH: Yes, I guess that’s right! Let’s face it: I hate myself! I, the one who’s doing this playing around
with old-fashioned philosophical discourse, and who just can’t help doing this sort of thing—yes, I really
hate myself.
PHILOSOPHER: That’s all right. If you were to ask around for people who say they like themselves, you’d
be hard-pressed to find someone who’d puff up his or her chest with pride and say, “Yes, I like myself.”
YOUTH: How about you? Do you like yourself?
PHILOSOPHER: At the very least, I do not think I would like to be a different person and I accept who I
am.
YOUTH: You accept who you are?
PHILOSOPHER: Look, no matter how much you want to be Y, you cannot be reborn as him. You are not
Y. It’s okay for you to be you. However, I am not saying it’s fine to be “just as you are.” If you are unable
to really feel happy, then it’s clear that things aren’t right just as they are. You’ve got to put one foot in
front of the other, and not stop.
YOUTH: That’s a harsh way of putting it, but I get your point. It’s clear that I’m not right just the way I
am. I’ve got to move forward.
PHILOSOPHER: To quote Adler again: “The important thing is not what one is born with but what use
one makes of that equipment.” You want to be Y or someone else because you are utterly focused on
what you were born with. Instead, you’ve got to focus on what you can make of your equipment.
Unhappiness Is Something You Choose for Yourself
YOUTH: No way. That’s unreasonable.
PHILOSOPHER: Why is it unreasonable?
YOUTH: Why? Some people are born into affluent circumstances with parents who are nice, and others
are born poor with bad parents. Because that’s how the world is. And I don’t really want to get into this
sort of subject, but things aren’t equal in the world and differences between race, nationality, and
ethnicity remain as deep as ever. It’s only natural to focus on what you were born with. All your talk is
just academic theory—you’re ignoring the real world!
PHILOSOPHER: It is you who is ignoring reality. Does fixating on what you are born with change the
reality? We are not replaceable machines. It is not replacement we need but renewal.
YOUTH: To me, replacement and renewal are one and the same. You’re avoiding the main point. Look,
there is such a thing as unhappiness from birth. Please acknowledge that, first of all.
PHILOSOPHER: I will not acknowledge that.
YOUTH: Why?
PHILOSOPHER: For one thing, right now you are unable to feel real happiness. You find living hard, and
even wish you could be reborn as a different person. But you are unhappy now because you yourself
chose being unhappy. Not because you were born under an unlucky star.
YOUTH: I chose to be unhappy? How can I possibly accept that?
PHILOSOPHER: There’s nothing extraordinary about it. It’s been repeated ever since the classical Greek
era. Have you heard the saying “No one desires evil”? It’s a proposition generally known as a Socratic
paradox.
YOUTH: There’s no shortage of people who desire evil, is there? Of course, there are plenty of thieves and
murderers, and don’t forget all the politicians and officials with their shady deals. It’s probably harder to
find a truly good, upright person who does not desire evil.
PHILOSOPHER: Without question, there is no shortage of behavior that is evil. But no one, not even the
most hardened criminal, becomes involved in crime purely out of a desire to engage in evil acts. Every
criminal has an internal justification for getting involved in crime. A dispute over money leads someone
to engage in murder, for instance. To the perpetrator, it is something for which there is a justification and
which can be restated as an accomplishment of “good.” Of course, this is not good in a moral sense, but
good in the sense of being “of benefit to oneself.”
YOUTH: Of benefit to oneself?
PHILOSOPHER: The Greek word for “good” (agathon) does not have a moral meaning. It just means
“beneficial.” Conversely, the word for “evil” (kakon) means “not beneficial.” Our world is rife with
injustices and misdeeds of all kinds, yet there is not one person who desires evil in the purest sense of the
word, that is to say something “not beneficial.”
YOUTH: What does this have to do with me?
PHILOSOPHER: At some stage in your life, you chose “being unhappy.” It is not because you were born
into unhappy circumstances or ended up in an unhappy situation. It’s that you judged “being unhappy”
to be good for you.
YOUTH: Why? What for?
PHILOSOPHER: How do you justify this? Why did you choose to be unhappy? I have no way of knowing
the specific answer or details. Perhaps it will become clearer as we debate this.
YOUTH: You are really trying to make a fool of me. You think this passes for philosophy? I do not accept
this at all.
In spite of himself, the young man got up and glared at the philosopher. I chose an unhappy life?
Because it was good for me? What an absurd argument! Why is he going to such lengths to ridicule
me? What did I do wrong? I’ll dismantle his argument, no matter what it takes. I’ll make him
kneel before me. The young man’s face flushed with excitement.
People Always Choose Not to Change
PHILOSOPHER: Sit down. As things stand, it’s only natural that our views clash. I will now give a simple
explanation as to the manner in which humans are understood in Adlerian psychology.
YOUTH: Okay, but please be brief.
PHILOSOPHER: Earlier you said that any person’s disposition or personality cannot be changed. In
Adlerian psychology, we describe personality and disposition with the word “lifestyle.”
YOUTH: Lifestyle?
PHILOSOPHER: Yes. Lifestyle is the tendencies of thought and action in life.
YOUTH: Tendencies of thought and action?
PHILOSOPHER: How one sees the world. And how one sees oneself. Think of lifestyle as a concept
bringing together these ways of finding meaning. In a narrow sense, lifestyle could be defined as
someone’s personality; taken more broadly, it is a word that encompasses the worldview of that person
and his or her outlook on life.
YOUTH: A person’s view of the world?
PHILOSOPHER: Say there’s someone who worries about himself and says, “I am a pessimist.” One could
rephrase that to instead say, “I have a pessimistic view of the world.” You could consider that the issue is
not personality but rather the view of the world. It seems that the word “personality” is nuanced and
suggests being unchangeable. But if we’re talking about a view of the world, well, then, that should be
possible to alter.
YOUTH: Hmm. This is kind of confusing. When you speak of a lifestyle, do you mean a way of living?
PHILOSOPHER: Yes, you could put it that way. To be a little more accurate, it is the way one’s life should
be. You probably think of disposition or personality as something with which you are endowed, without
any connection to your will. In Adlerian psychology, however, lifestyle is thought of as something that
you choose for yourself.
YOUTH: That you choose for yourself?
PHILOSOPHER: Yes, exactly. You choose your lifestyle.
YOUTH: So not only did I choose to be unhappy, but I even went so far as to choose this warped
personality, too?
PHILOSOPHER: Absolutely.
YOUTH: Ha! Now you’re really pushing it. When I became aware, I already had this personality. I
certainly don’t have any recollection of having chosen it. But it’s the same for you, isn’t it? Being able to
choose one’s own personality at will . . . Now that sounds like you’re talking about robots, not people.
PHILOSOPHER: Of course, you did not consciously choose “this kind of self.” Your first choice was
probably unconscious, combined with external factors you have referred to—that is, race, nationality,
culture, and home environment. These certainly had a significant influence on that choice. Nevertheless,
it is you who chose “this kind of self.”
YOUTH: I don’t get what you’re saying. How on earth could I have chosen it?
PHILOSOPHER: Adlerian psychology’s view is that it happens around the age of ten.
YOUTH: Well, for argument’s sake—and now I’m really going out on a limb—say that when I was ten, I
unconsciously made this choice of lifestyle or whatever. Would that even matter? You can call it
personality or disposition or lifestyle, but, regardless, I had already become “this kind of self.” The state of
things doesn’t change at all.
PHILOSOPHER: That is not true. If your lifestyle is not something that you were naturally born with, but
something you chose yourself, then it must be possible to choose it over again.
YOUTH: Now you’re saying I can choose it all over?
PHILOSOPHER: Maybe you haven’t been aware of your lifestyle until now, and maybe you haven’t been
aware of the concept of lifestyle either. Of course, no one can choose his or her own birth. Being born in
this country, in this era, and with these parents are things you did not choose. And all these things have a
great deal of influence. You’ll probably face disappointment and start looking at other people and
feeling, I wish I’d been born in their circumstances. But you can’t let it end there. The issue is not the past,
but here, in the present. And now you’ve learned about lifestyle. But what you do with it from here on is
your responsibility. Whether you go on choosing the lifestyle you’ve had up till now, or you choose a
new lifestyle altogether, it’s entirely up to you.
YOUTH: Then how do I choose again? You’re telling me, “You chose that lifestyle yourself, so go ahead
and select a new one instantly,” but there’s no way I can just change on the spot!
PHILOSOPHER: Yes, you can. People can change at any time, regardless of the environments they are in.
You are unable to change only because you are making the decision not to.
YOUTH: What do you mean, exactly?
PHILOSOPHER: People are constantly selecting their lifestyles. Right now, while we are having this tête-àtête,
we are selecting ours. You describe yourself as an unhappy person. You say that you want to change
right this minute. You even claim that you want to be reborn as a different person. After all that, then
why are you still unable to change? It is because you are making the persistent decision not to change
your lifestyle.
YOUTH: No, don’t you see that’s completely illogical? I do want to change; that is my sincere wish. So
how could I be making the decision not to?
PHILOSOPHER: Although there are some small inconveniences and limitations, you probably think that
the lifestyle you have now is the most practical one, and that it’s easier to leave things as they are. If you
stay just like this, experience enables you to respond properly to events as they occur, while guessing the
results of one’s actions. You could say it’s like driving your old, familiar car. It might rattle a bit, but one
can take that into account and maneuver easily. On the other hand, if one chooses a new lifestyle, no one
can predict what might happen to the new self, or have any idea how to deal with events as they arise. It
will be hard to see ahead to the future, and life will be filled with anxiety. A more painful and unhappy
life might lie ahead. Simply put, people have various complaints about things, but it’s easier and more
secure to be just the way one is.
YOUTH: One wants to change, but changing is scary?
PHILOSOPHER: When we try to change our lifestyles, we put our great courage to the test. There is the
anxiety generated by changing, and the disappointment attendant to not changing. I am sure you have
selected the latter.
YOUTH: Wait . . . Just now, you used the word “courage.”
PHILOSOPHER: Yes. Adlerian psychology is a psychology of courage. Your unhappiness cannot be blamed
on your past or your environment. And it isn’t that you lack competence. You just lack courage. One
might say you are lacking in the courage to be happy.
Your Life Is Decided Here and Now
YOUTH: The courage to be happy, huh?
PHILOSOPHER: Do you need further explanation?
YOUTH: No, hold on. This is getting confusing. First, you tell me that the world is a simple place. That it
seems complicated only because of me, and that my subjective view is making it that way. And also, that
life seems complicated just because I make it complicated, all of which is what makes it difficult for me to
live happily. Then you say that one should take the stance of teleology, as opposed to Freudian etiology—
that one must not search for causes in one’s past, and should deny trauma. You say that people act to
achieve some goal or other, instead of being creatures who are driven by causes in their past. Right?
PHILOSOPHER: Yes.
YOUTH: Furthermore, as the major premise of teleology, you say that people can change. That people are
always selecting their own lifestyles.
PHILOSOPHER: That is correct.
YOUTH: So I am unable to change because I myself keep repeatedly making the decision not to change. I
don’t have enough courage to choose a new lifestyle. In other words, I do not have enough courage to be
happy, and that’s why I’m unhappy. Have I got anything wrong?
PHILOSOPHER: No, you haven’t.
YOUTH: Okay, in that case, my question is, What are the real measures I should take? What do I need to
do to change my life? You haven’t explained all that yet.
PHILOSOPHER: You are right. What you should do now is make a decision to stop your current lifestyle.
For instance, earlier you said, “If only I could be someone like Y, I’d be happy.” As long as you live that
way, in the realm of the possibility of “If only such and such were the case,” you will never be able to
change. Because saying “If only I could be like Y” is an excuse to yourself for not changing.
YOUTH: An excuse not to change?
PHILOSOPHER: Yes. I have a young friend who dreams of becoming a novelist, but he never seems to be
able to complete his work. According to him, his job keeps him too busy, and he can never find enough
time to write novels, and that’s why he can’t complete work and enter it for writing awards. But is that
the real reason? No! It’s actually that he wants to leave the possibility of “I can do it if I try” open, by not
committing to anything. He doesn’t want to expose his work to criticism, and he certainly doesn’t want
to face the reality that he might produce an inferior piece of writing and face rejection. He wants to live
inside that realm of possibilities, where he can say that he could do it if he only had the time, or that he
could write if he just had the proper environment, and that he really does have the talent for it. In
another five or ten years, he will probably start using other excuses like “I’m not young anymore” or
“I’ve got a family to think about now.”
YOUTH: I can relate all too well to how he must feel.
PHILOSOPHER: He should just enter his writing for an award, and if he gets rejected, so be it. If he did, he
might grow, or discover that he should pursue something different. Either way, he would be able to
move on. That is what changing your current lifestyle is about. He won’t get anywhere by not
submitting anything.
YOUTH: But maybe his dreams will be shattered.
PHILOSOPHER: Well, I wonder. Having simple tasks—things that should be done—while continually
coming up with various reasons why one can’t do them sounds like a hard way to live, doesn’t it? So in
the case of my friend who dreams of becoming a novelist, it is clearly the “I,” or the “self,” that is making
life complicated and too difficult to live happily.
YOUTH: But . . . That’s harsh. Your philosophy is too tough!
PHILOSOPHER: Indeed, it is strong medicine.
YOUTH: Strong medicine! Yes, I agree.
PHILOSOPHER: But if you change your lifestyle—the way of giving meaning to the world and yourself—
then both your way of interacting with the world and your behavior will have to change as well. Do not
forget this point: One will have to change. You, just as you are, have to choose your lifestyle. It might
seem hard, but it is really quite simple.
YOUTH: According to you, there’s no such thing as trauma, and environment doesn’t matter either. It’s
all just baggage, and my unhappiness is my own fault, right? I’m starting to feel I’m being criticized for
everything I’ve ever been and done!
PHILOSOPHER: No, you are not being criticized. Rather, as Adler’s teleology tells us, “No matter what has
occurred in your life up to this point, it should have no bearing at all on how you live from now on.”
That you, living in the here and now, are the one who determines your own life.
YOUTH: My life is determined at this exact point?
PHILOSOPHER: Yes, because the past does not exist.
YOUTH: All right. Well, I don’t agree with your theories one hundred percent. There are many points I’m
not convinced about and that I would argue against. At the same time, your theories are worth further
consideration, and I’m definitely interested in learning more about Adlerian psychology. I think I’ve had
enough for tonight, but I hope you won’t mind if I come again next week. If I don’t take a break, I think
my head might burst.
PHILOSOPHER: I’m sure you need some time on your own to think things over. I am always here, so you
can visit whenever you like. I enjoyed it. Thank you. Let’s talk again.
YOUTH: Great! One last thing, if I may. Our discussion today was long and got pretty intense, and I guess
I spoke rather rudely. For that, I would like to apologize.
PHILOSOPHER: Don’t worry about it. You should read Plato’s dialogues. The conduct and language of the
disciples of Socrates are surprisingly loose. That’s the way a dialogue is supposed to be.

THE SECOND NIGHT:
All Problems Are Interpersonal Relationship
Problems
The young man was as good as his word. Exactly one week later, he returned to the philosopher’s study.
Truth be told, he’d felt the urge to rush back there only two or three days after his first visit. He had
turned things over in his mind very carefully, and his doubts had turned to certainty. In short, teleology,
the attributing of the purpose of a given phenomenon, rather than its cause, was a sophistry, and the
existence of trauma was beyond question. People cannot simply forget the past, and neither can they
become free from it.
Today, the young man decided, he’d thoroughly dismantle this eccentric philosopher’s theories and
settle matters once and for all.
Why You Dislike Yourself
YOUTH: So after last time, I calmed myself down, focused, and thought things over. And yet, I’ve got to
say, I still can’t agree with your theories.
PHILOSOPHER: Oh? What do you find questionable about them?
YOUTH: Well, for instance, the other day I admitted that I dislike myself. No matter what I do, I can’t find
anything but shortcomings, and I can see no reason why I’d start liking myself. But of course I still want
to. You explain everything as having to do with goals, but what kind of goal could I have here? I mean,
what kind of advantage could there be in my not liking myself? I can’t imagine there’d be a single thing
to gain from it.
PHILOSOPHER: I see. You feel that you don’t have any strong points, that you’ve got nothing but
shortcomings. Whatever the facts might be, that’s how you feel. In other words, your self-esteem is
extremely low. So the questions here, then, are why do you feel so wretched? And, why do you view
yourself with such low esteem?
YOUTH: Because that’s a fact—I really don’t have any strong points.
PHILOSOPHER: You’re wrong. You notice only your shortcomings because you’ve resolved to not start
liking yourself. In order to not like yourself, you don’t see your strong points and focus only on your
shortcomings. First, understand this point.
YOUTH: I have resolved to not start liking myself?
PHILOSOPHER: That’s right. To you, not liking yourself is a virtue.
YOUTH: Why? What for?
PHILOSOPHER: Perhaps this is something you should think about yourself. What sort of shortcomings do
you think you have?
YOUTH: I’m sure you have already noticed. First of all, there’s my personality. I don’t have any selfconfidence,
and I’m always pessimistic about everything. And I guess I’m too self-conscious, because I
worry about what other people see, and then, I live with a constant distrust of other people. I can never
act naturally; there’s always something theatrical about what I say and do. And it’s not just my
personality—there’s nothing to like about my face or my body, either.
PHILOSOPHER: When you go about listing your shortcomings like that, what kind of mood does it put
you in?
YOUTH: Wow, that’s nasty! An unpleasant mood, naturally. I’m sure that no one would want to get
involved with a guy as warped as me. If there were anyone this wretched and bothersome in my vicinity,
I’d keep my distance, too.
PHILOSOPHER: I see. Well, that settles it, then.
YOUTH: What do you mean?
PHILOSOPHER: It might be hard to understand from your own example, so I’ll use another. I use this
study for simple counseling sessions. It must have been quite a few years ago, but there was a female
student who came by. She sat right where you are sitting now, in the same chair. Well, her concern was
her fear of blushing. She told me that she was always turning red whenever she was out in public, and
that she would do anything to rid herself of this. So I asked her, “Well, if you can cure it, what will you
want to do then?” And she said that there was a man she wanted. She secretly had feelings for him but
wasn’t ready to divulge them. Once her fear of blushing was cured, she’d confess her desire to be with
him.
YOUTH: Huh! All right, it sounds like the typical thing a female student would seek counseling for. In
order for her to confess her feelings for him, first she had to cure her blushing problem.
PHILOSOPHER: But is that really the whole case? I have a different opinion. Why did she get this fear of
blushing? And why hadn’t it gotten better? Because she needed that symptom of blushing.
YOUTH: What are you saying exactly? She was asking you to cure it, wasn’t she?
PHILOSOPHER: What do you think was the scariest thing to her, the thing she wanted to avoid most of all?
It was that the man would reject her, of course. The fact that her unrequited love would negate
everything for her, the very existence and possibility of “I.” This aspect is deeply present in adolescent
unrequited love. But as long as she has a fear of blushing, she can go on thinking, I can’t be with him
because I have this fear of blushing. It could end without her ever working up the courage to confess her
feelings to him, and she could convince herself that he would reject her anyway. And finally, she can live
in the possibility that If only my fear of blushing had gotten better, I could have . . .
YOUTH: Okay, so she fabricated that fear of blushing as an excuse for her own inability to confess her
feelings. Or maybe as a kind of insurance for when he rejected her.
PHILOSOPHER: Yes, you could put it that way.
YOUTH: Okay, that is an interesting interpretation. But if that were really the case, wouldn’t it be
impossible to do anything to help her? Since she simultaneously needs that fear of blushing and is
suffering because of it, there’d be no end to her troubles.
PHILOSOPHER: Well, this is what I told her: “Fear of blushing is easy to cure.” She asked, “Really?” I went
on: “But I will not cure it.” She pressed me “Why?” I explained, “Look, it’s thanks to your fear of
blushing that you can accept your dissatisfaction with yourself and the world around you, and with a life
that isn’t going well. It’s thanks to your fear of blushing, and it’s caused by it.” She asked, “How could it
be . . . ?” I went on: “If I did cure it, and nothing in your situation changed at all, what would you do?
You’d probably come here again and say, ‘Give me back my fear of blushing.’ And that would be beyond
my abilities.”
YOUTH: Hmm.
PHILOSOPHER: Her story certainly isn’t unusual. Students preparing for their exams think, If I pass, life
will be rosy. Company workers think, If I get transferred, everything will go well. But even when those
wishes are fulfilled, in many cases nothing about their situations changes at all.
YOUTH: Indeed.
PHILOSOPHER: When a client shows up requesting a cure from fear of blushing, the counselor must not
cure the symptoms. Then recovery is likely to be even more difficult. That is the Adlerian psychology
way of thinking about this kind of thing.
YOUTH: So what specifically do you do, then? Do you ask what they’re worried about and then just leave
it be?
PHILOSOPHER: She didn’t have confidence in herself. She was very afraid that things being what they were,
he’d reject her even if she did confess to him. And if that happened, she’d lose even more confidence and
get hurt. That’s why she created the symptom of the fear of blushing. What I can do is to get the person
first to accept “myself now,” and then regardless of the outcome have the courage to step forward. In
Adlerian psychology, this kind of approach is called “encouragement.”
YOUTH: Encouragement?
PHILOSOPHER: Yes. I’ll explain systematically what it consists of once our discussion has progressed a little
further. We’re not at that stage yet.
YOUTH: That works for me. In the meantime, I’ll keep the word “encouragement” in mind. So whatever
happened to her?
PHILOSOPHER: Apparently, she had the chance to join a group of friends and spend time with the man,
and in the end it was he who confessed his desire to be with her. Of course, she never dropped by this
study again after that. I don’t know what became of her fear of blushing. But she probably didn’t need it
any longer.
YOUTH: Yes, she clearly didn’t have any use for it anymore.
PHILOSOPHER: That’s right. Now, keeping this student’s story in mind, let’s think about your problems.
You say that, at present, you notice only your shortcomings, and it’s unlikely that you’ll ever come to like
yourself. And then you said, “I’m sure that no one would want to get involved with a guy as warped as
me.” I’m sure you understand this already. Why do you dislike yourself? Why do you focus only on your
shortcomings, and why have you decided to not start liking yourself? It’s because you are overly afraid of
being disliked by other people and getting hurt in your interpersonal relationships.
YOUTH: What do you mean by that?
PHILOSOPHER: Just like the young woman with the fear of blushing, who was afraid of being rejected by
the man, you are afraid of being negated by other people. You’re afraid of being treated disparagingly,
being refused, and sustaining deep mental wounds. You think that instead of getting entangled in such
situations, it would be better if you just didn’t have relations with anyone in the first place. In other
words, your goal is to not get hurt in your relationships with other people.
YOUTH: Huh . . .
PHILOSOPHER: Now, how can that goal be realized? The answer is easy. Just find your shortcomings, start
disliking yourself, and become someone who doesn’t enter into interpersonal relationships. That way, if
you can shut yourself into your own shell, you won’t have to interact with anyone, and you’ll even have
a justification ready whenever other people snub you. That it’s because of your shortcomings that you
get snubbed, and if things weren’t this way, you too could be loved.
YOUTH: Ha-ha! Well, you’ve really put me in my place now.
PHILOSOPHER: Don’t be evasive. Being “the way I am” with all these shortcomings is, for you, a precious
virtue. In other words, something that’s to your benefit.
YOUTH: Ouch, that hurts. What a sadist; you’re diabolical! Okay, yes, it’s true: I am afraid. I don’t want to
get hurt in interpersonal relationships. I’m terrified of being snubbed for who I am. It’s hard to admit it,
but you are right.
PHILOSOPHER: Admitting is a good attitude. But don’t forget, it’s basically impossible to not get hurt in
your relations with other people. When you enter into interpersonal relationships, it is inevitable that to a
greater or lesser extent you will get hurt, and you will hurt someone, too. Adler says, “To get rid of one’s
problems, all one can do is live in the universe all alone.” But one can’t do such a thing.
All Problems Are Interpersonal Relationship Problems
YOUTH: Wait a minute! I’m supposed to just let that one slip by? “To get rid of one’s problems, all one
can do is live in the universe all alone”? What do you mean by that? If you lived all alone, wouldn’t you
be horribly lonely?
PHILOSOPHER: Oh, but being alone isn’t what makes you feel lonely. Loneliness is having other people
and society and community around you, and having a deep sense of being excluded from them. To feel
lonely, we need other people. That is to say, it is only in social contexts that a person becomes an
“individual.”
YOUTH: If you were really alone, that is, if you existed completely alone in the universe, you wouldn’t be
an individual and you wouldn’t feel lonely, either?
PHILOSOPHER: I suppose the very concept of loneliness wouldn’t even come up. You wouldn’t need
language, and there’d be no use for logic or common sense, either. But such a thing is impossible. Even if
you lived on an uninhabited island, you would think about someone far across the ocean. Even if you
spend your nights alone, you strain your ears to hear the sound of someone’s breath. As long as there is
someone out there somewhere, you will be haunted by loneliness.
YOUTH: But then you could just rephrase that as, “If one could live in the universe all alone, one’s
problems would go away,” couldn’t you?
PHILOSOPHER: In theory, yes. As Adler goes so far as to assert, “All problems are interpersonal
relationship problems.”
YOUTH: Can you say that again?
PHILOSOPHER: We can repeat it as many times as you like: All problems are interpersonal relationship
problems. This is a concept that runs to the very root of Adlerian psychology. If all interpersonal
relationships were gone from this world, which is to say if one were alone in the universe and all other
people were gone, all manner of problems would disappear.
YOUTH: That’s a lie! It’s nothing more than academic sophistry.
PHILOSOPHER: Of course, we cannot do without interpersonal relationships. A human being’s existence,
in its very essence, assumes the existence of other human beings. Living completely separate from others
is, in principle, impossible. As you are indicating, the premise “If one could live all alone in the universe”
is unsound.
YOUTH: That’s not the issue I am talking about. Sure, interpersonal relationships are probably a big
problem. That much I acknowledge. But to say that everything comes down to interpersonal relationship
problems, now that’s really an extreme position. What about the worry of being cut off from
interpersonal relationships, the kind of problems that an individual agonizes over as an individual,
problems directed to oneself? Do you deny all that?
PHILOSOPHER: There is no such thing as worry that is completely defined by the individual; so-called
internal worry does not exist. Whatever the worry that may arise, the shadows of other people are always
present.
YOUTH: But still, you’re a philosopher. Human beings have loftier, greater problems than things like
interpersonal relationships. What is happiness? What is freedom? And what is the meaning of life? Aren’t
these the themes that philosophers have been investigating ever since the ancient Greeks? And you’re
saying, So what? Interpersonal relationships are everything? It seems kind of pedestrian to me. It’s hard to
believe that a philosopher would say such things.
PHILOSOPHER: Well, then, it seems there’s a need to explain things a bit more concretely.
YOUTH: Yes, please do! If you’re going to tell me that you’re a philosopher, then you’ve got to really
explain things, or else this makes no sense.
PHILOSOPHER: You were so afraid of interpersonal relationships that you came to dislike yourself. You’ve
avoided interpersonal relationships by disliking yourself.
These assertions shook the youth to his very core. The words had an undeniable truth that seemed
to pierce his heart. Even so, he had to find a clear rebuttal to the statement that all the problems
that people experience are interpersonal relationship problems. Adler was trivializing people’s
issues. The problems I’m suffering from aren’t so mundane!
Feelings of Inferiority Are Subjective Assumptions
PHILOSOPHER: Let’s look at interpersonal relationships from a slightly different perspective. Are you
familiar with the term “feeling of inferiority”?
YOUTH: What a silly question. As you can surely tell from our discussion up to now, I’m just a huge blob
of feelings of inferiority.
PHILOSOPHER: What are those feelings, specifically?
YOUTH: Well, for instance, if I see something in a newspaper about a person around my age, someone
who’s really successful, I’m always overcome with these feelings of inferiority. If someone else who’s lived
the same amount of time I have is so successful, then what on earth am I doing with myself? Or when I
see a friend who seems happy, before I even feel like celebrating with him, I’m filled with envy and
frustration. Of course, this pimple-covered face doesn’t help matters, and I’ve got strong feelings of
inferiority when it comes to my education and occupation. And then there’s my income and social
standing. I guess I’m just completely riddled with feelings of inferiority.
PHILOSOPHER: I see. Incidentally, Adler is thought to be the first to use the term “feeling of inferiority” in
the kind of context in which it is spoken of today.
YOUTH: Huh, I didn’t know that.
PHILOSOPHER: In Adler’s native German, the word is Minderwertigkeitsgefühl, which means a feeling
(Gefühl) of having less (minder) worth (Wert). So “feeling of inferiority” has to do with one’s value
judgment of oneself.
YOUTH: Value judgment?
PHILOSOPHER: It’s the feeling that one has no worth, or that one is worth only so much.
YOUTH: Ah, that’s a feeling I know well. That’s me in a nutshell. Not a day goes by without me
tormenting myself that there’s no point in being alive.
PHILOSOPHER: Well, then, let’s have a look at my own feelings of inferiority. When you first met me,
what was your impression? In terms of physical characteristics.
YOUTH: Um, well . . .
PHILOSOPHER: There’s no need to hold back. Be direct.
YOUTH: All right, I guess you were smaller than I’d imagined.
PHILOSOPHER: Thank you. I am 61 inches tall. Adler was apparently around the same height. There was a
time—until I was right around your age, actually—when I was concerned about my height. I was sure
that things would be different if I were of average height, eight or even just four inches taller. As if a more
enjoyable life were waiting for me. I talked to a friend about it when I was having these feelings, and he
said it was “a bunch of nonsense” and simply dismissed it.
YOUTH: That’s horrible! Some friend.
PHILOSOPHER: And then he said, “What would you do if you got taller? You know, you’ve got a gift for
getting people to relax.” With a man who’s big and strong, it’s true, it does seem he can end up
intimidating people just because of his size. With someone small like me, on the other hand, people let go
of their wariness. So it made me realize that having a small build was a desirable thing both to me and to
those around me. In other words, there was a transformation of values. I’m not worried about my height
anymore.
YOUTH: Okay, but that’s—
PHILOSOPHER: Wait until I am finished. The important thing here is that my height of 61 inches wasn’t
inferior.
YOUTH: It wasn’t inferior?
PHILOSOPHER: It was not, in fact, lacking in or lesser than something. Sure, my 61 inches is less than the
average height, and an objectively measured number. At first glance, one might think it inferior. But the
issue is really what sort of meaning I attribute to that height, what sort of value I give it.
YOUTH: What does that mean?
PHILOSOPHER: My feelings about my height were all subjective feelings of inferiority, which arose entirely
through my comparing myself to others. That is to say, in my interpersonal relationships. Because if there
hadn’t been anyone with whom to compare myself, I wouldn’t have had any occasion to think I was
short. Right now, you too are suffering from various feelings of inferiority. But please understand that
what you are feeling is not an objective inferiority but a subjective feeling of inferiority. Even with an
issue like height, it’s all reduced to its subjectivity.
YOUTH: In other words, the feelings of inferiority we’re suffering from are subjective interpretations
rather than objective facts?
PHILOSOPHER: Exactly. Seeing it from my friend’s point of view that I get people to relax or that I don’t
intimidate them—such aspects can become strong points. Of course, this is a subjective interpretation.
You could even say it’s an arbitrary assumption. However, there is one good thing about subjectivity: It
allows you to make your own choice. Precisely because I am leaving it to subjectivity, the choice to view
my height as either an advantage or disadvantage is left open to me.
YOUTH: The argument that you can choose a new lifestyle?
PHILOSOPHER: That’s right. We cannot alter objective facts. But subjective interpretations can be altered
as much as one likes. And we are inhabitants of a subjective world. We talked about this at the very
beginning, right?
YOUTH: Yes; the well water that’s sixty degrees.
PHILOSOPHER: Now, remember the German word for a feeling of inferiority, Minderwertigkeitsgefühl.
As I mentioned a moment ago, “feeling of inferiority” is a term that has to do with one’s value judgment
of oneself. So what on earth could this value be? Okay, take diamonds, for instance, which are traded at a
high value. Or currency. We find particular values for these things and say that one carat is this much,
that prices are such and such. But if you change your point of view, a diamond is nothing but a little
stone.
YOUTH: Well, intellectually it is.
PHILOSOPHER: In other words, value is something that’s based on a social context. The value given to a
one-dollar bill is not an objectively attributed value, though that might be a commonsense approach. If
one considers its actual cost as printed material, the value is nowhere near a dollar. If I were the only
person in this world and no one else existed, I’d probably be putting those one-dollar bills in my fireplace
in wintertime. Maybe I’d be using them to blow my nose. Following exactly the same logic, there should
have been no reason at all for me to worry about my height.
YOUTH: If you were the only person in this world and no one else existed?
PHILOSOPHER: Yes. The problem of value in the end brings us back to interpersonal relationships again.
YOUTH: So this connects to what you were saying about all problems being interpersonal relationship
problems?
PHILOSOPHER: Yes, that’s correct.
An Inferiority Complex Is an Excuse
YOUTH: But can you say for sure that feelings of inferiority are really a problem of interpersonal
relationships? Even the kind of person who is regarded socially as a success, who doesn’t need to debase
himself in relationships with other people, still has some feelings of inferiority? Even the businessman
who amasses enormous wealth, the peerless beauty who is the envy of all, and the Olympic gold medalist
—every one of them would be plagued by feelings of inferiority. Well, that’s how it seems to me. How
should I think about this?
PHILOSOPHER: Adler recognizes that feelings of inferiority are something everyone has. There’s nothing
bad about feelings of inferiority themselves.
YOUTH: So why do people have them in the first place?
PHILOSOPHER: It’s probably necessary to understand this in a certain order. First of all, people enter this
world as helpless beings. And people have the universal desire to escape from that helpless state. Adler
called this the “pursuit of superiority.”
YOUTH: Pursuit of superiority?
PHILOSOPHER: This is something you could think of as simply “hoping to improve” or “pursuing an ideal
state.” For instance, a toddler learns to steady himself on both legs. He has the universal desire to learn
language and to improve. And all the advancements of science throughout human history are due to this
“pursuit of superiority,” too.
YOUTH: Okay. And then?
PHILOSOPHER: The counterpart of this is the feeling of inferiority. Everyone is in this “condition of
wanting to improve” that is the pursuit of superiority. One holds up various ideals or goals and heads
toward them. However, on not being able to reach one’s ideals, one harbors a sense of being lesser. For
instance, there are chefs who, the more inspired and accomplished they become, are forever beset with
the sort of feeling of inferiority that makes them say to themselves, I’m still not good enough, or I’ve got to
bring my cooking to the next level, and that sort of thing.
YOUTH: That’s true.
PHILOSOPHER: Adler is saying that the pursuit of superiority and the feeling of inferiority are not diseases
but stimulants to normal, healthy striving and growth. If it is not used in the wrong way, the feeling of
inferiority, too, can promote striving and growth.
YOUTH: The feeling of inferiority is a kind of launch pad?
PHILOSOPHER: That’s right. One tries to get rid of one’s feeling of inferiority and keep moving forward.
One’s never satisfied with one’s present situation—even if it’s just a single step, one wants to make
progress. One wants to be happier. There is absolutely nothing wrong with the state of this kind of feeling
of inferiority. There are, however, people who lose the courage to take a single step forward, who cannot
accept the fact that the situation can be changed by making realistic efforts. People who, before even
doing anything, simply give up and say things like “I’m not good enough anyway” or “Even if I tried, I
wouldn’t stand a chance.”
YOUTH: Well, that’s true. There’s no doubt about it—if the feeling of inferiority is strong, most people
will become negative and say, “I’m not good enough anyway.” Because that’s what a feeling of inferiority
is.
PHILOSOPHER: No, that’s not a feeling of inferiority—that’s an inferiority complex.
YOUTH: A complex? That’s what the feeling of inferiority is, isn’t it?
PHILOSOPHER: Be careful. The way the word “complex” is used today, it seems to have the same meaning
as “feeling of inferiority.” You hear people saying, “I’ve got a complex about my eyelids,” or “He’s got a
complex about his education,” that sort of thing. This is an utter misuse of the term. At base, “complex”
refers to an abnormal mental state made up of a complicated group of emotions and ideas, and has
nothing to do with the feeling of inferiority. For instance, there’s Freud’s Oedipus complex, which is
used in the context of discussing the abnormal attraction of the child to the opposite-sex parent.
YOUTH: Yes. The nuances of abnormality are especially strong when it comes to the mother complex and
the father complex.
PHILOSOPHER: For the same reason, then, it’s crucial to not mix up “feeling of inferiority” and
“inferiority complex,” and to think about them as clearly separate.
YOUTH: Concretely, how are they different?
PHILOSOPHER: There is nothing particularly wrong with the feeling of inferiority itself. You understand
this point now, right? As Adler says, the feeling of inferiority can be a trigger for striving and growth. For
instance, if one had a feeling of inferiority with regard to one’s education, and resolved to oneself, I’m
not well educated, so I’ll just have to try harder than anyone else, that would be a desirable direction. The
inferiority complex, on the other hand, refers to a condition of having begun to use one’s feeling of
inferiority as a kind of excuse. So one thinks to oneself, I’m not well educated, so I can’t succeed, or I’m not
good-looking, so I can’t get married. When someone is insisting on the logic of “A is the situation, so B
cannot be done” in such a way in everyday life, that is not something that fits in the feeling of inferiority
category. It is an inferiority complex.
YOUTH: No, it’s a legitimate causal relationship. If you’re not well educated, it takes away your chances of
getting work or making it in the world. You’re regarded as low on the social scale, and you can’t succeed.
That’s not an excuse at all. It’s just a cold hard fact, isn’t it?
PHILOSOPHER: No, you are wrong.
YOUTH: How? Where am I wrong?
PHILOSOPHER: What you are calling a causal relationship is something that Adler explains as “apparent
cause and effect.” That is to say, you convince yourself that there is some serious causal relationship
where there is none whatsoever. The other day, someone told me, “The reason I can’t get married easily is
that my parents got divorced when I was a child.” From the viewpoint of Freudian etiology (the
attributing of causes), the parents’ divorce was a great trauma, which connects in a clear causal
relationship with one’s views on marriage. Adler, however, with his stance of teleology (the attributing of
purpose), rejects such arguments as “apparent cause and effect.”
YOUTH: But even so, the reality is that having a good education makes it easier to be successful in society. I
had thought you were wise to the ways of the world.
PHILOSOPHER: The real issue is how one confronts that reality. If what you are thinking is, I’m not well
educated, so I can’t succeed, then instead of I can’t succeed, you should think, I don’t want to succeed.
YOUTH: I don’t want to succeed? What kind of reasoning is that?
PHILOSOPHER: It’s simply that it’s scary to take even one step forward; also, that you don’t want to make
realistic efforts. You don’t want to change so much that you’d be willing to sacrifice the pleasures you
enjoy now—for instance, the time you spend playing and engaged in hobbies. In other words, you’re not
equipped with the courage to change your lifestyle. It’s easier with things just as they are now, even if you
have some complaints or limitations.
Braggarts Have Feelings of Inferiority
YOUTH: Maybe so, but . . .
PHILOSOPHER: Further, you harbor an inferiority complex about education and think, I’m not well
educated, so I can’t succeed. Put the other way around, the reasoning can be, If only I were well educated, I
could be really successful.
YOUTH: Hmm, true.
PHILOSOPHER: This is the other aspect of the inferiority complex. Those who manifest their inferiority
complexes in words or attitudes, who say that “A is the situation, so B cannot be done,” are implying that
if only it were not for A, they’d be capable and have value.
YOUTH: If only it weren’t for this, I could do it, too.
PHILOSOPHER: Yes. As Adler points out, no one is capable of putting up with having feelings of
inferiority for a long period of time. Feelings of inferiority are something that everyone has, but staying
in that condition is too heavy to endure forever.
YOUTH: Huh? This is getting pretty confusing.
PHILOSOPHER: Okay, let’s go over things one at a time. The condition of having a feeling of inferiority is a
condition of feeling some sort of lack in oneself in the present situation. So then, the question is—
YOUTH: How do you fill in the part that’s missing, right?
PHILOSOPHER: Exactly. How to compensate for the part that is lacking. The healthiest way is to try to
compensate through striving and growth. For instance, it could be by applying oneself to one’s studies,
engaging in constant training, or being diligent in one’s work. However, people who aren’t equipped
with that courage end up stepping into an inferiority complex. Again, it’s thinking, I’m not well
educated, so I can’t succeed. And it’s implying your capability by saying, “If only I were well educated, I
could be really successful.” That “the real me,” which just happens to be obscured right now by the
matter of education, is superior.
YOUTH: No, that doesn’t make sense—the second thing you’re saying is beyond a feeling of inferiority.
That’s really more bravado than anything else, isn’t it?
PHILOSOPHER: Indeed. The inferiority complex can also develop into another special mental state.
YOUTH: And what is that?
PHILOSOPHER: I doubt you have heard much about it. It’s the “superiority complex.”
YOUTH: Superiority complex?
PHILOSOPHER: One is suffering from strong feelings of inferiority, and, on top of that, one doesn’t have
the courage to compensate through healthy modes of striving and growth. That being said, one can’t
tolerate the inferiority complex of thinking, A is the situation, so B cannot be done. One can’t accept
“one’s incapable self.” At that point, the person thinks of trying to compensate in some other fashion and
looks for an easier way out.
YOUTH: What way is that?
PHILOSOPHER: It’s to act as if one is indeed superior and to indulge in a fabricated feeling of superiority.
YOUTH: A fabricated feeling of superiority?
PHILOSOPHER: A familiar example would be “giving authority.”
YOUTH: What does that mean?
PHILOSOPHER: One makes a show of being on good terms with a powerful person (broadly speaking—it
could be anyone from the leader of your school class to a famous celebrity). And by doing that, one lets it
be known that one is special. Behaviors like misrepresenting one’s work experience or excessive allegiance
to particular brands of clothing are forms of giving authority, and probably also have aspects of the
superiority complex. In each case, it isn’t that the “I” is actually superior or special. It is only that one is
making the “I” look superior by linking it to authority. In short, it’s a fabricated feeling of superiority.
YOUTH: And at the base of that, there is an intense feeling of inferiority?
PHILOSOPHER: Of course. I don’t know much about fashion, but I think it’s advisable to think of people
who wear rings with rubies and emeralds on all their fingers as having issues with feelings of inferiority,
rather than issues of aesthetic sensibility. In other words, they have signs of a superiority complex.
YOUTH: Right.
PHILOSOPHER: But those who make themselves look bigger on borrowed power are essentially living
according to other people’s value systems—they are living other people’s lives. This is a point that must be
emphasized.
YOUTH: So, a superiority complex. That’s a very interesting psychology. Can you give me a different
example?
PHILOSOPHER: There’s the kind of person who likes to boast about his achievements. Someone who clings
to his past glory and is always recounting memories of the time when his light shone brightest. Maybe
you know some people like this. All such people can be said to have superiority complexes.
YOUTH: The kind of man who boasts about his achievements? Yes, it is an arrogant attitude, but he can
boast because he actually is superior. You can’t call that a fabricated feeling of superiority.
PHILOSOPHER: Ah, but you are wrong. Those who go so far as to boast about things out loud actually
have no confidence in themselves. As Adler clearly indicates, “The one who boasts does so only out of a
feeling of inferiority.”
YOUTH: You’re saying that boasting is an inverted feeling of inferiority?
PHILOSOPHER: That’s right. If one really has confidence in oneself, one doesn’t feel the need to boast. It’s
because one’s feeling of inferiority is strong that one boasts. One feels the need to flaunt one’s superiority
all the more. There’s the fear that if one doesn’t do that, not a single person will accept one “the way I
am.” This is a full-blown superiority complex.
YOUTH: So though one would think from the sound of the words that inferiority complex and superiority
complex were polar opposites, in actuality they border on each other?
PHILOSOPHER: Yes, they are clearly connected. Now, there is one last example I’d like to give, a complex
example that deals with boasting. It is a pattern leading to a particular feeling of superiority that manifests
due to the feeling of inferiority itself becoming intensified. Concretely speaking, it’s bragging about one’s
own misfortune.
YOUTH: Bragging about one’s own misfortune?
PHILOSOPHER: The person who assumes a boasting manner when talking about his upbringing and the
like, the various misfortunes that have rained down upon him. If someone should try to comfort this
person, or suggest some change be made, he’ll refuse the helping hand by saying, “You don’t understand
how I feel.”
YOUTH: Well, there are people like that, but . . .
PHILOSOPHER: Such people try to make themselves “special” by way of their experience of misfortune,
and with the single fact of their misfortune try to place themselves above others. Take the fact that I am
short, for instance. Let’s say that kind-hearted people come up to me and say, “It’s nothing to worry
about,” or “Such things have nothing to do with human values.” Now, if I were to reject them and say,
“You think you know what short people go through, huh?” no one would say a thing to me anymore.
I’m sure that everyone around me would start treating me just as if I were a boil about to burst and
would handle me very carefully—or, I should say, circumspectly.
YOUTH: Absolutely true.
PHILOSOPHER: By doing that, my position becomes superior to other people’s, and I can become special.
Quite a few people try to be “special” by adopting this kind of attitude when they are sick or injured, or
suffering the mental anguish of heartbreak.
YOUTH: So they reveal their feeling of inferiority and use it to their advantage?
PHILOSOPHER: Yes. They use their misfortune to their advantage and try to control the other party with
it. By declaring how unfortunate they are and how much they have suffered, they are trying to worry the
people around them (their family and friends, for example), and to restrict their speech and behavior, and
control them. The people I was talking about at the very beginning, who shut themselves up in their
rooms, frequently indulge in feelings of superiority and use misfortune to their advantage. So much so
that Adler himself pointed out, “In our culture weakness can be quite strong and powerful.”
YOUTH: So weakness is powerful?
PHILOSOPHER: Adler says, “In fact, if we were to ask ourselves who is the strongest person in our culture,
the logical answer would be, the baby. The baby rules and cannot be dominated.” The baby rules over
the adults with his weakness. And it is because of this weakness that no one can control him.
YOUTH: I’ve never encountered that viewpoint.
PHILOSOPHER: Of course, the words of the person who has been hurt—“You don’t understand how I
feel”—are likely to contain a certain degree of truth. Completely understanding the feelings of the person
who is suffering is something that no one is capable of. But as long as one continues to use one’s
misfortune to one’s advantage in order to be “special,” one will always need that misfortune.
The youth and philosopher had now covered a series of discussion topics: the feeling of
inferiority, the inferiority complex, and the superiority complex. Psychology keywords though
they clearly were, the truths they contained differed greatly from the youth’s imagined meanings.
Still, something didn’t feel right to him, somehow. What is it about all this that I’m having a
hard time accepting? Well, it must be the introductory part, the premise, that is giving me doubts.
The youth calmly opened his mouth to speak.
Life Is Not a Competition
YOUTH: But I guess I still don’t really get it.
PHILOSOPHER: Okay, ask me anything you like.
YOUTH: Adler recognizes that the pursuit of superiority—one’s trying to be a more superior being—is a
universal desire, doesn’t he? On the other hand, he’s striking a note of warning with regard to excessive
feelings of inferiority and superiority. It’d be easy to understand if he could renounce the pursuit of
superiority—then I could accept it. What are we supposed to do?
PHILOSOPHER: Think about it this way. When we refer to the pursuit of superiority, there’s a tendency to
think of it as the desire to try to be superior to other people; to climb higher, even if it means kicking
others down—you know, the image of ascending a stairway and pushing people out of the way to get to
the top. Adler does not uphold such attitudes, of course. Rather, he’s saying that on the same level
playing field, there are people who are moving forward, and there are people who are moving forward
behind them. Keep that image in mind. Though the distance covered and the speed of walking differ,
everyone is walking equally in the same flat place. The pursuit of superiority is the mind-set of taking a
single step forward on one’s own feet, not the mind-set of competition of the sort that necessitates aiming
to be greater than other people.
YOUTH: So life is not a competition?
PHILOSOPHER: That’s right. It’s enough to just keep moving in a forward direction, without competing
with anyone. And, of course, there is no need to compare oneself with others.
YOUTH: No, that’s impossible. We’ll always compare ourselves to other people, no matter what. That’s
exactly where our feeling of inferiority comes from, isn’t it?
PHILOSOPHER: A healthy feeling of inferiority is not something that comes from comparing oneself to
others; it comes from one’s comparison with one’s ideal self.
YOUTH: But . . .
PHILOSOPHER: Look, all of us are different. Gender, age, knowledge, experience, appearance—no two of
us are exactly the same. Let’s acknowledge in a positive manner the fact that other people are different
from us. And that we are not the same, but we are equal.
YOUTH: We are not the same, but we are equal?
PHILOSOPHER: That’s right. Everyone is different. Don’t mix up that difference with good and bad, and
superior and inferior. Whatever differences we may have, we are all equal.
YOUTH: No distinction of rank for people. Idealistically speaking, I suppose so. But aren’t we trying to
have an honest discussion about reality now? Would you really say, for instance, that I, an adult, and a
child who is still struggling with his arithmetic are equal?
PHILOSOPHER: In terms of the amount of knowledge and experience, and then the amount of
responsibility that can be taken, there are bound to be differences. The child might not be able to tie his
shoes properly, or figure out complicated mathematical equations, or be able to take the same degree of
responsibility as an adult when problems arise. However, such things shouldn’t have anything to do with
human values. My answer is the same. Human beings are all equal, but not the same.
YOUTH: Then are you saying that a child should be treated like a full-grown adult?
PHILOSOPHER: No. Instead of treating the child like an adult, or like a child, one must treat him or her like
a human being. One interacts with the child with sincerity, as another human being just like oneself.
YOUTH: Let’s change the question. All people are equal. They’re on the same level playing field. But
actually, there’s a disparity here, isn’t there? Those who move forward are superior, and those who
pursue them from behind are inferior. So we end up at the problem of superior and inferior, don’t we?
PHILOSOPHER: No, we do not. It does not matter if one is trying to walk in front of others or walk behind
them. It is as if we are moving through a flat space that has no vertical axis. We do not walk in order to
compete with someone. It is in trying to progress past who one is now that there is value.
YOUTH: Have you become free from all forms of competition?
PHILOSOPHER: Of course. I do not think about gaining status or honor, and I live my life as an outsider
philosopher without any connection whatsoever to worldly competition.
YOUTH: Does that mean you dropped out of competition? That you somehow accepted defeat?
PHILOSOPHER: No. I withdrew from places that are preoccupied with winning and losing. When one is
trying to be oneself, competition will inevitably get in the way.
YOUTH: No way! That’s a tired-out old man’s argument. Young folks like me have to pull themselves up
by their own bootstraps amid the tension of competition. It’s because I don’t have a rival running
alongside me that I can’t outdo myself. What’s wrong with thinking of interpersonal relationships as
competitive?
PHILOSOPHER: If that rival was someone you could call a comrade, it’s possible that it would lead to selfimprovement.
But in many cases, a competitor will not be your comrade.
YOUTH: Meaning what, exactly?
You’re the Only One Worrying About Your Appearance
PHILOSOPHER: Let’s tie up the loose ends. At the outset, you expressed dissatisfaction with Adler’s
definition that all problems are interpersonal relationship problems, right? That was the basis for our
discussion on feelings of inferiority.
YOUTH: Yes, that’s correct. The subject of feelings of inferiority was too intense, and I was on the verge of
forgetting that point. Why did you bring up the subject in the first place?
PHILOSOPHER: It is connected with the subject of competition. Please remember that. If there is
competition at the core of a person’s interpersonal relationships, he will not be able to escape
interpersonal relationship problems or escape misfortune.
YOUTH: Why not?
PHILOSOPHER: Because at the end of a competition, there are winners and losers.
YOUTH: It’s perfectly fine to have winners and losers!
PHILOSOPHER: Give some thought to it, then, if it were you, specifically, who had a consciousness of
being in competition with the people around you. In your relations with them, you would have no
choice but to be conscious of victory or defeat. Mr. A got into this famous university, Mr. B found work
at that big company, and Mr. C has hooked up with such a nice-looking woman—and you’ll compare
yourself to them and think, This is all I’ve got.
YOUTH: Ha-ha. That’s pretty specific.
PHILOSOPHER: When one is conscious of competition and victory and defeat, it is inevitable that feelings
of inferiority will arise. Because one is constantly comparing oneself to others and thinking, I beat that
person or I lost to that person. The inferiority complex and the superiority complex are extensions of that.
Now, what kind of being do you think the other person is to you, at that point?
YOUTH: I don’t know—a rival, I guess?
PHILOSOPHER: No, not a mere rival. Before you know it, you start to see each and every person, everyone
in the whole world, as your enemy.
YOUTH: My enemy?
PHILOSOPHER: You start to think that people are always looking down on you and treating you with
scorn, that they’re all enemies who must never be underestimated, who lie in wait for any opening and
attack at the drop of a hat. In short, that the world is a terrifying place.
YOUTH: Enemies who must never be underestimated . . . That’s who I’m in competition with?
PHILOSOPHER: This is what is so terrifying about competition. Even if you’re not a loser, even if you’re
someone who keeps on winning, if you are someone who has placed himself in competition, you will
never have a moment’s peace. You don’t want to be a loser. And you always have to keep on winning if
you don’t want to be a loser. You can’t trust other people. The reason so many people don’t really feel
happy while they’re building up their success in the eyes of society is that they are living in competition.
Because to them, the world is a perilous place that is overflowing with enemies.
YOUTH: I suppose so, but . . .
PHILOSOPHER: But do other people actually look at you so much? Are they really watching you around
the clock and lying in wait for the perfect moment to attack? It seems rather unlikely. A young friend of
mine, when he was a teenager, used to spend a lot of time in front of the mirror arranging his hair. And
once, when he was doing that, his grandmother said, “You’re the only one who’s worried how you look.”
He says that it got a bit easier for him to deal with life after that.
YOUTH: Hey, that’s a dig at me, isn’t it? Sure, maybe I do see the people around me as enemies. I’m
constantly in fear of being attacked, of the arrows that could come flying at me at any moment. I always
think that I’m being watched by others, that I’m being subjected to harsh judgment, and that I’m going
to be attacked. And it’s probably true that this is a self-conscious reaction, just like the mirror-obsessed
teenager. The people of the world aren’t paying attention to me. Even if I were to go walking on my
hands down the street, they’d take no notice! But I don’t know. Are you saying, after all, that my feeling
of inferiority is something that I chose, that has some sort of goal? That just doesn’t make any sense to
me.
PHILOSOPHER: And why is that?
YOUTH: I have a brother who is three years older than I am. He fits the classic image of the big brother—
he always does what our parents say, he excels in his studies and in sports, and he’s the very picture of
diligence. And from the time I was little, I was always compared to him. He is older and more advanced,
so of course I could never beat him at anything. Our parents did not care at all about such circumstances,
and never gave me any sign of recognition. Whatever I did, I got treated like a child, and I was berated at
every opportunity and told to be quiet. I learned to keep my feelings to myself. I’ve lived my life totally
steeped in feelings of inferiority, and I had no choice but to be conscious of being in competition with
my brother!
PHILOSOPHER: I see.
YOUTH: Sometimes I think of it like this: I’m like a gourd that grew without getting enough sun. So it is
only natural that I’m all twisted up with feelings of inferiority. If there’s anyone who could grow straight
in such a situation, well, I’d love to meet him!
PHILOSOPHER: I understand. I really do understand how you feel. Now, let’s look at “competition” while
taking into consideration your relationship with your brother. If you didn’t think with a competition
orientation, with regard to your brother and your other interpersonal relationships, how would people
seem to you?
YOUTH: Well, my brother is my brother, and I guess other people are another story.
PHILOSOPHER: No, they should become more positive comrades.
YOUTH: Comrades?
PHILOSOPHER: Earlier, didn’t you say, “I can’t celebrate other people’s happiness with all my heart”? You
think of interpersonal relationships as competition; you perceive other people’s happiness as “my defeat,”
and that is why you can’t celebrate it. However, once one is released from the schema of competition, the
need to triumph over someone disappears. One is also released from the fear that says, Maybe I will lose.
And one becomes able to celebrate other people’s happiness with all one’s heart. One may become able to
contribute actively to other people’s happiness. The person who always has the will to help another in
times of need—that is someone who may properly be called your comrade.
YOUTH: Hmm.
PHILOSOPHER: Now we come to the important part. When you are able to truly feel that “people are my
comrades,” your way of looking at the world will change utterly. No longer will you think of the world
as a perilous place, or be plagued by needless doubts; the world will appear before you as a safe and
pleasant place. And your interpersonal relationship problems will decrease dramatically.
YOUTH: What a happy person you are! But you know, that’s all like a sunflower. It’s the reasoning of a
sunflower that is bathed in full sunshine every day and is nurtured with ample watering. A gourd grown
in the dim shade doesn’t do so well!
PHILOSOPHER: You are returning to etiology (the attributing of causes) again.
YOUTH: Oh, yes, I sure am!
Raised by strict parents, the youth had been oppressed and compared to his elder brother ever
since childhood. None of his opinions were ever heard, and he was subjected to the violent words
that he was a poor excuse for a little brother. Unable to make friends even at school, he spent all
his free time alone in the library, which became his sole place of refuge. This youth who had
passed his early years in such a way was truly an inhabitant of etiology. If he had not been raised
by those parents, if that elder brother had never existed, and if he had not attended that school, he
could have had a brighter life. The youth had been trying to participate in the discussion as
coolheadedly as possible, but now his many years of pent-up feelings came bursting out.
From Power Struggle to Revenge
YOUTH: Okay, all this talk about teleology and such is pure sophistry, and trauma definitely does exist.
And people cannot break free from the past. Surely you realize that? We cannot go back to the past in a
time machine. As long as the past exists as the past, we live within contexts from the past. If one were to
treat the past as something that does not exist, that would be the same as negating the entire life one has
led. Are you suggesting I choose such an irresponsible life?
PHILOSOPHER: It is true that one cannot use a time machine or turn back the hands of time. But what
kind of meaning does one attribute to past events? This is the task that is given to “you now.”
YOUTH: All right, so let’s talk about “now.” Last time, you said that people fabricate the emotion of anger,
right? And that that is the standpoint of teleology. I still cannot accept that statement. For example, how
would you explain instances of anger toward society, or anger toward government? Would you say that
these, too, are emotions fabricated in order to push one’s opinions?
PHILOSOPHER: Certainly, there are times when I feel indignation with regard to social problems. But I
would say that rather than a sudden burst of emotion, it is indignation based on logic. There is a
difference between personal anger (personal grudge) and indignation with regard to society’s
contradictions and injustices (righteous indignation). Personal anger soon cools. Righteous indignation,
on the other hand, lasts for a long time. Anger as an expression of a personal grudge is nothing but a tool
for making others submit to you.
YOUTH: You say that personal grudges and righteous indignation are different?
PHILOSOPHER: They are completely different. Because righteous indignation goes beyond one’s own
interests.
YOUTH: Then I’ll ask about personal grudges. Surely even you get angry sometimes—for instance, if
someone hurls abuse at you for no particular reason—don’t you?
PHILOSOPHER: No, I do not.
YOUTH: Come on, be honest.
PHILOSOPHER: If someone were to abuse me to my face, I would think about the person’s hidden goal.
Even if you are not directly abusive, when you feel genuinely angry due to another person’s words or
behavior, please consider that the person is challenging you to a power struggle.
YOUTH: A power struggle?
PHILOSOPHER: For instance, a child will tease an adult with various pranks and misbehaviors. In many
cases, this is done with the goal of getting attention and will cease just before the adult gets genuinely
angry. However, if the child does not stop before the adult gets genuinely angry, then his goal is actually
to get in a fight.
YOUTH: Why would he want to get in a fight?
PHILOSOPHER: He wants to win. He wants to prove his power by winning.
YOUTH: I don’t really get that. Could you give me some concrete examples?
PHILOSOPHER: Let’s say you and a friend have been discussing the current political situation. Before long,
it turns into a heated argument, and neither of you is willing to accept any differences of opinion until
finally it reaches the point where he starts engaging in personal attacks—that you’re stupid, and it’s
because of people like you that this country doesn’t change, that sort of thing.
YOUTH: But if someone said that to me, I wouldn’t be able to put up with it.
PHILOSOPHER: In this case, what is the other person’s goal? Is it only that he wants to discuss politics? No,
it isn’t. It’s that he finds you unbearable, and he wants to criticize and provoke you, and make you
submit through a power struggle. If you get angry at this point, the moment he has been anticipating will
arrive, and the relationship will suddenly turn into a power struggle. No matter what the provocation,
you must not get taken in.
YOUTH: No, there’s no need to run away from it. If someone wants to start a fight, it’s fine to accept it.
Because it’s the other guy who’s at fault, anyway. You can bash his nose in, the stupid fool. With words,
that is.
PHILOSOPHER: Now let’s say you take control of the quarrel. And then the other man, who was seeking to
defeat you, withdraws in a sportsmanlike manner. The thing is, the power struggle doesn’t end there.
Having lost the dispute, he rushes on to the next stage.
YOUTH: The next stage?
PHILOSOPHER: Yes. It’s the revenge stage. Though he has withdrawn for the time being, he will be
scheming some revenge in another place and another form, and will reappear with an act of retaliation.
YOUTH: Like what, for instance?
PHILOSOPHER: The child oppressed by his parents will turn to delinquency. He’ll stop going to school.
He’ll cut his wrists or engage in other acts of self-harm. In Freudian etiology, this is regarded as simple
cause and effect: The parents raised the child in this way, and that is why the child grew up to be like this.
It’s just like pointing out that a plant wasn’t watered, so it withered. It’s an interpretation that is certainly
easy to understand. But Adlerian teleology does not turn a blind eye to the goal that the child is hiding.
That is to say, the goal of revenge on the parents. If he becomes a delinquent, stops going to school, cuts
his wrists, or things like that, the parents will be upset. They’ll panic and worry themselves sick over him.
It is in the knowledge that this will happen that the child engages in problem behavior. So that the current
goal (revenge on the parents) can be realized, not because he is motivated by past causes (home
environment).
YOUTH: He engages in problem behavior in order to upset his parents?
PHILOSOPHER: That’s right. There are probably a lot of people who feel mystified by seeing a child who
cuts his wrists, and they think, Why would he do such a thing? But try to think how the people around the
child—the parents, for instance—will feel as a result of the behavior of wrist cutting. If you do, the goal
behind the behavior should come into view of its own accord.
YOUTH: The goal being revenge?
PHILOSOPHER: Yes. And once the interpersonal relationship reaches the revenge stage, it is almost
impossible for either party to find a solution. To prevent this from happening, when one is challenged to
a power struggle, one must never allow oneself to be taken in.
Admitting Fault Is Not Defeat
YOUTH: All right, then what should you do when you’re subjected to personal attacks right to your face?
Do you just grin and bear it?
PHILOSOPHER: No, the idea that you are “bearing it” is proof that you are still stuck in the power struggle.
When you are challenged to a fight, and you sense that it is a power struggle, step down from the conflict
as soon as possible. Do not answer his action with a reaction. That is the only thing we can do.
YOUTH: But is it really that easy to not respond to provocation? In the first place, how would you say I
should control my anger?
PHILOSOPHER: When you control your anger, you’re “bearing it,” right? Instead, let’s learn a way to settle
things without using the emotion of anger. Because after all, anger is a tool. A means for achieving a goal.
YOUTH: That’s a tough one.
PHILOSOPHER: The first thing that I want you to understand here is the fact that anger is a form of
communication, and that communication is nevertheless possible without using anger. We can convey
our thoughts and intentions and be accepted without any need for anger. If you learn to understand this
experientially, the anger emotion will stop appearing all on its own.
YOUTH: But what if they come at you with mistaken accusations, or make insulting comments? I
shouldn’t get angry even then?
PHILOSOPHER: You don’t seem to understand yet. It’s not that you mustn’t get angry, but that there is no
need to rely on the tool of anger. Irascible people do not have short tempers—it is only that they do not
know that there are effective communication tools other than anger. That is why people end up saying
things like “I just snapped” or, “He flew into a rage.” We end up relying on anger to communicate.
YOUTH: Effective communication tools other than anger . . .
PHILOSOPHER: We have language. We can communicate through language. Believe in the power of
language and the language of logic.
YOUTH: Certainly, if I did not believe in that, we wouldn’t be having this dialogue.
PHILOSOPHER: One more thing about power struggles. In every instance, no matter how much you
might think you are right, try not to criticize the other party on that basis. This is an interpersonal
relationship trap that many people fall into.
YOUTH: Why’s that?
PHILOSOPHER: The moment one is convinced that “I am right” in an interpersonal relationship, one has
already stepped into a power struggle.
YOUTH: Just because you think you’re right? No way, that’s just blowing things all out of proportion.
PHILOSOPHER: I am right. That is to say, the other party is wrong. At that point, the focus of the
discussion shifts from “the rightness of the assertions” to “the state of the interpersonal relationship.” In
other words, the conviction that “I am right” leads to the assumption that “this person is wrong,” and
finally it becomes a contest and you are thinking, I have to win. It’s a power struggle through and
through.
YOUTH: Hmm.
PHILOSOPHER: In the first place, the rightness of one’s assertions has nothing to do with winning or
losing. If you think you are right, regardless of what other people’s opinions might be, the matter should
be closed then and there. However, many people will rush into a power struggle and try to make others
submit to them. And that is why they think of “admitting a mistake” as “admitting defeat.”
YOUTH: Yes, there definitely is that aspect.
PHILOSOPHER: Because of one’s mind-set of not wanting to lose, one is unable to admit one’s mistake, the
result being that one ends up choosing the wrong path. Admitting mistakes, conveying words of
apology, and stepping down from power struggles—none of these things is defeat. The pursuit of
superiority is not something that is carried out through competition with other people.
YOUTH: So when you’re hung up on winning and losing, you lose the ability to make the right choices?
PHILOSOPHER: Yes. It clouds your judgment, and all you can see is imminent victory or defeat. Then you
turn down the wrong path. It’s only when we take away the lenses of competition and winning and
losing that we can begin to correct and change ourselves.
Overcoming the Tasks That Face You in Life
YOUTH: Okay, but there’s still a problem. It’s the statement “All problems are interpersonal relationship
problems.” I can see that the feeling of inferiority is an interpersonal relationship worry, and that it has
certain effects on us. And I accept as logical the idea that life is not a competition. I cannot see other
people as comrades, and somewhere inside me I think of them as enemies. This is clearly the case. But the
thing I find puzzling is, why does Adler place so much importance on interpersonal relationships? Why
does he go so far as to say “all” of them?
PHILOSOPHER: The issue of interpersonal relationships is so important that no matter how broadly it is
addressed, it never seems to suffice. Last time I told you, “What you are lacking is the courage to be
happy.” You remember that, right?
YOUTH: I couldn’t forget it if I tried.
PHILOSOPHER: So why do you see other people as enemies, and why can’t you think of them as your
comrades? It is because you have lost your courage and you are running away from your “life tasks.”
YOUTH: My life tasks?
PHILOSOPHER: Right. This is a crucial point. In Adlerian psychology, clear objectives are laid out for
human behavior and psychology.
YOUTH: What sort of objectives?
PHILOSOPHER: First, there are two objectives for behavior: to be self-reliant and to live in harmony with
society. Then, the two objectives for the psychology that supports these behaviors are the consciousness
that I have the ability and the consciousness that people are my comrades.
YOUTH: Just a moment. I’m writing this down . . . There are the following two objectives for behavior: to
be self-reliant and to live in harmony with society. And there are the following two objectives for the
psychology that supports these behaviors: the consciousness that I have the ability and the consciousness
that people are my comrades . . . Okay, I can see that it is a crucial subject: to be self-reliant as an individual
while living in harmony with people and society. It seems to tie in with everything we’ve been discussing.
PHILOSOPHER: And these objectives can be achieved by facing what Adler calls “life tasks.”
YOUTH: What are life tasks?
PHILOSOPHER: Let’s think of the word “life” as tracing back to childhood. During childhood, we are
protected by our parents and can live without needing to work. But eventually, the time comes when
one has to be self-reliant. One cannot be dependent on one’s parents forever, and one has to be selfreliant
mentally, of course, and self-reliant in a social sense as well, and one has to engage in some form of
work—which is not limited to the narrow definition of working at a company. Furthermore, in the
process of growing up, one begins to have all kinds of friend relationships. Of course, one may form a
love relationship with someone that may even lead to marriage. If it does, one will start a marital
relationship, and if one has children, a parent-child relationship will begin. Adler made three categories of
the interpersonal relationships that arise out of these processes. He referred to them as “tasks of work,”
“tasks of friendship,” and “tasks of love,” and all together as “life tasks.”
YOUTH: Are these tasks the obligations one has as a member of society? In other words, things like labor
and payment of taxes?
PHILOSOPHER: No, please think of this solely in terms of interpersonal relationships. That is, the distance
and depth in one’s interpersonal relationships. Adler sometimes used the expression “three social ties” to
emphasize the point.
YOUTH: The distance and depth in one’s interpersonal relationships?
PHILOSOPHER: The interpersonal relationships that a single individual has no choice but to confront
when attempting to live as a social being—these are the life tasks. They are indeed tasks in the sense that
one has no choice but to confront them.
YOUTH: Would you be more specific?
PHILOSOPHER: First, let’s look at the tasks of work. Regardless of the kind of work, there is no work that
can be completed all by oneself. For instance, I am usually here in my study writing a manuscript.
Writing is completely autonomous work that I cannot have someone else do for me. But then there is the
presence of the editor and many others, without whose assistance the work would not be realized, from
the people who handle book design and printing to the distribution and bookstore staff. Work that can be
completed without the cooperation of other people is in principle unfeasible.
YOUTH: Broadly speaking, I suppose so.
PHILOSOPHER: However, considered from the viewpoint of distance and depth, interpersonal
relationships of work may be said to have the lowest hurdles. Interpersonal relationships of work have the
easy-to-understand common objective of obtaining good results, so people can cooperate even if they
don’t always get along, and to some extent they have no choice but to cooperate. And as long as a
relationship is formed solely on the basis of work, it will go back to being a relationship with an outsider
when working hours are over or one changes jobs.
YOUTH: Yes, so true.
PHILOSOPHER: And the ones who get tripped up in the interpersonal relationships at this stage are the
people referred to as “NEETs” (a young person not in education, employment, or training) or “shut-ins”
(a person confined indoors).
YOUTH: Huh? Wait a minute! Are you saying that they don’t try to work simply because they want to
avoid the interpersonal relationships that are associated with work, not that they don’t want to work or
that they’re refusing to do manual labor?
PHILOSOPHER: Putting aside the question of whether or not they are conscious of it themselves,
interpersonal relationships are at the core. For example, a man sends out résumés to find work and gets
interviews, only to be rejected by one company after another. It hurts his pride. He starts to wonder what
the purpose in working is if he has to go through such things. Or he makes a big mistake at work. The
company is going to lose a huge sum of money because of him. Feeling utterly hopeless, as if he’s plunged
into darkness, he can’t bear the thought of coming in to work the following day. None of these are
examples of the work itself becoming disagreeable. What is disagreeable is being criticized or rebuked by
others through the work, getting labeled as having no ability or being incompetent or unsuited to the
work, and hurting the dignity of one’s irreplaceable self. In other words, everything is an interpersonal
relationship issue.
Red String and Rigid Chains
YOUTH: Well, I’ll save my objections for later. Next, what about the task of friendship?
PHILOSOPHER: This is a friend relationship in a broader sense, away from work, as there is none of the
compulsion of the workplace. It is a relationship that is difficult to initiate or deepen.
YOUTH: Ah, you’ve got that right! If there’s a space, like one’s school or workplace, one can still build a
relationship. But then it would be a superficial relationship that is limited to that space. To even attempt
to initiate a personal friend relationship, or find a friend in a place outside the school or workplace,
would be extremely difficult.
PHILOSOPHER: Do you have anyone whom you would call a close friend?
YOUTH: I have a friend. But I’m not sure I’d call him a close friend . . .
PHILOSOPHER: It used to be the same for me. When I was in high school, I did not even try to make
friends and spent my days studying Greek and German, quietly absorbed in reading philosophy books.
My mother was worried about me and went to consult my homeroom teacher. And my teacher told her,
“There’s no need to worry. He’s a person who doesn’t need friends.” Those words were very
encouraging to my mother, and to me as well.
YOUTH: A person who doesn’t need friends? So in high school you didn’t have a single friend?
PHILOSOPHER: I did have one friend. He said, “There’s nothing really worth learning at a university,” and
in the end he actually did not enter university. He went into seclusion up in the mountains for several
years, and these days I hear he’s working in journalism in Southeast Asia. I haven’t seen him in decades,
but I have the feeling that if we got together again, we’d be able to hang out just as we did back then. A
lot of people think that the more friends you have the better, but I’m not so sure about that. There’s no
value at all in the number of friends or acquaintances you have. And this is a subject that connects with
the task of love, but what we should be thinking about is the distance and depth of the relationship.
YOUTH: Will it be possible for me to make close friends?
PHILOSOPHER: Of course it will. If you change, those around you will change too. They will have no
choice but to change. Adlerian psychology is a psychology for changing oneself, not a psychology for
changing others. Instead of waiting for others to change or waiting for the situation to change, you take
the first step forward yourself.
YOUTH: Hmm . . .
PHILOSOPHER: The fact is that you came like this to visit me in my room. And, in you, I have found a
young friend.
YOUTH: I am your friend?
PHILOSOPHER: Yes, because you are. The dialogue going on here is not counseling, and we do not have a
work relationship. To me, you are an irreplaceable friend. Don’t you think so?
YOUTH: I’m your . . . irreplaceable friend? No, I won’t think anything about that right now. Let’s just
keep going. What about the last one, the task of love?
PHILOSOPHER: Think of it as divided into two stages: one, what are known as love relationships; and two,
relationships with family, in particular parent-child relationships. We have discussed work and friendship,
but of the three tasks, most likely it is the task of love that is the most difficult. When a friend relationship
has turned into love, speech and conduct that were permitted between friends may no longer be
permitted the moment they become lovers. Specifically, that would mean not permitting socializing with
friends of the opposite sex, and in some cases just speaking on the telephone to someone of the opposite
sex is enough to arouse jealousy. The distance is that close, and the relationship that deep.
YOUTH: Yes, I suppose it can’t be helped.
PHILOSOPHER: But Adler does not accept restricting one’s partner. If the person seems to be happy, one
can frankly celebrate that condition. That is love. Relationships in which people restrict each other
eventually fall apart.
YOUTH: Wait, that’s an argument that can only lead to affirming infidelity. Because if one’s partner were
happily having an affair, you’re saying that one should celebrate even that.
PHILOSOPHER: No, I am not affirming someone having an affair. Think about it this way: The kind of
relationship that feels somehow oppressive and strained when the two people are together cannot be
called love, even if there is passion. When one can think, Whenever I am with this person, I can behave
very freely, one can really feel love. One can be in a calm and quite natural state, without having feelings
of inferiority or being beset with the need to flaunt one’s superiority. That is what real love is like.
Restriction, on the other hand, is a manifestation of the mind-set of attempting to control one’s partner,
and also an idea founded on a sense of distrust. Being in the same space with someone who distrusts you
isn’t a natural situation that one can put up with, is it? As Adler says, “If two people want to live together
on good terms, they must treat each other as equal personalities.”
YOUTH: Okay.
PHILOSOPHER: However, in love relationships and marital relationships, there is the option of separating.
So even a husband and wife who have been together for many years can separate if continuing the
relationship becomes distressful. In a parent-child relationship, however, in principle this cannot be
done. If romantic love is a relationship connected by red string, then the relationship between parents
and children is bound in rigid chains. And a pair of small scissors is all you have. This is the difficulty of
the parent-child relationship.
YOUTH: So what can one do?
PHILOSOPHER: What I can say at this stage is: You must not run away. No matter how distressful the
relationship, you must not avoid or put off dealing with it. Even if in the end you’re going to cut it with
scissors, first you have to face it. The worst thing to do is to just stand still with the situation as it is. It is
fundamentally impossible for a person to live life completely alone, and it is only in social contexts that
the person becomes an “individual.” That is why in Adlerian psychology, self-reliance as an individual
and cooperation within society are put forth as overarching objectives. Then, how can one achieve these
objectives? On this point, Adler speaks of surmounting the three tasks of work, friendship, and love, the
tasks of the interpersonal relationships that a living person has no choice but to confront.
The youth was still struggling to grasp their true meaning.
Don’t Fall for the “Life-Lie”
YOUTH: Ah, it’s getting confusing again. You said that I see other people as enemies and can’t think of
them as comrades because I’m running away from my life tasks. What was that supposed to mean,
anyway?
PHILOSOPHER: Suppose, for instance, that there is a certain Mr. A whom you don’t like because he has
some flaws that are hard to forgive.
YOUTH: Ha-ha, if we’re looking for people I don’t like, there’s no shortage of candidates.
PHILOSOPHER: But it isn’t that you dislike Mr. A because you can’t forgive his flaws. You had the goal of
taking a dislike to Mr. A beforehand and then started looking for the flaws to satisfy that goal.
YOUTH: That’s ridiculous! Why would I do that?
PHILOSOPHER: So that you could avoid an interpersonal relationship with Mr. A.
YOUTH: No way, that’s completely out of the question. It’s obvious that the order of things is backward.
He did something I didn’t like, that’s why. If he hadn’t, I’d have no reason for taking a dislike to him.
PHILOSOPHER: No, you are wrong. It’s easy to see if you think back on the example of separating from a
person whom one has been in a love relationship with. In relationships between lovers or married
couples, there are times when, after a certain point, one becomes exasperated with everything one’s
partner says or does. For instance, she doesn’t care for the way he eats; his slovenly appearance at home
fills her with revulsion, and even his snoring sets her off. Even though until a few months ago, none of it
had ever bothered her before.
YOUTH: Yes, that sounds familiar.
PHILOSOPHER: The person feels this way because at some stage she has resolved to herself, I want to end
this relationship, and she has been looking around for the material with which to end it. The other
person hasn’t changed at all. It is her own goal that has changed. Look, people are extremely selfish
creatures who are capable of finding any number of flaws and shortcomings in others whenever the
mood strikes them. A man of perfect character could come along, and one would have no difficulty in
digging up some reason to dislike him. That’s exactly why the world can become a perilous place at any
time, and it’s always possible to see everyone as one’s enemies.
YOUTH: So I am making up flaws in other people just so that I can avoid my life tasks, and further more,
so I can avoid interpersonal relationships? And I am running away by thinking of other people as my
enemies?
PHILOSOPHER: That’s right. Adler called the state of coming up with all manner of pretexts in order to
avoid the life tasks the “life-lie.”
YOUTH: Okay . . .
PHILOSOPHER: Yes, it’s a severe term. One shifts one’s responsibility for the situation one is currently in to
someone else. One is running away from one’s life tasks by saying that everything is the fault of other
people, or the fault of one’s environment. It’s exactly the same as with the story I mentioned earlier about
the female student with the fear of blushing. One lies to oneself, and one lies to the people around one,
too. When you really think about it, it’s a pretty severe term.
YOUTH: But how can you conclude that I am lying? You don’t know anything about what kind of people
I have around me, or what kind of life I lead, do you?
PHILOSOPHER: True, I don’t know anything about your past. Not about your parents, or your elder
brother either. I know only one thing.
YOUTH: What’s that?
PHILOSOPHER: The fact that you—and no one else—are the one who decided your lifestyle.
YOUTH: Argh!
PHILOSOPHER: If your lifestyle were determined by other people or your environment, it would certainly
be possible to shift responsibility. But we choose our lifestyles ourselves. It’s clear where the responsibility
lies.
YOUTH: So you’re out to condemn me. But you’re calling people liars and cowards. And saying that
everyone is my responsibility.
PHILOSOPHER: You must not use the power of anger to look away. This is a very important point. Adler
never discusses the life tasks or life-lies in terms of good and evil. It is not morals or good and evil that we
should be discussing, but the issue of courage.
YOUTH: Courage again!
PHILOSOPHER: Yes. Even if you are avoiding your life tasks and clinging to your life-lies, it isn’t because
you are steeped in evil. It is not an issue to be condemned from a moralistic standpoint. It is only an issue
of courage.
From the Psychology of Possession to the Psychology of
Practice
YOUTH: So in the end what you’re talking about is courage? That reminds me, last time you said that
Adlerian psychology is a “psychology of courage.”
PHILOSOPHER: I will add to that by saying that Adlerian psychology is not a “psychology of possession”
but a “psychology of use.”
YOUTH: So it’s that statement: “It’s not what one is born with but what use one makes of that
equipment.”
PHILOSOPHER: That’s right. Thank you for remembering it. Freudian etiology is a psychology of
possession, and eventually it arrives at determinism. Adlerian psychology, on the other hand, is a
psychology of use, and it is you who decides it.
YOUTH: Adlerian psychology is a psychology of courage, and at the same time it is a psychology of use . . .
PHILOSOPHER: We humans are not so fragile as to simply be at the mercy of etiological (cause-and-effect)
traumas. From the standpoint of teleology, we choose our lives and our lifestyles ourselves. We have the
power to do that.
YOUTH: But, honestly, I do not have the confidence to overcome my inferiority complex. And you might
say that that’s a life-lie, but I probably won’t ever be able to break free from the inferiority complex.
PHILOSOPHER: Why don’t you think so?
YOUTH: Maybe what you are saying is right. Actually, I’m sure it is, and courage really is what I am
lacking. I can accept the life-lie as well. I am scared of interacting with people. I don’t want to get hurt in
interpersonal relationships, and I want to put off my life tasks. That’s why I have all these excuses ready.
Yes, it’s exactly as you say. But isn’t what you are talking about a kind of spiritualism? All you’re really
saying is, “You’ve lost your courage, you’ve got to pluck up your courage.” It’s no different from the silly
instructor who thinks he’s giving you advice when he comes up and slaps you on the shoulder and says,
“Cheer up.” Even though the reason I’m not doing well is because I can’t just cheer up!
PHILOSOPHER: So what you are saying is that you would like me to suggest some specific steps?
YOUTH: Yes, please. I am a human being. I am not a machine. I’ve been told that I’m all out of courage,
but I can’t just get a refill of courage as if I were filling up my tank with fuel.
PHILOSOPHER: All right. But we’ve gone quite late again tonight, so let’s continue this next time.
YOUTH: You aren’t running away from it, right?
PHILOSOPHER: Of course not. Next time, we will probably discuss freedom.
YOUTH: Not courage?
PHILOSOPHER: Yes, it will be a discussion of freedom, which is essential when talking about courage.
Please give some thought to the matter of what freedom is.
YOUTH: What freedom is . . . Fine. I am looking forward to next time.

THE THIRD NIGHT:
Discard Other People’s Tasks
Two anguished weeks later, the youth paid another visit to the philosopher’s study. What is freedom?
Why can’t people be free? Why can’t I be free? What is the true nature of whatever it is that is constraining
me? The assignment he had been given was weighing heavily on him, but it seemed impossible to find a
convincing answer. The more he thought about it, the more the youth began to notice his own lack of
freedom.
Deny the Desire for Recognition
YOUTH: So you said that today we would discuss freedom.
PHILOSOPHER: Yes. Did you have any time to think about what freedom is?
YOUTH: Yes, actually. I thought about it at great length.
PHILOSOPHER: And did you arrive at any conclusions?
YOUTH: Well, I couldn’t find any answers. But I did find this—it’s not my own idea, but something I
came across at the library, a line from a novel by Dostoevsky: “Money is coined freedom.” What do you
think? Isn’t “coined freedom” a rather refreshing term? But seriously, I was fascinated to find this one
line that drove right to the heart of this thing called money.
PHILOSOPHER: I see. Certainly, if one were to speak in a very general sense of the true nature of that which
is brought about by money, one might say that is freedom. It is an astute observation, to be sure. But you
wouldn’t go so far as to say that “freedom therefore is money,” would you?
YOUTH: It’s exactly as you say. There probably is freedom that can be gained by way of money. And I’m
sure that freedom is greater than we imagine. Because, in reality, all the necessities of life are dealt with
through financial transactions. Does it follow, then, that if one possesses great wealth, one can be free? I
don’t believe that is the case; I would certainly like to believe that it is not the case, and that human values
and human happiness cannot be bought with money.
PHILOSOPHER: Well, say for the moment that you have obtained financial freedom. And then, though
you have gained great wealth, you have not found happiness. At that time, what problems and privations
would remain for you?
YOUTH: It would be the interpersonal relationships you have been mentioning. I have thought deeply
about this matter. For instance, you might be blessed by great wealth but not have anyone who loves you;
you have no comrades whom you could call friends, and you are not liked by anyone. This is a great
misfortune. Another thing I can’t get out of my head is the word “bonds.” Every one of us is tangled up
and writhing in these strings that we call bonds. Having to be attached to a person you don’t even care
for, for example, or to always watch out for your awful boss’s mood swings. Imagine, if you could be
released from such petty interpersonal relationships, how easy things would be! But no one can really do
such a thing. Wherever we go, we are surrounded by other people, and we are social individuals, who
exist in our relations to other people. No matter what we do, we cannot escape the strong rope of our
interpersonal relationships. I see now that Adler’s statement “All problems are interpersonal relationship
problems” is a great insight.
PHILOSOPHER: It is a crucial point. Let’s dig a little deeper. What is it about our interpersonal
relationships that is robbing us of our freedom?
YOUTH: Last time, you spoke about whether one thinks of other people as enemies or as comrades. You
said that if one becomes able to see others as one’s comrades, one’s way of looking at the world should
change as well. That certainly makes sense. I felt quite convinced the other day when I left here. But then
what happened? I gave the matter some careful thought, and I noticed that there are aspects of
interpersonal relationships that can’t be completely explained.
PHILOSOPHER: Like what?
YOUTH: The most obvious one is the existence of parents. I could never think of parents as enemies.
During my childhood, especially, they were my greatest guardians who raised and protected me. In that
regard, I am sincerely grateful. Still, my parents were strict people. I told you about this last time, that
they always compared me to my older brother and refused to recognize me. And they have constantly
made comments about my life, saying I should study more, not make friends with people like this or that,
get into this university at the very least, get this kind of job, and so on. Their demands put a lot of
pressure on me and were certainly bonds.
PHILOSOPHER: Then, what did you end up doing?
YOUTH: It seems to me that until I started university, I was never able to ignore my parents’ intentions. I
was anxious, which was unpleasant, but the fact of the matter is that my wishes always seemed to end up
overlapping with my parents’. My place of work I chose myself, however.
PHILOSOPHER: Now that you mention it, I haven’t heard about that yet. What kind of work do you do?
YOUTH: I’m now working as a librarian at a university library. My parents wanted me to take on my
father’s printing plant, like my brother did. Because of this, ever since I started my current job, our
relationship has been somewhat strained. If they weren’t my parents, and instead were enemy-like
presences in my life, I probably wouldn’t have minded at all. Because no matter how much they might
have tried to interfere, I could always just ignore them. But as I’ve said, parents to me are not enemies.
Whether or not they are comrades is another matter, but, at the very least, they are not what I would call
enemies. It’s a relationship that is much too close to be able to just ignore their intentions.
PHILOSOPHER: When you decided which university you would go to in line with your parents’ wishes,
what sort of emotion did you feel with regard to your parents?
YOUTH: It’s complicated. I did have feelings of resentment, but on the other hand there was this sense of
relief, too. You know, that I could get them to recognize me if I went to that school.
PHILOSOPHER: You could get them to recognize you?
YOUTH: Come on, let’s stop the roundabout leading questions. I’m sure you know what I’m referring to.
It’s the so-called desire for recognition. It’s interpersonal relationship problems in a nutshell. We human
beings live in constant need of recognition from others. It is precisely because the other person is not an
abhorrent enemy that one wants recognition from him, isn’t it? So yes, that’s right; I wanted to be
recognized by my parents.
PHILOSOPHER: I see. Let’s talk about one of the major premises of Adlerian psychology regarding this
matter. Adlerian psychology denies the need to seek recognition from others.
YOUTH: It denies the desire for recognition?
PHILOSOPHER: There is no need to be recognized by others. Actually, one must not seek recognition. This
point cannot be overstated.
YOUTH: No way! Isn’t desire for recognition a truly universal desire that motivates all human beings?
Do Not Live to Satisfy the Expectations of Others
PHILOSOPHER: Being recognized by others is certainly something to be happy about. But it would be
wrong to say that being recognized is absolutely necessary. For what does one seek recognition in the first
place? Or, to put it more succinctly, why does one want to be praised by others?
YOUTH: It’s simple. It’s through being recognized by others that each of us can truly feel we have value. It
is through recognition from others that one becomes able to wipe away one’s feelings of inferiority. One
learns to have confidence in oneself. Yes, it’s an issue of value. I think you mentioned it last time: that the
feeling of inferiority is an issue of value judgment. It’s because I could never get recognition from my
parents that I have lived a life tainted by feelings of inferiority.
PHILOSOPHER: Now let’s consider a familiar setting. For example, let’s say you’ve been picking up litter
around your workplace. The thing is, no one seems to notice at all. Or if they do, no one has given you
any appreciation for what you’ve done, or even said a single word of thanks. Well, will you keep on
picking up litter from now on?
YOUTH: That’s a difficult situation. I suppose that if no one appreciates what I’m doing, I might stop.
PHILOSOPHER: Why?
YOUTH: Picking up litter is for everyone. If I’m rolling up my sleeves and getting it done, but I don’t get a
word of thanks? I guess I’d probably lose my motivation.
PHILOSOPHER: This is the danger of the desire for recognition. Why is it that people seek recognition from
others? In many cases, it is due to the influence of reward-and-punishment education.
YOUTH: Reward-and-punishment education?
PHILOSOPHER: If one takes appropriate action, one receives praise. If one takes inappropriate action, one
receives punishment. Adler was very critical of education by reward and punishment. It leads to
mistaken lifestyles in which people think, If no one is going to praise me, I won’t take appropriate action
and If no one is going to punish me, I’ll engage in inappropriate actions, too. You already have the goal of
wanting to be praised when you start picking up litter. And if you aren’t praised by anyone, you’ll either
be indignant or decide that you’ll never do such a thing again. Clearly, there’s something wrong with this
situation.
YOUTH: No! I wish you wouldn’t trivialize things. I’m not arguing about education. Wanting to be
recognized by people you like, to be accepted by people close to you, is a normal desire.
PHILOSOPHER: You are badly mistaken. Look, we are not living to satisfy other people’s expectations.
YOUTH: What do you mean?
PHILOSOPHER: You are not living to satisfy other people’s expectations, and neither am I. It is not
necessary to satisfy other people’s expectations.
YOUTH: That is such a self-serving argument! Are you saying one should think only about oneself and live
self-righteously?
PHILOSOPHER: In the teachings of Judaism, one finds a view that goes something like this: If you are not
living your life for yourself, then who is going to live it for you? You are living only your own life. When
it comes to who you are living it for, of course it’s you. And then, if you are not living your life for
yourself, who could there be to live it instead of you? Ultimately, we live thinking about “I.” There is no
reason that we must not think that way.
YOUTH: So you are afflicted by the poison of nihilism, after all. You say that, ultimately, we live thinking
about “I”? And that that’s okay? What a wretched way of thinking!
PHILOSOPHER: It is not nihilism at all. Rather, it’s the opposite. When one seeks recognition from others,
and concerns oneself only with how one is judged by others, in the end, one is living other people’s lives.
YOUTH: What does that mean?
PHILOSOPHER: Wishing so hard to be recognized will lead to a life of following expectations held by other
people who want you to be “this kind of person.” In other words, you throw away who you really are
and live other people’s lives. And please remember this: If you are not living to satisfy other people’s
expectations, it follows that other people are not living to satisfy your expectations. Someone might not
act the way you want him to, but it doesn’t do to get angry. That’s only natural.
YOUTH: No, it is not! That is an argument that overturns our society from its very foundation. Look, we
have the desire for recognition. But in order to receive recognition from others, first we have to recognize
others ourselves. It is because one recognizes other people and other systems of values that one is
recognized by others. It is through this relationship of mutual recognition that our very society is built.
Your argument is an abhorrent, dangerous way of thinking, which will drive human beings into
isolation and lead to conflict. It’s a diabolical solicitation to needlessly stir up distrust and doubt.
PHILOSOPHER: Ha-ha, you certainly have an interesting vocabulary. There’s no need to raise your voice—
let’s think about this together. One has to get recognition, or one will suffer. If one doesn’t get
recognition from others and from one’s parents, one won’t have confidence. Can such a life be healthy?
So one could think, God is watching, so accumulate good deeds. But that and the nihilist view that “there is
no God, so all evil deeds are permitted” are two sides of the same coin. Even supposing that God did not
exist, and that we could not gain recognition from God, we would still have to live this life. Indeed, it is
in order to overcome the nihilism of a godless world that it is necessary to deny recognition from other
people.
YOUTH: I don’t care for all this talk about God. Think more straightforwardly and more plainly about the
mentality of real, everyday people. What about the desire to be recognized socially, for example? Why
does a person want to climb the corporate ladder? Why does a person seek status and fame? It’s the wish
to be recognized as somebody important by society as a whole—it’s the desire for recognition.
PHILOSOPHER: Then, if you get that recognition, would you say that you’ve really found happiness? Do
people who have established their social status truly feel happy?
YOUTH: No, but that’s . . .
PHILOSOPHER: When trying to be recognized by others, almost all people treat satisfying other people’s
expectations as the means to that end. And that is in accordance with the stream of thought of rewardand-
punishment education that says one will be praised if one takes appropriate action. If, for example,
the main point of your job turns out to be satisfying other people’s expectations, then that job is going to
be very hard on you. Because you’ll always be worried about other people looking at you and fear their
judgment, and you are repressing your “I-ness.” It might come as a surprise to you, but almost none of
my clients who come for counseling are selfish people. Rather, they are suffering trying to meet the
expectations of other people, the expectations of their parents and teachers. So, in a good way, they can’t
behave in a self-centered fashion.
YOUTH: So I should be selfish?
PHILOSOPHER: Do not behave without regard for others. To understand this, it is necessary to understand
the idea in Adlerian psychology known as “separation of tasks.”
YOUTH: Separation of tasks? That’s a new term. Let’s hear about it.
The youth’s irritation had reached its peak. Deny the desire for recognition? Don’t satisfy other
people’s expectations? Live in a more self-centered way? What on earth was this philosopher saying?
Isn’t the desire for recognition itself people’s greatest motivator for associating with each other
and going about the formation of society? The youth wondered, What if this “separation of
tasks” idea doesn’t win me over? I won’t be able to accept this man, or Adler for that matter, for the
rest of my life.
How to Separate Tasks
PHILOSOPHER: Say there’s a child who has a hard time studying. He doesn’t pay attention in class, doesn’t
do his homework, and even leaves his books at school. Now, what would you do if you were his father?
YOUTH: Well, of course, I would try everything I could think of to get him to apply himself. I’d hire
tutors and make him go to a study center, even if I had to pull him by the ear to get him there. I’d say
that’s a parent’s duty. And that’s actually how I was raised myself. I wasn’t allowed to eat dinner until the
day’s homework was done.
PHILOSOPHER: Then let me ask another question. Did you learn to enjoy studying as a result of being
made to do it in such a heavy-handed manner?
YOUTH: Unfortunately, I did not. I just took care of my studies for school and for exams in a routine way.
PHILOSOPHER: I see. All right, I will talk about this from the basic stance of Adlerian psychology. When
one is confronted with the task of studying, for instance, in Adlerian psychology we consider it from the
perspective of “Whose task is this?”
YOUTH: Whose task?
PHILOSOPHER: Whether the child studies or not. Whether he goes out and plays with his friends or not.
Essentially this is the child’s task, not the parent’s task.
YOUTH: Do you mean that it is something the child is supposed to do?
PHILOSOPHER: Simply put, yes. There would be no point if the parents studied instead of the child, would
there?
YOUTH: Well, no, there wouldn’t.
PHILOSOPHER: Studying is the child’s task. A parent’s handling of that by commanding the child to study
is, in effect, an act of intruding on another person’s task. One is unlikely to avert a collision in this way.
We need to think with the perspective of “Whose task is this?” and continually separate one’s own tasks
from other people’s tasks.
YOUTH: How does one go about separating them?
PHILOSOPHER: One does not intrude on other people’s tasks. That’s all.
YOUTH: That’s all?
PHILOSOPHER: In general, all interpersonal relationship troubles are caused by intruding on other
people’s tasks, or having one’s own tasks intruded on. Carrying out the separation of tasks is enough to
change one’s interpersonal relationships dramatically.
YOUTH: Hmm. I don’t really get it. In the first place, how can you tell whose task it is? From my point of
view, realistically speaking, getting one’s child to study is the duty of the parents. Because almost no child
studies just out of enjoyment, and after all is said and done, the parent is the child’s guardian.
PHILOSOPHER: There is a simple way to tell whose task it is. Think, Who ultimately is going to receive the
result brought about by the choice that is made? When the child has made the choice of not studying,
ultimately, the result of that decision—not being able to keep up in class or to get into the preferred
school, for instance—does not have to be received by the parents. Clearly, it is the child who has to
receive it. In other words, studying is the child’s task.
YOUTH: No, no. You’re completely wrong! The parent, who is more experienced in life and also acts as a
guardian, has the responsibility to urge the child to study so such situations do not arise. This is
something done for the good of the child and is not an act of intruding. While studying may be the
child’s task, getting the child to study is the parent’s task.
PHILOSOPHER: It’s true that one often hears parents today using the phrase “It’s for your own good.” But
they are clearly doing so in order to fulfill their own goals, which could be their appearance in the eyes of
society, their need to put on airs, or their desire for control, for example. In other words, it is not “for
your own good” but for the parents’. And it is because the child senses this deception that he rebels.
YOUTH: So even if the child hasn’t been studying at all, you’re saying that, since it’s his task, I should just
let him be?
PHILOSOPHER: One has to pay attention. Adlerian psychology does not recommend the noninterference
approach. Noninterference is the attitude of not knowing, and not even being interested in knowing
what the child is doing. Instead, it is by knowing what the child is doing that one protects him. If it’s
studying that is the issue, one tells the child that that is his task, and one lets him know that one is ready to
assist him whenever he has the urge to study. But one must not intrude on the child’s task. When no
requests are being made, it does not do to meddle in things.
YOUTH: Does this go beyond parent-child relationships?
PHILOSOPHER: Yes, of course. In Adlerian psychology counseling, for instance, we do not think of the
client’s changing or not changing as the task of the counselor.
YOUTH: What are you saying here?
PHILOSOPHER: As a result of having received counseling, what kind of resolution does the client make?
To change his lifestyle, or not. This is the client’s task, and the counselor cannot intervene.
YOUTH: No way, I can’t accept such an irresponsible attitude!
PHILOSOPHER: Naturally, one gives all the assistance one possibly can. But beyond that, one doesn’t
intrude. Remember the old saying, “You can lead a horse to water, but you can’t make him drink.”
Please think of counseling and all other assistance provided to other people in Adlerian psychology as
having that kind of stance. Forcing change while ignoring the person’s intentions will only lead to an
intense reaction.
YOUTH: The counselor does not change the client’s life?
PHILOSOPHER: You are the only one who can change yourself.
Discard Other People’s Tasks
YOUTH: Then, what about with shut-ins, for example? I mean, with someone like my friend. Even then,
would you say it’s the separation of tasks, don’t intervene, and it has no connection to the parents?
PHILOSOPHER: Can he break out of the shut-in situation or not? Or, in what way can he break out of it?
In principle, this is a task that the person has to resolve himself. It is not for the parents to intervene.
Nevertheless, as they are not complete strangers, some form of assistance is probably needed. At this
point, the most important thing is whether the child feels he can consult frankly with his parents when he
is experiencing a dilemma, and whether they have been building enough of a trust relationship on a
regular basis.
YOUTH: Then, suppose your own child had shut himself in, what would you do? Please answer this not as
a philosopher but as a parent.
PHILOSOPHER: First, I myself would think, This is the child’s task. I would try not to intervene in his shutin
situation, and I would refrain from focusing too much attention on it. Then I would send a message
to him to the effect that I am ready to assist him whenever he is in need. In that way, the child, having
sensed a change in his parent, will have no choice but to make it his own task to think about what he
should do. He’ll probably come and ask for assistance, and he’ll probably try to work some things out on
his own.
YOUTH: Could you really manage to be so cut and dried if it were your own child who’d become a shutin?
PHILOSOPHER: A parent suffering over the relationship with his or her child will tend to think, My child is
my life. In other words, the parent is taking on the child’s task as his or her own and is no longer able to
think about anything but the child. When at last the parent notices it, the “I” is already gone from his or
her life. However, no matter how much of the burden of the child’s task one carries, the child is still an
independent individual. Children do not become what their parents want them to become. In their
choices of university, place of employment, and partner in marriage, and even in the everyday subtleties
of speech and conduct, they do not act according to their parents’ wishes. Naturally, the parents will
worry about them, and probably want to intervene at times. But, as I said earlier, other people are not
living to satisfy your expectations. Though the child is one’s own, he or she is not living to satisfy one’s
expectations as a parent.
YOUTH: So you have to draw the line even with family?
PHILOSOPHER: Actually, with families there is less distance, so it’s all the more necessary to consciously
separate the tasks.
YOUTH: That doesn’t make sense. On the one hand, you’re talking about love, and on the other, you’re
denying it. If you draw the line between yourself and other people that way, you won’t be able to believe
in anyone anymore!
PHILOSOPHER: Look, the act of believing is also the separation of tasks. You believe in your partner; that is
your task. But how that person acts with regard to your expectations and trust is other people’s tasks.
When you push your wishes without having drawn that line, before you know it you’re engaging in
stalker-like intervention. Suppose your partner did not act as you had wished. Would you still be able to
believe in that person? Would you still be able to love that person? The task of love that Adler speaks of is
composed of such questions.
YOUTH: That’s difficult! That’s very difficult.
PHILOSOPHER: Of course it is. But think about it this way: Intervening in other people’s tasks and taking
on other people’s tasks turns one’s life into something heavy and full of hardship. If you are leading a life
of worry and suffering—which stems from interpersonal relationships—learn the boundary of “From
here on, that is not my task.” And discard other people’s tasks. That is the first step toward lightening the
load and making life simpler.
How to Rid Yourself of Interpersonal Relationship
Problems
YOUTH: I don’t know, it just doesn’t sit right with me.
PHILOSOPHER: Then let’s envision a scene in which your parents are vehemently opposing your choice of
place of employment. They were in fact against it, weren’t they?
YOUTH: Yes, they were. I wouldn’t go so far as saying they were vehemently opposed, but they did make
various snide remarks.
PHILOSOPHER: Well, let’s exaggerate it and say they were vehemently opposed. Your father was ranting
and raving with emotion, and your mother was protesting your decision with tears in her eyes. They
absolutely do not approve of you becoming a librarian, and if you will not take on the family business
like your brother has, they may very well disown you. But how to come to terms with the emotion of
“not approving” is your parents’ task, not yours. It is not a problem for you to worry about.
YOUTH: Now wait a minute. Are you saying that it doesn’t matter how sad I make my parents feel?
PHILOSOPHER: That’s right. It doesn’t matter.
YOUTH: You’ve got to be joking! Could there be such a thing as a philosophy that recommends unfilial
behavior?
PHILOSOPHER: All you can do with regard to your own life is choose the best path that you believe in. On
the other hand, what kind of judgment do other people pass on that choice? That is the task of other
people, and is not a matter you can do anything about.
YOUTH: What another person thinks of you—if he or she likes you or dislikes you—that is that person’s
task, not mine. Is that what you are saying?
PHILOSOPHER: That is what separating is. You are worried about other people looking at you. You are
worried about being judged by other people. That is why you are constantly craving recognition from
others. Now, why are you worried about other people looking at you, anyway? Adlerian psychology has
an easy answer. You haven’t done the separation of tasks yet. You assume that even things that should be
other people’s tasks are your own. Remember the words of the grandmother: “You’re the only one who’s
worried how you look.” Her remark drives right to the heart of the separation of tasks. What other people
think when they see your face—that is the task of other people and is not something you have any control
over.
YOUTH: As theory, I get it. To my reasoning brain, it does make sense. But my emotions can’t keep up
with such a high-handed argument.
PHILOSOPHER: Then let’s try another tack. Say there’s a man who’s distressed about the interpersonal
relationships at the company where he works. He has a completely irrational boss who yells at him at
every opportunity. No matter how hard he tries, his boss doesn’t acknowledge his efforts and never even
really listens to what he says.
YOUTH: That sounds exactly like my boss.
PHILOSOPHER: But is being acknowledged by your boss “work” that you should think of as top priority? It
isn’t your job to be liked by people at the place you work. Your boss doesn’t like you. And his reasons for
not liking you are clearly unreasonable. But in that case, there’s no need for you to get cozy with him.
YOUTH: That sounds right, but the person is my boss, right? I won’t get any work done if I’m shunned by
my direct superior.
PHILOSOPHER: That is Adler’s life-lie again. I can’t do my work because I’ve been shunned by my boss.
It’s the boss’s fault that my work isn’t going well. The person who says such things is bringing up the
existence of the boss as an excuse for the work that doesn’t go well. Much like the female student with the
fear of blushing, it’s actually that you need the existence of an awful boss. Because then you can say, “If
only I didn’t have this boss, I could get more work done.”
YOUTH: No, you don’t know my relationship with my boss! I wish you would stop making arbitrary
guesses.
PHILOSOPHER: This is a discussion that is concerned with the fundamentals of Adlerian psychology. If
you are angry, nothing will sink in. You think, I’ve got that boss, so I can’t work. This is complete etiology.
But it’s really, I don’t want to work, so I’ll create an awful boss, or I don’t want to acknowledge my
incapable self, so I’ll create an awful boss. That would be the teleological way of looking at it.
YOUTH: That’s probably how it’d be framed in your stock teleology approach. But in my case, it’s
different.
PHILOSOPHER: Then suppose you had done the separation of tasks. How would things be? In other
words, no matter how much your boss tries to vent his unreasonable anger at you, that is not your task.
The unreasonable emotions are tasks for your boss to deal with himself. There is no need to cozy up to
him, or to yield to him to the point of bowing down. You should think, What I should do is face my own
tasks in my own life without lying.
YOUTH: But that’s . . .
PHILOSOPHER: We are all suffering in interpersonal relationships. It might be the relationship with one’s
parents or one’s elder brother, and it might be the interpersonal relationships at one’s workplace. Now,
last time, you were saying that you wanted some specific steps. This is what I propose. First, one should
ask, “Whose task is this?” Then do the separation of tasks. Calmly delineate up to what point one’s own
tasks go, and from what point they become another person’s tasks. And do not intervene in other
people’s tasks, or allow even a single person to intervene in one’s own tasks. This is a specific and
revolutionary viewpoint that is unique to Adlerian psychology and contains the potential to utterly
change one’s interpersonal relationship problems.
YOUTH: Aha. I am starting to see what you meant when you said that the topic of today’s discussion was
freedom.
PHILOSOPHER: That’s right. We are trying to talk about freedom now.
Cut the Gordian Knot
YOUTH: I am sure that if one could understand the separation of tasks and put it into practice, one’s
interpersonal relationships would all at once become free. But I still can’t accept it.
PHILOSOPHER: Go on. I’m listening.
YOUTH: I think that, in theory, the separation of tasks is entirely right. What other people think of me, or
what sort of judgment they pass on me, is the task of other people, and is not something I can do
anything about. And I should just do what I have to do in my life without lying. I’d have no problem if
you said this is a life truth—that’s how right I think it is. But consider this: From an ethical or moral point
of view, could it be said to be the right thing to do? That is to say, a way of living that draws boundaries
between oneself and others. Because wouldn’t you be brushing other people away and saying, “That’s
intervention!” whenever they were worried about you and asked how you’re doing? It seems to me that
this is something that treads on the goodwill of others.
PHILOSOPHER: Have you heard of Alexander the Great?
YOUTH: Alexander the Great? Yes, I learned about him in world history.
PHILOSOPHER: He was a Macedonian king who lived in the fourth century before Christ. When he was
advancing on the Persian kingdom of Lydia, he learned of a chariot enshrined in the acropolis. The
chariot had been secured tightly to a pillar in the temple by Gordias, the former king, and there was a
local legend that said, “He who unravels this knot shall be master of Asia.” It was a tightly wound knot
that many men of skill had been certain they could unbind, but no one had succeeded. Now, what do
you think Alexander the Great did when he stood before this knot?
YOUTH: Well, didn’t he unravel the legendary knot with ease, and go on to become the ruler of Asia?
PHILOSOPHER: No, that’s not how it happened. As soon as Alexander the Great saw how tight the knot
was, he pulled out his sword and sliced it in half with one stroke.
YOUTH: Wow!
PHILOSOPHER: Then, it is said that he declared, “Destiny is not something brought about by legend, but
by clearing away with one’s own sword.” He had no use for the power of legend and would forge his
destiny with his sword. As you know, he then proceeded to become the great conqueror of all the
territories of what is now the Middle East and western Asia. This is the famous anecdote known as the
Gordian knot. And so, such intricate knots—the bonds in our interpersonal relationships—are not to be
unraveled by conventional methods but must be severed by some completely new approach. Whenever I
explain the separation of tasks, I always remember the Gordian knot.
YOUTH: Well, I don’t mean to contradict you, but not everyone can become Alexander the Great. Isn’t it
precisely because there was no one else who could have cut the knot that the anecdote portraying it as a
heroic deed is still conveyed to this day? It’s exactly the same with the separation of tasks. Even though
one knows one can just cut through something with one’s sword, one might find it rather difficult.
Because when one presses forward with the separation of tasks, in the end one will have to cut ties with
people. One will drive people into isolation. The separation of tasks you speak of completely ignores
human emotion! How could one possibly build good interpersonal relationships with that?
PHILOSOPHER: One can build them. The separation of tasks is not the objective for interpersonal
relationships. Rather, it is the gateway.
YOUTH: The gateway?
PHILOSOPHER: For instance, when reading a book, if one brings one’s face too close to it, one cannot see
anything. In the same way, forming good interpersonal relationships requires a certain degree of
distance. When the distance gets too small and people become stuck together, it becomes impossible to
even speak to each other. But the distance must not be too great, either. Parents who scold their children
too much become mentally very distant. When this happens, the child can no longer even consult the
parents, and the parents can no longer give the proper assistance. One should be ready to lend a hand
when needed but not encroach on the person’s territory. It is important to maintain this kind of
moderate distance.
YOUTH: Is distance necessary even in the kind of relationship that parents and children have?
PHILOSOPHER: Of course. Earlier you said that the separation of tasks is something that treads on the other
person’s goodwill. That is a notion that is tied to reward. It’s the idea that when another person does
something for you, you have to do something in return—even if that person does not want anything.
Rather than responding to the goodwill, it is just being tied to reward. No matter what sort of appeal the
other person might make, you are the only one who decides what you should do.
YOUTH: Reward is at the root of what I am calling “ties”?
PHILOSOPHER: Yes. When reward is at the base of an interpersonal relationship, there’s a feeling that wells
up in one that says, “I gave this much, so you should give me that much back.” This is a notion that is
quite different from separation of tasks, of course. We must not seek reward, and we must not be tied to
it.
YOUTH: Hmm.
PHILOSOPHER: However, there are certainly situations in which it would be easier to intervene in the tasks
of another person without doing any separation of tasks—for instance, in a child-raising situation, when
a child is having a hard time tying his shoes. For the busy mother, it is certainly faster to tie them than to
wait for him to do it himself. But that is an intervention, and it is taking the child’s task away from him.
And as a result of repeating that intervention, the child will cease to learn anything, and will lose the
courage to face his life tasks. As Adler says, “Children who have not been taught to confront challenges
will try to avoid all challenges.”
YOUTH: But that is such a dry way of thinking.
PHILOSOPHER: When Alexander the Great cut the Gordian knot, there were probably those who felt the
same way: that the unraveling of the knot by hand had meaning, and that it was a mistake to cut it with a
sword; that Alexander had misunderstood the meaning of the oracle’s words. In Adlerian psychology,
there are aspects that are antithetical to normal social thinking. It denies etiology, denies trauma, and
adopts teleology. It treats people’s problems as interpersonal relationship problems. And the not-seeking
of recognition and the separation of tasks, too, are probably antithetical to normal social thinking.
YOUTH: It’s impossible! I can’t do it!
PHILOSOPHER: Why?
The youth was devastated by the separation of tasks that the philosopher had begun describing.
When one thought of all one’s problems as being in one’s interpersonal relationships, the
separation of tasks was effective. Just by having this viewpoint, the world would become quite
simple. But there was no flesh and blood in it. It gave off no sense of one’s warmth as a person.
Could anyone accept such a philosophy? The youth rose from his chair and pleaded loudly.
Desire for Recognition Makes You Unfree
YOUTH: Look, I have been dissatisfied for ages. The adults of the world tell the young people, “Do
something you like to do.” And they say it with smiles on their faces as if they might actually be
understanding people, as if they were on the side of the young. But it’s all lip service, which comes out
only because those young people are complete strangers to them, and the relationship is one that is
completely without any kind of responsibility. Then parents and teachers tell us, “Get into that school,”
or “Look for a stable occupation,” and this concrete and uninteresting instruction is not merely an
intervention. It’s actually that they are trying to fulfill their responsibilities. It’s precisely because we are
closely connected to them and they are seriously concerned about our future that they can’t say
irresponsible things like, “Do something you like.” I’m sure you’d put on that understanding face too,
and say to me, “Please do something you like.” But I won’t believe such a comment from another person!
It’s an extremely irresponsible comment, as if one were just brushing a caterpillar off one’s shoulder. And
if the world crushed that caterpillar, you would say, “It’s not my task,” and walk away nonchalantly.
What separation of tasks, you monster!
PHILOSOPHER: Oh, goodness, you’re getting all bent out of shape. So what you are saying, in other words,
is that you want someone to intervene to some extent? That you want another person to decide your
path?
YOUTH: Sure, maybe I do! It’s like this: It’s not so difficult to judge what others expect of one, or what
kind of role is being demanded of one. Living as one likes, on the other hand, is extremely difficult. What
does one want? What does one want to become, and what kind of life does one want to lead? One
doesn’t always get such a concrete idea of things. It would be a grave mistake to think that everyone has
clear-cut dreams and objectives. Don’t you know that?
PHILOSOPHER: Maybe it is easier to live in such a way as to satisfy other people’s expectations. Because one
is entrusting one’s own life to them. For example, one runs along the tracks that one’s parents have laid
out. Even if there are a lot of things one might object to, one will not lose one’s way as long as one stays
on those rails. But if one is deciding one’s path oneself, it’s only natural that one will get lost at times.
One comes up against the wall of “how one should live.”
YOUTH: That is why I am looking for recognition from others. You were talking about God earlier, and if
we were still living in an era when God was something people believed in, I suppose that “God is
watching” might serve as a criterion for self-discipline. If one were recognized by God, maybe one didn’t
need recognition from others. But that era ended a long time ago. And, in that case, one has no choice
but to discipline oneself on the basis that other people are watching. To aspire to be recognized by others
and live an honest life. Other people’s eyes are my guide.
PHILOSOPHER: Does one choose recognition from others, or does one choose a path of freedom without
recognition? It’s an important question—let’s think about it together. To live one’s life trying to gauge
other people’s feelings and being worried about how they look at you. To live in such a way that others’
wishes are granted. There may indeed be signposts to guide you this way, but it is a very unfree way to
live. Now, why are you choosing such an unfree way to live? You are using the term “desire for
recognition,” but what you are really saying is that you don’t want to be disliked by anyone.
YOUTH: Who does? There’s no one anywhere who’d go so far as to actually want to be disliked.
PHILOSOPHER: Exactly. It is true that there is no person who wishes to be disliked. But look at it this way:
What should one do to not be disliked by anyone? There is only one answer: It is to constantly gauge
other people’s feelings while swearing loyalty to all of them. If there are ten people, one must swear
loyalty to all ten. When one does that, for the time being one will have succeeded in not being disliked by
anyone. But at this point, there is a great contradiction looming. One swears loyalty to all ten people out
of the single-minded desire to not be disliked. This is like a politician who has fallen into populism and
begun to make impossible promises and accept responsibilities that are beyond him. Naturally, his lies
will come to light before long. He will lose people’s trust and turn his own life into one of greater
suffering. And, of course, the stress of continual lying has all kinds of consequences. Please grasp this
point. If one is living in a such a way as to satisfy other people’s expectations, and one is entrusting one’s
own life to others, that is a way of living in which one is lying to oneself and continuing that lying to
include the people around one.
YOUTH: So one should be egocentric and live however one pleases?
PHILOSOPHER: Separating one’s tasks is not an egocentric thing. Intervening in other people’s tasks is
essentially an egocentric way of thinking, however. Parents force their children to study; they meddle in
their life and marriage choices. That is nothing other than an egocentric way of thinking.
YOUTH: So the child can just ignore his parents’ intentions and live however he pleases?
PHILOSOPHER: There is no reason of any sort that one should not live one’s life as one pleases.
YOUTH: Ha-ha! Not only are you a nihilist, you’re an anarchist and a hedonist to boot. I’m past being
astonished, and now I’m going to start laughing any moment.
PHILOSOPHER: An adult, who has chosen an unfree way to live, on seeing a young person living freely
here and now in this moment, criticizes the youth as being hedonistic. Of course, this is a life-lie that
comes out so that the adult can accept his own unfree life. An adult who has chosen real freedom himself
will not make such comments and will instead cheer on the will to be free.
YOUTH: All right, so what you are maintaining is that freedom is the issue? Let’s get to the main point.
You’ve been using the word “freedom” a lot, but what does freedom mean to you, anyway? How can we
be free?
What Real Freedom Is
PHILOSOPHER: Earlier, you acknowledged that you do not want to be disliked by anyone, and said,
“There’s no one anywhere who’d go so far as to actually want to be disliked.”
YOUTH: Right.
PHILOSOPHER: Well, I’m the same way. I have no desire to be disliked by other people. I would say that
“No one would go so far as to actually want to be disliked” is a sharp insight.
YOUTH: It’s a universal desire!
PHILOSOPHER: Even so, regardless of our efforts, there are people who dislike me and people who dislike
you. This, too, is a fact. When you are disliked, or feel that you are being disliked, by someone, what state
of mind does it put you in?
YOUTH: Very distressed, to put it simply. I wonder why I’ve come to be disliked, and what I did or said
that might have been offensive. I think I should have interacted with the person in a different way, and I
just brood and brood over it and am ridden with guilt.
PHILOSOPHER: Not wanting to be disliked by other people. To human beings, this is an entirely natural
desire, and an impulse. Kant, the giant of modern philosophy, called this desire “inclination.”
YOUTH: Inclination?
PHILOSOPHER: Yes, it is one’s instinctive desires, one’s impulsive desires. Now, if one were to say that
living like a stone tumbling downhill and allowing such inclinations or desires or impulses to take one
wherever they will is “freedom,” one would be incorrect. To live in such a way is only to be a slave to
one’s desires and impulses. Real freedom is an attitude akin to pushing up one’s tumbling self from
below.
YOUTH: Pushing oneself up from below?
PHILOSOPHER: A stone is powerless. Once it has begun to roll downhill, it will continue to roll until
released from the natural laws of gravity and inertia. But we are not stones. We are beings who are
capable of resisting inclination. We can stop our tumbling selves and climb uphill. The desire for
recognition is probably a natural desire. So are you going to keep rolling downhill in order to receive
recognition from others? Are you going to wear yourself down like a rolling stone, until everything is
smoothed away? When all that is left is a little round ball, would that be “the real I”? It cannot be.
YOUTH: Are you saying that resisting one’s instincts and impulses is freedom?
PHILOSOPHER: As I have stated repeatedly, in Adlerian psychology, we think that all problems are
interpersonal relationship problems. In other words, we seek release from interpersonal relationships. We
seek to be free from interpersonal relationships. However, it is absolutely impossible to live all alone in
the universe. In light of what we have discussed until now, the conclusion we reach regarding “What is
freedom?” should be clear.
YOUTH: What is it?
PHILOSOPHER: In short, that “freedom is being disliked by other people.”
YOUTH: Huh? What was that?
PHILOSOPHER: It’s that you are disliked by someone. It is proof that you are exercising your freedom and
living in freedom, and a sign that you are living in accordance with your own principles.
YOUTH: But, but . . .
PHILOSOPHER: It is certainly distressful to be disliked. If possible, one would like to live without being
disliked by anyone. One wants to satisfy one’s desire for recognition. But conducting oneself in such a
way as to not be disliked by anyone is an extremely unfree way of living, and is also impossible. There is a
cost incurred when one wants to exercise one’s freedom. And the cost of freedom in interpersonal
relationships is that one is disliked by other people.
YOUTH: No! That’s totally wrong. There is no way that could be called freedom. That’s a diabolical way
of thinking to coax one into evildoing.
PHILOSOPHER: You’ve probably been thinking of freedom as “release from organizations.” That breaking
away from your home or school, your company or your nation is freedom. However, if you were to
break away from your organization, for instance, you would not be able to gain real freedom. Unless one
is unconcerned by other people’s judgments, has no fear of being disliked by other people, and pays the
cost that one might never be recognized, one will never be able to follow through in one’s own way of
living. That is to say, one will not be able to be free.
YOUTH: Be disliked by other people—is that what you are saying?
PHILOSOPHER: What I am saying is, don’t be afraid of being disliked.
YOUTH: But that’s—
PHILOSOPHER: I am not telling you to go so far as to live in such a way that you will be disliked, and I am
not saying engage in wrongdoing. Please do not misunderstand that.
YOUTH: No. Then let’s change the question. Can people actually endure the weight of freedom? Are
people that strong? To not care even if one is disliked by one’s own parents—can one become so selfrighteously
defiant?
PHILOSOPHER: One neither prepares to be self-righteous nor becomes defiant. One just separates tasks.
There may be a person who does not think well of you, but that is not your task. And again, thinking
things like He should like me or I’ve done all this, so it’s strange that he doesn’t like me, is the rewardoriented
way of thinking of having intervened in another person’s tasks. One moves forward without
fearing the possibility of being disliked. One does not live as if one were rolling downhill, but instead
climbs the slope that lies ahead. That is freedom for a human being. Suppose that I had two choices in
front of me—a life in which all people like me, and a life in which there are people who dislike me—and I
was told to choose one. I would choose the latter without a second thought. Before being concerned with
what others think of me, I want to follow through with my own being. That is to say, I want to live in
freedom.
YOUTH: Are you free, now?
PHILOSOPHER: Yes. I am free.
YOUTH: You do not want to be disliked, but you don’t mind if you are?
PHILOSOPHER: Yes, that’s right. Not wanting to be disliked is probably my task, but whether or not soand-
so dislikes me is the other person’s task. Even if there is a person who doesn’t think well of me, I
cannot intervene in that. To borrow from the proverb I mentioned earlier, naturally one would make
the effort to lead someone to water, but whether he drinks or not is that person’s task.
YOUTH: That’s some conclusion.
PHILOSOPHER: The courage to be happy also includes the courage to be disliked. When you have gained
that courage, your interpersonal relationships will all at once change into things of lightness.
You Hold the Cards to Interpersonal Relationships
YOUTH: Well, I never would have imagined I’d visit a philosopher’s place to hear about being disliked.
PHILOSOPHER: I am well aware that this is not an easy thing to swallow. It will probably take some time to
chew over and digest. If we go any further with this today, I think you won’t be able to keep it in your
head. So I would like to talk to you about one more thing, a personal matter that relates to the separation
of tasks, and then finish up for today.
YOUTH: All right.
PHILOSOPHER: This one, too, is about relationships with parents. My relationship with my father had
always been a rocky one, even when I was a child. My mother died when I was in my twenties, without
us ever engaging in anything like real conversation together, and after that my relationship with my
father became increasingly strained. That is, until I encountered Adlerian psychology and grasped
Adler’s ideas.
YOUTH: Why did you have a bad relationship with your father?
PHILOSOPHER: What I have in my memory is an image from a time when he hit me. I have no recollection
of what I might have done to bring it on. I only remember hiding under a desk in an attempt to escape
him, when he dragged me out and hit me hard. And not just once, but many times.
YOUTH: That fear became a trauma . . .
PHILOSOPHER: I think that until I encountered Adlerian psychology, I understood it in that kind of way.
Because my father was a moody, taciturn person. But to think to myself, He hit me that time, and that is
why our relationship went bad, is a Freudian etiological way of thinking. The Adlerian teleology position
completely reverses the cause-and-effect interpretation. That is to say, I brought out the memory of being
hit because I don’t want my relationship with my father to get better.
YOUTH: So first you had the goal of not wanting your relationship with your father to get better and not
wanting to repair things between you.
PHILOSOPHER: That’s right. For me, it was more convenient to not repair my relationship with my father.
I could use having a father like that as an excuse for why my own life wasn’t going well. That for me was
a virtue. And there was also the aspect of taking revenge on a feudal father.
YOUTH: That is exactly what I wanted to ask about! Even if the cause and effect were reversed, that is to
say, in your case, you were able to analyze yourself and say, “It isn’t because he hit me that I have a bad
relationship with my father, but that I brought out the memory of being hit because I don’t want my
relationship with my father to get better,” even then, how does it actually change things? It doesn’t
change the fact that you were hit in childhood, right?
PHILOSOPHER: One can think from the viewpoint that it is an interpersonal relationship card. As long as I
use etiology to think, It is because he hit me that I have a bad relationship with my father, it would be a
matter that was impossible for me to do anything about. But if I can think, I brought out the memory of
being hit because I don’t want my relationship with my father to get better, then I will be holding the card
to repair relations. Because if I can just change the goal, that fixes everything.
YOUTH: Does that really fix things?
PHILOSOPHER: Of course.
YOUTH: I wonder if you really feel so from the bottom of your heart. I can understand it in theory, but
the feeling just doesn’t sit right with me.
PHILOSOPHER: Then it’s the separation of tasks. It’s true that my father and I had a complicated
relationship. He was a stubborn person, and I could never imagine his feelings being able to change
easily. Moreover, there was a strong possibility that he had even forgotten ever raising his hands against
me. However, at the time of making my resolution to repair relations, it did not matter to me what sort
of lifestyle my father had, or what he thought of me, or the kind of attitude he might adopt in response to
my approach—such things didn’t matter at all. Even if there were no intention to repair relations on his
side, I would not mind in the least. The issue was whether or not I would resolve to do it, and I was
always holding the interpersonal relationship cards.
YOUTH: You were always holding the interpersonal relationship cards?
PHILOSOPHER: Yes. Many people think that the interpersonal relationship cards are held by the other
person. That is why they wonder, How does that person feel about me? and end up living in such a way as
to satisfy the wishes of other people. But if they can grasp the separation of tasks, they will notice that they
are holding all the cards. This is a new way of thinking.
YOUTH: So due to your changing, did your father change too?
PHILOSOPHER: I did not change in order to change my father. That is an erroneous notion of trying to
manipulate another person. Even if I change, it is only “I” who changes. I do not know what will happen
to the other person as a result, and that is not an aspect I can take part in. This too is the separation of
tasks. Of course, there are times when, in tandem with my change—not due to my change—the other
person changes too. In many cases, that person will have no choice but to change. But that is not the goal,
and it is certainly possible that the other person will not change. In any case, changing one’s own speech
and conduct as a way of manipulating other people is clearly a mistaken way of thinking.
YOUTH: One must not manipulate other people, and manipulating cannot be done.
PHILOSOPHER: When we speak of interpersonal relationships, it always seems to be two-person
relationships and one’s relationship to a large group that come to mind, but first it is oneself. When one is
tied to the desire for recognition, the interpersonal relationship cards will always stay in the hands of
other people. Does one entrust the cards of life to another person, or hold onto them oneself? Please take
your time and sort through these ideas again in your own home, about the separation of tasks and about
freedom. I will be waiting for you here, next time.
YOUTH: All right. I will give it some thought on my own.
PHILOSOPHER: Well, then . . .
YOUTH: Please, there is just one more thing I want to ask you.
PHILOSOPHER: What is it?
YOUTH: In the end, were you able to repair your relationship with your father?
PHILOSOPHER: Yes, of course. I think so. My father fell ill, and in the last few years of his life, it was
necessary for me and my family to take care of him. Then one day, when I was taking care of him as
usual, my father said, “Thank you.” I had not known my father possessed such a word in his vocabulary,
and I was astonished and felt grateful for all the days that had passed. Through the long years of my
caregiving life, I had tried to do whatever I could, that is to say, I had done my best to lead my father to
water. And in the end, he drank. I think he did.
YOUTH: Well, thank you very much. I will come again at the same time.
PHILOSOPHER: I had a good time. Thank you, too.

THE FOURTH NIGHT:
Where the Center of the World Is
That was close—I almost fell for it! The following week, the young man called on the philosopher
again, and, with an indignant expression, knocked on the door.
The idea of separating tasks is certainly a useful one. You had me completely convinced last time. But it
seems like such a lonely way to live. Separating the tasks and lightening the load of one’s interpersonal
relations is just the same as cutting one’s connection to other people. And, to top it off, you’re telling me to be
disliked by other people? If that’s what you call freedom, then I’ll choose not to be free!
Individual Psychology and Holism
PHILOSOPHER: Well, you’re looking rather gloomy today.
YOUTH: You see, since we last met, I’ve been thinking calmly and carefully about the separation of tasks,
and about freedom. I waited until my emotions had settled and then applied my reasoning mind. But the
separation of tasks just doesn’t seem realistic.
PHILOSOPHER: Hmm, okay. Please go on.
YOUTH: Separating tasks is basically an idea that boils down to defining a boundary and saying, “I am I,
and you are you.” Sure, there are probably fewer interpersonal relationship problems that way. But
would you really say that such a way of life is right? To me, it just seems like an extremely self-centered,
misguided individualism. On my first visit here, you told me that Adlerian psychology is formally
referred to as “individual psychology.” That term had been bothering me for quite a while, but I finally
figured out why: What you’re calling Adlerian psychology, or individual psychology, is essentially the
study of an individualism that leads people into isolation.
PHILOSOPHER: It is true that the term “individual psychology,” which Adler coined, has certain aspects
that may invite misunderstanding. I will explain what I mean now. First of all, etymologically speaking,
the word “individual” has the meaning “indivisible.”
YOUTH: Indivisible?
PHILOSOPHER: Yes. In other words, it is the smallest possible unit and therefore cannot be broken down
any further. Now, what is it exactly that cannot be divided? Adler was opposed to any kind of dualistic
value system that treated the mind as separate from the body—reason as separate from emotion, or the
conscious mind as separate from the unconscious mind.
YOUTH: What’s the point of that?
PHILOSOPHER: For example, do you remember the story about the female student who came to me for
counseling on account of her fear of blushing? Why did she develop that fear of blushing? In Adlerian
psychology, physical symptoms are not regarded separately from the mind (psyche). The mind and body
are viewed as one, as a whole that cannot be divided into parts. Tension in the mind can make one’s arms
and legs shake, or cause one’s cheeks to turn red, and fear can make one’s face turn white. And so on.
YOUTH: Well, sure, there are parts of the mind and body that are connected.
PHILOSOPHER: The same holds true for reason and emotion, and the conscious mind and the
unconscious mind as well. A normally coolheaded person doesn’t expect to have a fit of violent emotion
and start shouting at someone. We are not struck by emotions that somehow exist independently from
us. Each of us is a unified whole.
YOUTH: No, that is not true. It is precisely because we have the ability to view mind and body, reason and
emotion, and the conscious and the unconscious mind as clearly separate from each other that we can
gain a correct understanding of people. Isn’t that a given?
PHILOSOPHER: Certainly it is true that the mind and the body are separate things, that reason and emotion
are different, and that both the conscious mind and the unconscious mind exist. That said, however,
when one flies into a rage and shouts at another person, it is “I as a whole” who is choosing to shout. One
would never think of emotions that somehow exist independently—unrelated to one’s intentions, as it
were—as having produced that shouting voice. When one separates the “I” from “emotion” and thinks,
It was the emotion that made me do it, or The emotion got the best of me, and I couldn’t help it, such
thinking quickly becomes a life-lie.
YOUTH: You’re referring to the time I yelled at that waiter, aren’t you?
PHILOSOPHER: Yes. This view of the human being as “I as a whole,” as an indivisible being that cannot be
broken down into parts, is referred to as “holism.”
YOUTH: Well, that’s fine. But I wasn’t asking you for an academic theory to provide a definition of
“individual.” Look, if you take Adlerian psychology to its logical conclusion, it’s basically saying, “I am I,
and you are you,” and leading people toward isolation. It’s saying, “I won’t interfere with you, so don’t
interfere with me either, and we’ll both go on living however we please.” Please tell me straightforwardly
what your awareness is of that point.
PHILOSOPHER: All right. All problems are interpersonal relationship problems. You have an
understanding of this basic tenet of Adlerian psychology, correct?
YOUTH: Yes, I do. The idea of noninterference in interpersonal relations, that is to say, the separation of
tasks, probably came about as a way to resolve those problems.
PHILOSOPHER: This is something I believe I went over last time—that forming good interpersonal
relationships requires a certain degree of distance. At the same time, people who get too close end up not
even being able to speak to each other, so it is not good to get too far apart, either. Please do not think of
the separation of tasks as something that is meant to keep other people away; instead, see it as a way of
thinking with which to unravel the threads of the complex entanglement of one’s interpersonal relations.
YOUTH: To unravel the threads?
PHILOSOPHER: Exactly. Right now, your threads and other people’s threads are all tangled up in a
confused mess, and you are looking at the world while in that condition. Red, blue, brown, and green—
all the colors mixing together—you think of it as “connection.” But it is not.
YOUTH: So, then, what do you think connection is?
PHILOSOPHER: Last time, I spoke of the separation of tasks as a prescription for resolving interpersonal
relationship problems. But interpersonal relationships are not something that end just because one has
separated the tasks. The separating of tasks is actually the point of departure for interpersonal relations.
Today, let’s take the discussion deeper and address how interpersonal relations as a whole are viewed in
Adlerian psychology, and consider the kind of relationships we should form with others.
The Goal of Interpersonal Relationships Is a Feeling of
Community
YOUTH: Okay, I have a question. Please give me a simple answer that gets straight to the heart of the
matter. You said that the separating of tasks is the point of departure for interpersonal relations. Well,
what is the goal of interpersonal relations?
PHILOSOPHER: To get straight to the heart of the matter, it is “community feeling.”
YOUTH: . . . Community feeling?
PHILOSOPHER: Yes. This is a key concept in Adlerian psychology, and views on its application have been
the subject of much debate. In fact, Adler’s proposal of the concept of community feeling drove many
people to part ways with him.
YOUTH: Well, it sounds fascinating to me. What is this concept?
PHILOSOPHER: It was the time before last, I believe, that I brought up the matter of how one sees others,
that is, as enemies or as comrades. Now, take that a step deeper. If other people are our comrades, and we
live surrounded by them, we should be able to find in that life our own place of “refuge.” Moreover, in
doing so, we should begin to have the desire to share with our comrades, to contribute to the
community. This sense of others as comrades, this awareness of “having one’s own refuge,” is called
“community feeling.”
YOUTH: But what part of this is open to debate? It seems like a completely irrefutable point.
PHILOSOPHER: The issue is community. What does it consist of? When you hear the word “community,”
what images come to mind?
YOUTH: There are such frameworks as one’s household, school, workplace, or local society.
PHILOSOPHER: When Adler refers to community, he goes beyond the household, school, workplace, and
local society, and treats it as all-inclusive, covering not only nations and all of humanity but also the
entire axis of time from the past to the future—and he includes plants and animals and even inanimate
objects.
YOUTH: Huh?
PHILOSOPHER: In other words, he is espousing that community is not merely one of the preexisting
frameworks that the word might bring to mind but is also inclusive of literally everything—the entire
universe, from the past to the future.
YOUTH: No way. Now you’ve lost me. The universe? Past and future? What on earth are you talking
about?
PHILOSOPHER: The majority of those who hear this have similar doubts. This is not something one can
comprehend immediately. Adler himself acknowledged that the community he was espousing was “an
unattainable ideal.”
YOUTH: Ha-ha. Well, that’s perplexing, isn’t it? How about the other way around, then? Do you really
comprehend and accept this community feeling, or whatever it is, that includes the entire universe?
PHILOSOPHER: I try to. Because I feel that one cannot truly comprehend Adlerian psychology without
comprehending this point.
YOUTH: Okay then!
PHILOSOPHER: As I have been saying all along, Adlerian psychology has the view that all problems are
interpersonal relationship problems. Interpersonal relations are the source of unhappiness. And the
opposite can be said, too—interpersonal relations are the source of happiness.
YOUTH: Indeed.
PHILOSOPHER: Furthermore, community feeling is the most important index for considering a state of
interpersonal relations that is happy.
YOUTH: All right. I’d like to hear all about it.
PHILOSOPHER: Community feeling is also referred to as “social interest,” that is to say, “interest in
society.” So now I have a question for you: Do you know what society’s smallest unit is, from the point
of view of sociology?
YOUTH: Society’s smallest unit, huh? I’d say the family.
PHILOSOPHER: No, it is “you and I.” When there are two people, society emerges in their presence, and
community emerges there too. To gain an understanding of the community feeling that Adler speaks of,
it is advisable to use “you and I” as the starting point.
YOUTH: And what do you do with that as the starting point?
PHILOSOPHER: You make the switch from attachment to self (self-interest) to concern for others (social
interest).
YOUTH: Attachment to self? Concern for others? What’s all that about?
Why Am I Only Interested in Myself?
PHILOSOPHER: Well, let’s consider this concretely. For purposes of clarity, in place of “attachment to self”
I will use the word “self-centered.” In your view, someone who is self-centered is what sort of person?
YOUTH: Hmm, I guess the first thing that comes to mind is the kind of person who’s like a tyrant.
Someone who’s domineering, has no qualms about being a nuisance to others, and thinks only about
things that are to his own advantage. He thinks that the world revolves around him, and he behaves like a
dictator who rules by absolute authority and force. He’s the kind of person who creates an enormous
amount of trouble for everyone around him. Someone who’s just like Shakespeare’s King Lear, a typical
tyrant.
PHILOSOPHER: I see.
YOUTH: On the other hand, he wouldn’t necessarily be a tyrant—one might speak of the sort of person
who disturbs the harmony of a group as self-centered, too. He’s someone who can’t operate in a group
and prefers to act alone. He never stops to reflect on his actions, even when he’s late for appointments or
fails to keep his promises. In a word, he is an egotist.
PHILOSOPHER: To be sure, that is the kind of image that generally comes to mind when thinking of selfcentered
people. But there is another type that must be taken into account. People who are incapable of
carrying out the separation of tasks and who are obsessed with the desire for recognition are also
extremely self-centered.
YOUTH: Why is that?
PHILOSOPHER: Consider the reality of the desire for recognition. How much do others pay attention to
you, and what is their judgment of you? That is to say, how much do they satisfy your desire? People
who are obsessed with such a desire for recognition will seem to be looking at other people, while they are
actually looking only at themselves. They lack concern for others and are concerned solely with the “I.”
Simply put, they are self-centered.
YOUTH: So would you say that people like me, who fear being judged by others, are self-centered, too?
Even though I try so hard to be mindful of others and adjust myself to them?
PHILOSOPHER: Yes. In the sense that you are concerned solely with the “I,” you are self-centered. You
want to be thought well of by others, and that is why you worry about the way they look at you. That is
not concern for others. It is nothing but attachment to self.
YOUTH: But . . .
PHILOSOPHER: This is something I spoke of last time. The fact that there are people who do not think well
of you is proof that you are living in freedom. You might have a sense of something about this that seems
self-centered. But I think you have understood this from today’s discussion: A way of living in which one
is constantly troubled by how one is seen by others is a self-centered lifestyle in which one’s sole concern
is with the “I.”
YOUTH: Well, now, that is an astounding statement!
PHILOSOPHER: Not just you, but all people who are attached to the “I” are self-centered. And that is
precisely why it is necessary to make the switch from “attachment to self” to “concern for others.”
YOUTH: Okay, so yes, it is true that I am always looking only at myself, that, I acknowledge. I’m
constantly worried about how other people see me, but not about how I see them. If you are saying I am
self-centered, there is nothing that I can say to refute that. But think about it like this: If my life were a
feature-length movie, the protagonist would certainly be this “I,” wouldn’t it? Is pointing the camera at
the protagonist really such a reprehensible thing?
You Are Not the Center of the World
PHILOSOPHER: Let’s go over things in order. First of all, each of us is a member of a community, and that
is where we belong. Feeling that one has one’s own place of refuge within the community, feeling that
“it’s okay to be here,” and having a sense of belonging—these are basic human desires. Whether it is one’s
studies, work, or friendships, or one’s love or marriage, all these things are connected to one’s search for
places and relationships in which one can feel “it’s okay to be here.” Wouldn’t you agree?
YOUTH: Ah, yes, I do! That’s it exactly!
PHILOSOPHER: And the protagonist in one’s life is the “I.” There is nothing wrong with the train of
thought up to this point. But the “I” does not rule the center of the world. While the “I” is life’s
protagonist, it is never more than a member of the community and a part of the whole.
YOUTH: A part of the whole?
PHILOSOPHER: People who have concern only for themselves think that they are at the center of the
world. To such people, others are merely “people who will do something for me.” They half genuinely
believe that everyone else exists to serve them and should give precedence to their feelings.
YOUTH: Just like a prince or a princess.
PHILOSOPHER: Yes, exactly. They make a leap from being “life’s protagonist” to becoming “the world’s
protagonist.” For this reason, whenever they come into contact with another person, all they can think is,
What will this person give me? However—and this is something that does not hold true for princes and
princesses—this expectation is not going to be satisfied on every occasion. Because other people are not
living to satisfy your expectations.
YOUTH: Indeed.
PHILOSOPHER: Then, when those expectations are not satisfied, they become deeply disillusioned and feel
as if they have been horribly insulted. And they become resentful, and think, That person didn’t do
anything for me. That person let me down. That person isn’t my comrade anymore. He’s my enemy. People
who hold the belief that they are the center of the world always end up losing their comrades before long.
YOUTH: That’s strange. Didn’t you say that we are living in a subjective world? As long as the world is a
subjective space, I am the only one who can be at its center. I won’t let anyone else be there.
PHILOSOPHER: I think that when you speak of “the world,” what you have in mind is something like a
map of the world.
YOUTH: A map of the world? What are you talking about?
PHILOSOPHER: For example, on the map of the world used in France, the Americas are located on the left
side, and Asia is on the right. Europe and France are depicted at the center of the map, of course. The
map of the world used in China, on the other hand, shows the Americas on the right side and Europe on
the left. French people who see the Chinese map of the world will most likely experience a difficult-todescribe
sense of incongruity, as if they have been driven unjustly to the fringes, or cut out of the world
arbitrarily.
YOUTH: Yes, I see your point.
PHILOSOPHER: But what happens when a globe is used to represent the world? Because with a globe, you
can look at the world with France at the center, or China, or Brazil, for that matter. Every place is central,
and no place is, at the same time. The globe may be dotted with an infinite number of centers, in
accordance with the viewer’s location and angle of view. That is the nature of a globe.
YOUTH: Hmm, that is true.
PHILOSOPHER: Think of what I said earlier—that you are not the center of the world—as being the same
thing. You are a part of a community, not its center.
YOUTH: I am not the center of the world. Our world is a globe, not a map that has been cut out on a
plane. Well, I can understand that in theory, anyway. But why do I have to be aware of the fact that I’m
not the center of the world?
PHILOSOPHER: Now we will go back to where we started. All of us are searching for the sense of
belonging, that “it’s okay to be here.” In Adlerian psychology, however, a sense of belonging is
something that one can attain only by making an active commitment to the community of one’s own
accord, and not simply by being here.
YOUTH: By making an active commitment? What does one do, exactly?
PHILOSOPHER: One faces one’s life tasks. In other words, one takes steps forward on one’s own, without
avoiding the tasks of the interpersonal relations of work, friendship, and love. If you are “the center of the
world,” you will have no thoughts whatsoever regarding commitment to the community; because
everyone else is “someone who will do something for me,” and there is no need for you to do things
yourself. But you are not the center of the world, and neither am I. One has to stand on one’s own two
feet, and take one’s own steps forward with the tasks of interpersonal relations. One needs to think not,
What will this person give me? but rather, What can I give to this person? That is commitment to the
community.
YOUTH: It is because one gives something that one can find one’s refuge?
PHILOSOPHER: That’s right. A sense of belonging is something that one acquires through one’s own
efforts—it is not something one is endowed with at birth. Community feeling is the much-debated key
concept of Adlerian psychology.
It was certainly a concept that the young man found difficult to accept at first. And naturally, it
upset him to be told he was self-centered. But what he found hardest to accept was the incredible
extent of that community, which included the universe and inanimate objects. What were Adler
and this philosopher talking about, anyway? With a bewildered expression, the young man
slowly opened his mouth to speak.
Listen to the Voice of a Larger Community
YOUTH: I must admit, you’re starting to lose me. Let me try to straighten things out a bit. First, at the
gateway of interpersonal relations, we’ve got the separation of tasks, and as the goal, there’s community
feeling. And you’re saying that community feeling is having “a sense of others as comrades” and “an
awareness of having one’s own refuge” within the community. Up to this point, it is something I can
understand and accept. But the details still seem a bit far-fetched. For one thing, what do you mean by
expanding this thing you call “community” to include the entire universe, and then even the past and the
future, and everything from living things to inanimate objects?
PHILOSOPHER: It certainly does make things more difficult to understand if one takes Adler’s concept of
community literally and tries to actually imagine it including the universe and inanimate objects. For the
time being, suffice it to say that the scope of community is infinite.
YOUTH: Infinite?
PHILOSOPHER: Take, for example, a man who, on reaching retirement age and stopping work, quickly
loses his vitality and becomes depressed. Abruptly cut off from the company that was his community and
bereft of title or profession, he becomes an “ordinary nobody.” As he is unable to accept the fact that he is
now “normal,” he becomes old practically overnight. But all that really happened to the man is that he
was cut off from the small community that is his company. Each person belongs to a separate
community. And when it comes down to it, all of us belong to the community of the earth, and the
community of the universe.
YOUTH: That’s pure sophistry! To suddenly come out with “You belong to the universe,” as if that could
give someone a sense of belonging.
PHILOSOPHER: It’s true, there’s no way one can just imagine the entire universe all of a sudden. Even so, I
would like you to gain the awareness that you belong to a separate, larger community that is beyond the
one you see in your immediate vicinity—for example, the country or local society in which you live—
and that you are contributing in some way within that community.
YOUTH: Then what about in a situation like this? Say there’s a guy who’s unmarried, who has lost his job
and his friends, and who avoids the company of other people and just lives off the money his parents left
him. So he’s basically running away from all the tasks of work and tasks of friendship and tasks of love.
Would you say that even a guy like that belongs to some sort of community?
PHILOSOPHER: Of course. Say he goes out to buy a loaf of bread. He pays for it with a coin. That coin does
not simply go back to the bakers of the bread. It goes to the producers of flour and butter, to the people
who deliver those ingredients, to the purveyors of the gasoline used by the delivery vehicles, to people in
the oil-producing countries where that fuel comes from, and so on. So it’s all connected. People are never
truly alone or separate from community, and cannot be.
YOUTH: So you’re saying I should fantasize more when I buy bread?
PHILOSOPHER: It is not fantasy. It is fact. The community Adler speaks of goes beyond things we can see,
like our households and societies, to include those connections that we cannot see.
YOUTH: Excuse me for saying so, but you’re escaping into abstract theory. The issue we should be
addressing here is the sense of belonging, that “it’s okay to be here.” And then, with regard to the
meaning of this sense of belonging, it is the community we can see that is stronger. You will agree with
that, won’t you? For example, if we compare the “company” community with the “earth” community,
the sense of belonging of someone who says “I am a member of this company” would be stronger. To
borrow your terminology, the distance and depth of the interpersonal relations are completely different.
It’s only natural that when we search for a sense of belonging, we will be attracted to the smaller
community.
PHILOSOPHER: That is a perceptive observation. So let’s start thinking about why we should be aware of
multiple and larger communities. As I stated earlier, all of us belong to multiple communities. We
belong to our households, our schools, our workplaces, and the local societies and the countries in which
we live. This far you agree, yes?
YOUTH: Yes, I do.
PHILOSOPHER: Well, suppose that you, as a student, regarded the community that is “school” as absolute.
In other words, school is everything to you, your “I” exists because of school, and no other “I” is possible
without it. But naturally, there will be occasions within that community when you run into adversity. It
could be getting bullied, or not being able to make friends, or not keeping up with your schoolwork, or
not adapting to the system of the school in the first place. That is to say, it’s possible that with regard to
the community that is your school, you won’t have that “It’s okay to be here” sense of belonging.
YOUTH: Yes, absolutely. That’s quite possible.
PHILOSOPHER: When that happens, if you are thinking of school as being everything to you, you will end
up without a sense of belonging to anything. And then, you will escape within a smaller community,
such as your home. You will shut yourself in, and maybe even turn to violence against members of your
own family. And by doing such things, you will be attempting to gain a sense of belonging somehow.
What I would like you to focus on here, though, is that there is “a more separate community” and,
moreover, that there is “a larger community.”
YOUTH: What does that mean?
PHILOSOPHER: That there is a larger world that extends far beyond the confines of the school. And every
one of us is a member of that world. If there is no place of refuge in your school, you should find a
different refuge outside the walls of the school. You can change schools, and it’s fine to withdraw from
school, too. A community that you can break relations with by simply submitting a withdrawal notice is
one that you can have only so much connection to, in any case. Once you know how big the world is,
you will see that all the hardship you went through in school was a storm in a teacup. The moment you
leave the teacup, that raging storm will be gone, and a gentle breeze will greet you in its place.
YOUTH: Are you saying that as long as you keep yourself shut up inside the teacup, you’ll never stand a
chance outside it?
PHILOSOPHER: Secluding yourself in your room is akin to staying in the teacup, as if you are hunkering
down in a small shelter. You might be able to wait out the rain for a short while, but the storm will
continue unabated.
YOUTH: Well, maybe in theory, anyway. But it’s hard to break out. The decision to withdraw from school
itself isn’t something to be taken lightly.
PHILOSOPHER: I am sure you are right—it would not be easy. Therefore, there is a principle of action that
I would like you to commit to memory. When we run into difficulties in our interpersonal relations, or
when we can no longer see a way out, what we should consider first and foremost is the principle that
says, “Listen to the voice of the larger community.”
YOUTH: The voice of the larger community?
PHILOSOPHER: If it is a school, one does not judge things with the common sense of the community that
is the school, but instead follows the common sense of a larger community. Now, let’s say it’s your
school, and your teacher has been behaving in an authoritarian manner. But the power or authority your
teacher wields are nothing more than an aspect of the common sense that operates only within the small
community that is the school. From the standpoint of the community that is “human society,” both you
and your teacher are equal humans. If unreasonable demands are being thrust on you, it is fine to object
to them directly.
YOUTH: But it will be very difficult to object when the teacher is right in front of me.
PHILOSOPHER: Not at all. Though this might be termed a “you and I” relationship, if it is one that can
break down just because you raise an objection, then it is not the sort of relationship you need to get into
in the first place. It is fine to just let go of it. Living in fear of one’s relationships falling apart is an unfree
way to live, in which one is living for other people.
YOUTH: You’re saying to choose freedom at the same time that I have community feeling?
PHILOSOPHER: Yes, of course. Do not cling to the small community right in front of you. There will
always be more “you and I,” and more “everyone,” and larger communities that exist.
Do Not Rebuke or Praise
YOUTH: Well, all right. But don’t you see? You haven’t touched on the essential point, that is, the course
of progression from the separation of tasks to community feeling. So first, I separate the tasks. I think of
my tasks as being up to this point, and everything beyond that is other people’s tasks. I don’t intervene in
other people’s tasks, and I draw a line so that other people won’t intervene in mine. But how can one
build interpersonal relations with this separation of tasks and arrive in the end at the community feeling
that “it’s okay to be here”? How does Adlerian psychology advise us to overcome the life tasks of work,
friendship, and love? It seems like you’re just trying to confuse me with abstract words, without going
into any concrete explanation.
PHILOSOPHER: Yes, you’ve hit on the important point. How does carrying out the separating of tasks
connect with good relations? That is to say, how does it connect with building the kind of relations in
which we cooperate and act in harmony with each other? Which brings us to the concept of “horizontal
relationship.”
YOUTH: Horizontal relationship?
PHILOSOPHER: Let’s start with an easily understood example, that of the parent-child relationship.
Whether the circumstances are, for example, those of child-rearing, or of training junior staff in the
workplace, generally speaking there are two approaches that are considered: one is the method of raising
by rebuke, and the other is the method of raising by praise.
YOUTH: Ah. That is a hotly debated issue.
PHILOSOPHER: Which one do you think is the better choice? To rebuke or to praise?
YOUTH: It’s better to raise by praising, of course.
PHILOSOPHER: Why?
YOUTH: Take animal training, for example. When teaching animals to do tricks, you can make them obey
with a whip. This is the typical “raising by rebuke” way. On the other hand, it’s also possible to get
animals to learn tricks by holding up rewards of food or saying kind words. This is “raising by praise.”
Both ways can lead to the same results—they learn new tricks. But the motivation for moving toward the
objective is completely different if the animal is doing it because it will be rebuked or doing it because it
wants to be praised. In the latter instance, it will come with a feeling of joy. Rebuke only makes the
animal wither. But raising with praise naturally allows it to grow strong and healthy. This seems like an
obvious conclusion.
PHILOSOPHER: Animal training is an interesting example. Now let’s look at this from the standpoint of
Adlerian psychology. In Adlerian psychology, we take the stance that in child-rearing, and in all other
forms of communication with other people, one must not praise.
YOUTH: One must not praise?
PHILOSOPHER: Physical punishment is out of the question, of course, and rebuking is not accepted, either.
One must not praise, and one must not rebuke. That is the standpoint of Adlerian psychology.
YOUTH: But how is that even possible?
PHILOSOPHER: Consider the reality of the act of praise. For example, suppose I praised a statement you
made by saying, “Good job!” Wouldn’t hearing those words seem strange somehow?
YOUTH: Yes, I guess it would put me in an unpleasant mood.
PHILOSOPHER: Can you explain why it would feel unpleasant?
YOUTH: What’s unpleasant is the feeling that from the words “Good job!” one is being talked down to.
PHILOSOPHER: Exactly. In the act of praise, there is the aspect of it being “the passing of judgment by a
person of ability on a person of no ability.” A mother praises her child who has helped her prepare
dinner, saying, “You’re such a good helper!” But when her husband does the same things, you can be
sure she won’t be telling him, “You’re such a good helper!”
YOUTH: Ha-ha, you are right about that.
PHILOSOPHER: In other words, the mother who praises the child by saying things like “You’re such a good
helper!” or “Good job!” or “Well, aren’t you something!” is unconsciously creating a hierarchical
relationship and seeing the child as beneath her. The example of animal training that you just gave is also
emblematic of the hierarchical relationship—the vertical relationship—that is behind the praising. When
one person praises another, the goal is “to manipulate someone who has less ability than you.” It is not
done out of gratitude or respect.
YOUTH: So you’re saying that one praises in order to manipulate?
PHILOSOPHER: That’s right. Whether we praise or rebuke others, the only difference is one of the carrot or
the stick, and the background goal is manipulation. The reason Adlerian psychology is highly critical of
reward-and-punishment education is that its intention is to manipulate children.
YOUTH: No way, you’re wrong there. Because think of it from the standpoint of the child. For children,
isn’t being praised by their parents the greatest joy of all? It’s because they want praise that they do their
studies. It’s because they want praise that they learn to behave properly. That’s how it was for me when I
was a child. How I craved praise from my parents! And even after becoming an adult, it’s been the same
way. When your boss praises you, it feels good. That’s how it is for everyone. This has nothing to do with
reason—it’s just instinctual emotion!
PHILOSOPHER: One wishes to be praised by someone. Or conversely, one decides to give praise to
someone. This is proof that one is seeing all interpersonal relationships as “vertical relationships.” This
holds true for you, too: It is because you are living in vertical relationships that you want to be praised.
Adlerian psychology refutes all manner of vertical relationships and proposes that all interpersonal
relationships be horizontal relationships. In a sense, this point may be regarded as the fundamental
principle of Adlerian psychology.
YOUTH: Is this something that is conveyed by the words “equal but not the same”?
PHILOSOPHER: Yes. Equal, that is to say, horizontal. For example, there are men who verbally abuse their
wives, who do all the housework, with such remarks as “You’re not bringing in any money, so I don’t
want to hear it” or “It’s thanks to me that there’s food on the table.” And I’m sure you’ve heard this one
before: “You have everything you need, so what are you complaining about?” It’s perfectly shameful.
Such statements of economic superiority or the like have no connection whatsoever to human worth. A
company employee and a full-time housewife simply have different workplaces and roles, and are truly
“equal but not the same.”
YOUTH: I agree entirely.
PHILOSOPHER: They are probably afraid that women will grow wise to their situation and start earning
more than men do, and that women will start asserting themselves. They see all interpersonal relations as
vertical relationships, and they are afraid of being seen by women as beneath them. That is to say, they
have intense, hidden feelings of inferiority.
YOUTH: So in a sense, they are getting into a superiority complex in which they are trying to make a show
of their abilities?
PHILOSOPHER: So it seems. In the first place, the feeling of inferiority is an awareness that arises within
vertical relationships. If one can build horizontal relationships that are “equal but not the same” for all
people, there will no longer be any room for inferiority complexes to emerge.
YOUTH: Hmm. Maybe I do have an awareness of manipulation somewhere in my psyche when I go
about praising other people. Laying on the flattery to get in good favor with my boss—that’s definitely
manipulation, isn’t it? And it’s the other way around, too. I’ve been manipulated by being praised by
others. Funny, I guess that’s just the sort of person I am!
PHILOSOPHER: Yes, in the sense that you have not been able to break out of vertical relationships, it would
seem so.
YOUTH: This is getting interesting! Please go on!
The Encouragement Approach
PHILOSOPHER: As you may recall from our discussion on the separation of tasks, I brought up the subject
of intervention. This is the act of intruding on other people’s tasks. So why does a person intervene?
Here, too, in the background, vertical relationships are at play. It is precisely because one perceives
interpersonal relations as vertical, and sees the other party as beneath one, that one intervenes. Through
intervention, one tries to lead the other party in the desired direction. One has convinced oneself that one
is right and that the other party is wrong. Of course, the intervention here is manipulation, pure and
simple. Parents commanding a child to study is a typical example of this. They might be acting out of the
best of intentions from their points of view, but when it comes down to it, the parents are intruding and
attempting to manipulate the child to go in their desired direction.
YOUTH: If one can build horizontal relationships, will that intervention disappear?
PHILOSOPHER: Yes, it will.
YOUTH: Well, it’s one thing if you’re just talking about a child’s studies. But when someone’s suffering
right there in front of you, you can’t just leave him or her be, can you? Would you still say that lending a
helping hand is intervention, and then do nothing?
PHILOSOPHER: One must not let it go unnoticed. It is necessary to offer assistance that does not turn into
intervention.
YOUTH: What is the difference between intervention and assistance?
PHILOSOPHER: Think back to our discussion of the separation of tasks, to the subject of a child’s
schoolwork. As I stated then, this is a task that the child has to resolve himself, not something that parents
or teachers can do for him. So intervention is this kind of intruding on other people’s tasks and directing
them by saying things like “You have to study” or “Get into that university.” Whereas assistance, on the
other hand, presupposes the separation of tasks, and also horizontal relationships. Having understood
that studying is the child’s task, one considers what one can do for him. Concretely speaking, instead of
commanding from above that the child must study, one acts on him in such a way that he can gain the
confidence to take care of his own studies and face his tasks on his own.
YOUTH: And that action isn’t forced?
PHILOSOPHER: No, it’s not. Without forcing, and with the tasks always kept separate, one assists the child
to resolve them by his own efforts. It’s the approach of “You can lead a horse to water, but you can’t
make him drink.” He is the one who has to face his tasks, and he is the one who makes the resolution.
YOUTH: So you neither praise nor rebuke?
PHILOSOPHER: That’s right, one neither praises nor rebukes. This kind of assistance, which is based on
horizontal relationships, is referred to in Adlerian psychology as “encouragement.”
YOUTH: Encouragement, huh? Right, that’s the term you mentioned some time ago. You said you’d
explain at a later date.
PHILOSOPHER: When one is not following through with one’s tasks, it is not because one is without
ability. Adlerian psychology tells us that the issue here is not one of ability but simply that “one has lost
the courage to face one’s tasks.” And if that is the case, the thing to do before anything else is to recover
that lost courage.
YOUTH: But we’re just going around in circles! That’s basically the same as giving praise. When one is
praised by another person, one becomes truly aware of one’s ability and regains one’s courage. Please do
not be stubborn about this point—just acknowledge the necessity of giving praise.
PHILOSOPHER: No, I will not acknowledge that.
YOUTH: Why not?
PHILOSOPHER: The reason is clear. Being praised is what leads people to form the belief that they have no
ability.
YOUTH: What did you say?
PHILOSOPHER: Shall I repeat myself? The more one is praised by another person, the more one forms the
belief that one has no ability. Please do your best to remember this.
YOUTH: Do such foolish people even exist? It’s got to be the other way around! It is as a result of being
praised that one becomes truly aware of one’s ability. Isn’t that obvious?
PHILOSOPHER: You are wrong. Even if you do derive joy from being praised, it is the same as being
dependent on vertical relationships and acknowledging that you have no ability. Because giving praise is a
judgment that is passed by a person of ability onto a person without ability.
YOUTH: I just cannot agree with that.
PHILOSOPHER: When receiving praise becomes one’s goal, one is choosing a way of living that is in line
with another person’s system of values. Looking at your life until now, aren’t you tired of trying to live
up to your parents’ expectations?
YOUTH: Um, well, I guess so.
PHILOSOPHER: First, do the separation of tasks. Then, while accepting each other’s differences, build equal
horizontal relationships. Encouragement is the approach that comes next.
How to Feel You Have Value
YOUTH: So concretely speaking, how does one go about this? One cannot praise, and one cannot rebuke.
What other words and choices are there?
PHILOSOPHER: Think about a time when you’ve had help in your work—not from a child but from a
partner who is your equal—and you will probably see the answer right away. When a friend helps you
clean your home, what do you say to him?
YOUTH: I say, “Thank you.”
PHILOSOPHER: Right. You convey words of gratitude, saying thank you to this partner who has helped
you with your work. You might express straightforward delight: “I’m glad.” Or you could convey your
thanks by saying, “That was a big help.” This is an approach to encouragement that is based on horizontal
relationships.
YOUTH: That’s all?
PHILOSOPHER: Yes. The most important thing is to not judge other people. “Judgment” is a word that
comes out of vertical relationships. If one is building horizontal relationships, there will be words of
more straightforward gratitude and respect and joy.
YOUTH: Hmm, your point that judgment is created by vertical relationships certainly seems to be true.
But what about this? Could the words “thank you” actually have such a great power as to be able to bring
back courage? After all, I think I’d prefer to be praised, even if the words I hear are ones that come from
vertical relationships.
PHILOSOPHER: Being praised essentially means that one is receiving judgment from another person as
“good.” And the measure of what is good or bad about that act is that person’s yardstick. If receiving
praise is what one is after, one will have no choice but to adapt to that person’s yardstick and put the
brakes on one’s own freedom. “Thank you,” on the other hand, rather than being judgment, is a clear
expression of gratitude. When one hears words of gratitude, one knows that one has made a contribution
to another person.
YOUTH: So even if you’re judged as “good” by another person, you don’t feel that you’ve made a
contribution?
PHILOSOPHER: That’s right. This is a point that will connect to our subsequent discussion as well—in
Adlerian psychology, a great deal of emphasis is given to “contribution.”
YOUTH: Why is that?
PHILOSOPHER: Well, what does a person have to do to get courage? In Adler’s view, “It is only when a
person is able to feel that he has worth that he can possess courage.”
YOUTH: When a person is able to feel that he has worth?
PHILOSOPHER: Do you recall when we were discussing the feeling of inferiority that I spoke of this as
being an issue of subjective worth? Is one able to feel one has worth, or does one feel one is a worthless
being? If one is able to feel one has worth, then one can accept oneself just as one is and have the courage
to face one’s life tasks. So the issue that arises at this point is how on earth can one become able to feel one
has worth?
YOUTH: Yes, that’s it exactly! I need you to explain that very clearly, please.
PHILOSOPHER: It’s quite simple. It is when one is able to feel “I am beneficial to the community” that one
can have a true sense of one’s worth. This is the answer that would be offered in Adlerian psychology.
YOUTH: That I am beneficial to the community?
PHILOSOPHER: That one can act on the community, that is to say, on other people, and that one can feel
“I am of use to someone.” Instead of feeling judged by another person as “good,” being able to feel, by
way of one’s own subjective viewpoint, that “I can make contributions to other people.” It is at that point
that, at last, we can have a true sense of our own worth. Everything we have been discussing about
community feeling and encouragement connects here.
YOUTH: Hmm. I don’t know, it’s starting to get a bit confusing.
PHILOSOPHER: We are getting to the heart of the discussion now. Please stick with me awhile longer. It is
about having concern for others, building horizontal relationships, and taking the approach of
encouragement. All these things connect to the deep life awareness of “I am of use to someone,” and in
turn, to your courage to live.
YOUTH: To be of use to someone. That is what my life is worth living for . . . ?
PHILOSOPHER: Let’s take a little break. Would you like some coffee?
YOUTH: Yes, please.
The discussion of community feeling had become more confusing than ever. One must not
praise. And one must not rebuke, either. All words that are used to judge other people are words
that come out of vertical relationships, and we need to build horizontal relationships. And it is
only when one is able to feel that one is of use to someone that one can have a true awareness of
one’s worth. There was a major flaw in this logic somewhere. The young man felt it instinctively.
As he sipped the hot coffee, thoughts of his grandfather crossed his mind.
Exist in the Present
PHILOSOPHER: Well, have you worked things out?
YOUTH: Gradually, but yes, it’s getting clearer. You don’t seem to be aware of it, but just now you said
something really over the top. It’s a dangerous, rather extreme opinion that just negates everything in the
world.
PHILOSOPHER: Oh, really? What is it?
YOUTH: It’s the idea that being of use to someone is what gives one a true awareness of one’s worth. If you
put it the other way around, a person who isn’t of any use to others has no worth at all. That’s what you
are saying, isn’t it? If one takes that to its logical conclusion, then the lives of newborn babies and of
invalids and old people who are bedridden aren’t worth living either. How could this be? Let’s talk about
my grandfather. He spends his days bedridden at an old people’s home. Since he has dementia, he doesn’t
recognize any of his children or grandchildren, and his condition is such that he would not be able to go
on living without constant care. One simply couldn’t think of him as being of use to someone. Don’t
you see? Your opinion is basically the same thing as saying to my grandfather, “People like you aren’t
qualified to live!”
PHILOSOPHER: I reject that definitively.
YOUTH: How do you reject that?
PHILOSOPHER: There are parents who refute my explanation of the concept of encouragement by saying,
“Our child does bad things from morning to night, and there is never an occasion to tell him, ‘Thank
you,’ or ‘You helped a lot.’ ” The context is probably the same as what you are talking about, isn’t it?
YOUTH: Yes, it is. So tell me please how you justify that.
PHILOSOPHER: At this point, you are looking at another person on the level of his acts. In other words,
that that person “did something.” So from that point of view, it might seem that bedridden old people are
only a nuisance and are of no use to anyone. So let’s look at other people not on the “level of acts” but on
the “level of being.” Without judging whether or not other people did something, one rejoices in their
being there, in their very existence, and one calls out to them with words of gratitude.
YOUTH: You call out to their existence? What on earth are you talking about?
PHILOSOPHER: If you consider things at the level of being, we are of use to others and have worth just by
being here. This is an indisputable fact.
YOUTH: No way! Enough joking around. Being of use to someone just by being here—that’s got to be
straight out of some new religion.
PHILOSOPHER: Well, for example, suppose your mother has a car accident. Her condition is serious, and
her life may be in danger. At a time like that, you would not be wondering if your mother “did
something,” or anything of the sort. More than likely, you will just be thinking you’ll be glad if she makes
it, and you’re glad she is holding on right now.
YOUTH: Of course I would!
PHILOSOPHER: That’s what it means to be grateful on the level of being. Your mother might not be able
to do anything in her critical condition that would be considered an act, but just by being alive, she
would be supporting the psychological state of you and your family, and would therefore be of use. The
same could be said for you, too. If your life were in danger, and you were hanging on by a thread, the
people around you would probably feel very gladdened just by the very fact of your existing. They would
simply feel thankful that you are safe in the here and now, and would not be wanting you to perform
some direct act. At the very least, there is no reason they would have to think that way. So instead of
thinking of oneself on the level of acts, first of all one accepts oneself on the level of being.
YOUTH: That’s an extreme example—everyday life is different.
PHILOSOPHER: No, it is the same.
YOUTH: What is the same about it? Try and give me a more everyday example, please. If you can’t, I
won’t be able to agree with this.
PHILOSOPHER: All right. When we look at other people, we are prone to construct our own ideal images
of ourselves, which we then detract from and judge. Imagine, for example, a child who never talks back
to his parents, excels in both schoolwork and sports, attends a good university, and joins a large company.
There are parents who will compare their child to such an image of an ideal child—which is an impossible
fiction—and then be filled with complaints and dissatisfaction. They treat the idealized image as one
hundred points, and they gradually subtract from that. This is truly a “judgment” way of thinking.
Instead, the parents could refrain from comparing their child to anyone else, see him for who he actually
is, and be glad and grateful for his being there. Instead of taking away points from some idealized image,
they could start from zero. And if they do that, they should be able to call out to his existence itself.
YOUTH: Okay, but I’d say that’s just an idealistic approach. So are you saying that even with the kind of
child who never goes to school or gets a job, but just shuts himself in and stays home, one should still
communicate one’s gratitude and say thank you?
PHILOSOPHER: Of course. Suppose your shut-in child helped you wash the dishes after a meal. If you were
to say then, “Enough of that already—just go to school,” you would be using the words of such parents
who detract from an image of an ideal child. If you were to take such an approach, the child would
probably end up even more discouraged. However, if you can say a straightforward thank you, the child
just might feel his own worth and take a new step forward.
YOUTH: That’s just utterly hypocritical! It’s nothing more than the nonsensical talk of a hypocrite. It
sounds like the “neighborly love” that Christians talk about. The community feeling, the horizontal
relationships, the gratitude for existence, and so on. Who on earth could actually do such things?
PHILOSOPHER: With regard to this issue of community feeling, there was a person who asked Adler a
similar question. Adler’s reply was the following: “Someone has to start. Other people might not be
cooperative, but that is not connected to you. My advice is this: you should start. With no regard to
whether others are cooperative or not.” My advice is exactly the same.
People Cannot Make Proper Use of Self
YOUTH: I should start?
PHILOSOPHER: That’s right. Without regard to whether other people are cooperative or not.
YOUTH: All right, I’ll ask you again. “People can be of use to someone else simply by being alive, and have
a true sense of their worth just by being alive.” Is that what you are saying?
PHILOSOPHER: Yes.
YOUTH: Well, I don’t know. I am alive, right here and now. “I,” who is no one else but me, am alive right
here. But even so, I don’t really feel that I have worth.
PHILOSOPHER: Can you describe in words why you do not feel that you have worth?
YOUTH: I suppose it’s what you’ve been referring to as interpersonal relations. From childhood up to the
present, I have always been belittled by people around me, especially my parents, as a poor excuse for a
little brother. They have never really tried to recognize me for who I am. You say that worth is something
one gives to oneself. But that’s just an impracticable theory. For example, at the library where I work, for
the most part my job is just sorting the returned books and putting them back on the shelves. It’s routine
work that anyone could do once they’ve been taught. If I stopped going to work, my boss would have no
trouble finding someone to replace me. I am needed only for the unskilled labor I provide, and it doesn’t
actually matter at all if it is “I” who is working there or someone else, or a machine, for that matter. No
one is requiring “this me” in particular. In such circumstances, would you have confidence in yourself?
Would you be able to have a true sense of worth?
PHILOSOPHER: From an Adlerian psychology point of view, the answer is simple. First of all, build a
horizontal relationship between yourself and another person. One is enough. Let’s start from there.
YOUTH: Please don’t treat me like a fool! Look, I have friends. And I am building solid horizontal
relationships with them.
PHILOSOPHER: Even so, I suspect that with your parents and your boss, and with your junior colleagues
and other people as well, the relationships you are building are vertical ones.
YOUTH: Of course, I have different kinds of relationships. That’s how it is for everyone.
PHILOSOPHER: This is a very important point. Does one build vertical relationships, or does one build
horizontal relationships? This is an issue of lifestyle, and human beings are not so clever as to be able to
have different lifestyles available whenever the need arises. In other words, deciding that one is “equal to
this person” or “in a hierarchical relationship with that person” does not work.
YOUTH: Do you mean that one has to choose one or the other—vertical relationships or horizontal
relationships?
PHILOSOPHER: Absolutely, yes. If you are building even one vertical relationship with someone, before
you even notice what is happening, you will be treating all your interpersonal relations as vertical.
YOUTH: So I am treating even my relationships with my friends as vertical?
PHILOSOPHER: That is correct. Even if you are not treating them in a boss-or-subordinate kind of way, it is
as if you are saying, “A is above me, and B is below me,” for example, or “I’ll follow A’s advice, but
ignore what B says,” or “I don’t mind breaking my promise to C.”
YOUTH: Hmm!
PHILOSOPHER: On the other hand, if one has managed to build a horizontal relationship with at least one
person—if one has been able to build a relationship of equals in the true sense of the term—that is a
major lifestyle transformation. With that breakthrough, all one’s interpersonal relations will gradually
become horizontal.
YOUTH: What nonsense! There are so many ways I could refute that. Think of a company setting, for
example. It wouldn’t really be feasible for the director and his new recruits to form relationships as
equals, would it? Hierarchical relationships are part of the system of our society, and to ignore that is to
ignore the social order. Look, if you heard that a new recruit at your company, who’s only twenty or so,
had suddenly started buddying up to the sixty-something director, don’t you think it would sound pretty
far-fetched?
PHILOSOPHER: It is certainly important to respect one’s elders. In a company structure, it is only natural
for there to be different levels of responsibility. I am not telling you to make friends with everyone, or
behave as if you are close friends. Rather, what is important is to be equal in consciousness, and to assert
that which needs to be asserted.
YOUTH: I am not someone who can mouth off to my seniors, and I would never think of trying. My
social common sense would be called into question if I did.
PHILOSOPHER: What is “senior”? What is this “mouthing off”? If one is gauging the atmosphere of a
situation and being dependent on vertical relationships, one is engaging in irresponsible acts—one is
trying to avoid one’s responsibilities.
YOUTH: What is irresponsible about it?
PHILOSOPHER: Suppose that as a result of following your boss’s instructions, your work ends in failure.
Whose responsibility is it then?
YOUTH: Well, that’d be my boss’s responsibility. Because I was just following orders, and he was the one
who decided on them.
PHILOSOPHER: None of the responsibility is yours?
YOUTH: No, it isn’t. It’s the responsibility of the boss who gave the orders. This is what’s known as
organizational accountability.
PHILOSOPHER: You are wrong. That is a life-lie. There is space for you to refuse, and there should also be
space to propose a better way of doing things. You are just thinking there is no space to refuse so that you
can avoid the conflict of the associated interpersonal relations and avoid responsibility—and you are
being dependent on vertical relationships.
YOUTH: Are you saying I should disobey my boss? Sure, in theory, I should. Theoretically, it’s exactly as
you say. But I can’t do that! There’s no way I could build a relationship like that.
PHILOSOPHER: Really? You are building a horizontal relationship with me right now. You are asserting
yourself very well. Instead of thinking about this or that difficulty, you can just start here.
YOUTH: I can start here?
PHILOSOPHER: Yes, in this small study. As I told you earlier, to me you are an irreplaceable friend.
YOUTH: . . .
PHILOSOPHER: Am I wrong?
YOUTH: I appreciate it, I really do. But I am afraid. I am afraid of accepting your proposal.
PHILOSOPHER: What are you afraid of, exactly?
YOUTH: The tasks of friendship, naturally. I have never befriended an older man like you. I have no idea if
a friend relationship with such a difference in age is even possible, or if I had better think of it as a studentteacher
relationship.
PHILOSOPHER: Age does not matter in love and friendship. It is certainly true that the tasks of friendship
require a steady courage. With regard to your relationship with me, it will be fine to reduce the distance
little by little. To a degree of distance in which we are not in very close contact but can still reach out and
touch each other’s faces with our outstretched arms, so to speak.
YOUTH: Please give me some time. Just once more, I would like some time to try to figure things out on
my own. Our discussion today has given me much to think about. I would like to take it all home and
ruminate on it calmly on my own.
PHILOSOPHER: It takes time to gain a true understanding of community feeling. It would be quite
impossible to understand everything about it right here and now. Please return to your home and give it
some careful thought, while checking it against everything else we have discussed.
YOUTH: I will. In any case, it was quite a blow to be told that I never really look at others, and I only have
concern for myself. You’re really a dreadful fellow!
PHILOSOPHER: Ha-ha. You say it in such a happy way.
YOUTH: Yes, I enjoy it immensely. It hurts, of course. It’s like a sharp pain that shoots through me, as if I
were swallowing needles. But still, I enjoy it immensely. It’s habit-forming, having these discussions with
you. I realized a little while ago that maybe I don’t just want to take apart your argument—I want you to
take apart mine, too.
PHILOSOPHER: I see. That’s an interesting analysis.
YOUTH: But don’t forget. I told you that I am going to take apart your argument and bring you to your
knees, and I haven’t given up.
PHILOSOPHER: Thank you. I’ve had a good time, too. Come by whenever you’re ready to pick this back
up.

THE FIFTH NIGHT:
To Live in Earnest in the Here and Now
The young man thought to himself, Adlerian psychology is engaged in a thorough inquiry into
interpersonal relationships. And the final goal of these interpersonal relationships is community feeling.
But is this really enough? Isn’t there something else that I was brought into this world to achieve? What is
the meaning of life? Where am I headed, and what sort of life am I trying to lead? The more the young
man thought, the more it seemed to him that his own existence had been tiny and insignificant.
Excessive Self-Consciousness Stifles the Self
PHILOSOPHER: It’s been awhile, hasn’t it?
YOUTH: Yes, I last came about a month ago. I have been thinking about the meaning of community
feeling since then.
PHILOSOPHER: So how do you feel about it now?
YOUTH: Well, community feeling is definitely an attractive idea. The sense of belonging, that “it’s okay to
be here,” for example, which we possess as a fundamental desire. I think it is a brilliant insight into our
existence as social creatures.
PHILOSOPHER: It’s a brilliant insight, except . . . ?
YOUTH: Funny, you caught on right away. That’s right, I still have some issues with it. I’ll say it straight
out—I have no idea what you are going on about with your references to the universe and all that, and it
ends up reeking of religion from beginning to end. There’s this kind of cultish quality to it all that I just
can’t shake.
PHILOSOPHER: When Adler first proposed the concept of community feeling, there was a great deal of
opposition in a similar vein. People said that psychology is supposed to be a science, and here was Adler
discussing the issue of worth. That sort of thing isn’t science, they said.
YOUTH: So in my own way, I tried to figure out why I couldn’t understand what you were talking about,
and I’m thinking that the order of things might be the problem. You’re starting off with the universe and
inanimate objects, and the past and the future and so on, so I lose track of things. Instead, one should get
a firm grasp of the “I.” Next, one should contemplate one-on-one relationships. That is to say, the
interpersonal relationships of “you and I.” And once one has done that, the larger community should
come into view.
PHILOSOPHER: I see. That is a good order.
YOUTH: Now, the first thing I want to ask about is attachment to self. You are saying that one has to stop
being attached to the “I” and make the switch to “concern for others.” I am sure it is exactly as you say—
concern for others is important, I agree. But no matter what, we worry about ourselves; we look at
ourselves all the time.
PHILOSOPHER: Have you thought about why we worry about ourselves?
YOUTH: I have. If I were a narcissist, for example—if I were in love with myself and constantly fascinated
with myself—maybe that would simplify things. Because your instruction, “Have more concern for
others,” is a perfectly sound one. But I am not a self-loving narcissist. I am a self-loathing realist. I hate
who I am, and that’s exactly why I look at myself all the time. I don’t have confidence in myself, and
that’s why I am excessively self-conscious.
PHILOSOPHER: At what times do you feel that you are excessively self-conscious?
YOUTH: Well, at meetings, for example, I have a hard time raising my hand and making myself heard. I
think needless things, like If I ask this question, they’ll probably laugh at me, or If the point I want to make
is irrelevant, I’ll get ridiculed, and so on, and I just clam up. Truthfully, I falter even when it comes to
telling silly jokes in front of people. Every time, my self-consciousness kicks in and puts the brakes on,
and it’s as if I’ve been straitjacketed. My self-consciousness won’t allow me to behave in an innocent way.
But I don’t even have to ask for your answer. I’m sure it’ll be the same as always: Have courage. But you
know, such words are of no use to me. Because this isn’t just a matter of courage.
PHILOSOPHER: I see. Last time, I gave an overview of community feeling. Today, we will dig deeper.
YOUTH: And where will that take us?
PHILOSOPHER: We will probably arrive at the question, What is happiness?
YOUTH: Oh! So happiness lies beyond community feeling?
PHILOSOPHER: There is no need to rush the answers. What we need is dialogue.
YOUTH: All right, then. So let’s get started!
Not Self-Affirmation— Self-Acceptance
PHILOSOPHER: First of all, let’s look at what you were just saying, about your self-consciousness putting
the brakes on and not letting you behave in an innocent way. There are probably many people who
experience this trouble. So let’s go back to the source again and think about your goal. What could you
be trying to gain by putting the brakes on your own innocent behavior?
YOUTH: It’s the genuine desire to not be laughed at, to not be thought of as a fool.
PHILOSOPHER: So in other words, you do not have confidence in your innocent self, in yourself just as
you are, right? And you stay away from the kind of interpersonal relationship in which you would just
be yourself. But I’ll bet that when you’re home alone, you sing out loud and dance to music and speak in
a lively voice.
YOUTH: Ha-ha! It’s almost like you’ve set up a surveillance camera in my room! But yes, it’s true. I can
behave freely when I’m alone.
PHILOSOPHER: Anyone can behave like a king when they’re alone. So this is an issue that should be
considered in the context of interpersonal relations. Because it isn’t that you don’t have an innocent self
—it is only that you can’t do such things in front of others.
YOUTH: Well, what should I do then?
PHILOSOPHER: It’s about community feeling, after all. Concretely speaking, it’s making the switch from
attachment to self (self-interest) to concern for others (social interest) and gaining a sense of community
feeling. Three things are needed at this point: “self-acceptance,” “confidence in others,” and
“contribution to others.”
YOUTH: Interesting. New keywords, I see. What do they refer to?
PHILOSOPHER: Let’s start with self-acceptance. On our first night, I brought up that statement of Adler’s:
“The important thing is not what one is born with but what use one makes of that equipment.” Do you
remember this?
YOUTH: Yes, of course.
PHILOSOPHER: We cannot discard the receptacle that is the “I,” and neither can we replace it. The
important thing, however, is “what use one makes of that equipment.” One changes one’s way of looking
at the “I”—that is to say, one changes how one uses it.
YOUTH: Does that mean be more positive and have a stronger sense of self-affirmation? Think about
everything more positively?
PHILOSOPHER: There is no need to go out of one’s way to be positive and affirm oneself. It’s not selfaffirmation
that we are concerned with, but self-acceptance.
YOUTH: Not self-affirmation, but self-acceptance?
PHILOSOPHER: That’s right. There is a clear difference. Self-affirmation is making suggestions to oneself,
such as “I can do it” or “I am strong,” even when something is simply beyond one’s ability. It is a notion
that can bring about a superiority complex, and may even be termed a way of living in which one lies to
oneself. With self-acceptance, on the other hand, if one cannot do something, one is simply accepting
“one’s incapable self” as is and moving forward so that one can do whatever one can. It is not a way of
lying to oneself. To put it more simply, say you’ve got a score of 60 percent, but you tell yourself, I just
happened to get unlucky this time around, and the real me is 100 percent. That is self-affirmation. By
contrast, if one accepts oneself as one is, as 60 percent, and thinks to oneself, How should I go about
getting closer to 100 percent?—that is self-acceptance.
YOUTH: So even if you’re only 60 percent, there’s no need to be pessimistic?
PHILOSOPHER: Of course not. No one is perfect. Do you recall what I said when I was explaining the
pursuit of superiority? That all people are in this condition of wanting to improve? Put the other way
around, there is no such thing as a 100 percent person. This is something we should actively
acknowledge.
YOUTH: Hmm. What you are saying sounds positive in various respects, but it has a negative ring to it as
well.
PHILOSOPHER: Here I use the term “affirmative resignation.”
YOUTH: Affirmative resignation?
PHILOSOPHER: This is also the case with the separation of tasks—one ascertains the things one can change
and the things one cannot change. One cannot change what one is born with. But one can, under one’s
own power, go about changing what use one makes of that equipment. So in that case, one simply has to
focus on what one can change, rather than on what one cannot. This is what I call self-acceptance.
YOUTH: What one can change, and what one cannot.
PHILOSOPHER: That’s right. Accept what is irreplaceable. Accept “this me” just as it is. And have the
courage to change what one can change. That is self-acceptance.
YOUTH: Hmm. That reminds me of a line that the writer Kurt Vonnegut quoted in one of his books:
“God grant me the serenity to accept the things I cannot change; courage to change the things I can; and
wisdom to know the difference.” It’s in the novel Slaughterhouse-Five.
PHILOSOPHER: Yes, I know it. It is the Serenity Prayer. These words are well known and have been
transmitted for many years in Christian societies.
YOUTH: He even used the word “courage.” I read the book so intently I should know it by heart. But I
never noticed this point until now.
PHILOSOPHER: It’s true. We do not lack ability. We just lack courage. It all comes down to courage.
The Difference Between Trust and Confidence
YOUTH: There is something about this “affirmative resignation” that sounds pessimistic. It’s just too bleak
if the upshot of all this lengthy discussion is resignation.
PHILOSOPHER: Is that so? Resignation has the connotation of seeing clearly with fortitude and acceptance.
Having a firm grasp on the truth of things—that is resignation. There is nothing pessimistic about it.
YOUTH: A firm grasp on the truth . . .
PHILOSOPHER: Of course, just because one has arrived at affirmative resignation as one’s self-acceptance, it
does not automatically follow that one finds community feeling. That is the reality. When one is
switching from attachment to self to concern for others, the second key concept—confidence in others—
becomes absolutely essential.
YOUTH: Confidence in others. In other words, believing in others?
PHILOSOPHER: Here, I will consider the words “believing in others” in the context of distinguishing trust
from confidence. First, when we speak of trust, we are referring to something that comes with set
conditions. We refer to it as credit. For example, when one wants to borrow money from a bank, one has
to have some kind of security. The bank calculates the amount of the loan based on the value of that
security, and says, “We will lend you this much.” The attitude of “We will lend it to you on the condition
that you will pay it back” or “We will lend you as much as you are able to pay back” is not one of having
confidence in someone. It is trust.
YOUTH: Well, that’s how bank financing works, I guess.
PHILOSOPHER: By contrast, from the standpoint of Adlerian psychology, the basis of interpersonal
relations is founded not on trust but on confidence.
YOUTH: And “confidence” in this case is . . . ?
PHILOSOPHER: It is doing without any set conditions whatsoever when believing in others. Even if one
does not have sufficient objective grounds for trusting someone, one believes. One believes
unconditionally without concerning oneself with such things as security. That is confidence.
YOUTH: Believing unconditionally? So it’s back to your pet notion of neighborly love?
PHILOSOPHER: Of course, if one believes in others without setting any conditions whatsoever, there will
be times when one gets taken advantage of. Just like the guarantor of a debt, there are times when one
may suffer damages. The attitude of continuing to believe in someone even in such instances is what we
call confidence.
YOUTH: Only a naïve dimwit would do such a thing! I guess you hold with the doctrine of innate human
goodness, while I hold with the doctrine of innate human evilness. Believe unconditionally in complete
strangers, and you’ll just get used and abused.
PHILOSOPHER: And there are also times when someone deceives you, and you get used that way. But look
at it from the standpoint of someone who has been taken advantage of. There are people who will
continue to believe in you unconditionally even if you are the one who has taken advantage of them.
People who will have confidence in you no matter how they are treated. Would you be able to betray
such a person again and again?
YOUTH: Um, no. Well, it would be . . .
PHILOSOPHER: I am sure it would be quite difficult for you to do such a thing.
YOUTH: After all that, are you saying one has to appeal to the emotions? To keep on holding the faith, like
a saint, and act on the conscience of the other person? You’re telling me that morals don’t matter to
Adler, but isn’t that exactly what we’re talking about here?
PHILOSOPHER: No, it is not. What would you say is the opposite of confidence?
YOUTH: An antonym of confidence? Uh . . .
PHILOSOPHER: It is doubt. Suppose you have placed “doubt” at the foundation of your interpersonal
relations. That you live your life doubting other people—doubting your friends and even your family
and those you love. What sort of relationship could possibly arise from that? The other person will detect
the doubt in your eyes in an instant. He or she will have an instinctive understanding that “this person
does not have confidence in me.” Do you think one would be able to build some kind of positive
relationship from that point? It is precisely because we lay a foundation of unconditional confidence that
it is possible for us to build a deep relationship.
YOUTH: Okay, I guess.
PHILOSOPHER: The way to understand Adlerian psychology is simple. Right now, you are thinking, If I
were to have confidence in someone unconditionally, I would just get taken advantage of. However, you
are not the one who decides whether or not to take advantage. That is the other person’s task. All you
need to do is think, What should I do? If you are telling yourself, I’ll give it to him if he isn’t going take
advantage of me, it is just a relationship of trust that is based on security or conditions.
YOUTH: So one separates tasks there, too?
PHILOSOPHER: Yes. As I have stated repeatedly, carrying out the separation of tasks returns life to an
astonishingly simple form. But while the principle of the separation of tasks is easy to grasp, putting it
into practice is difficult. I recognize that.
YOUTH: Then you are telling me to keep on having confidence in everyone, to keep on believing in all
other people even when they deceive me, and just go on being a naïve fool? That’s not philosophy or
psychology or anything of the sort—it’s just the preaching of a zealot!
PHILOSOPHER: I reject that definitively. Adlerian psychology is not saying “have confidence in others
unconditionally” on the basis of a moralistic system of values. Unconditional confidence is a means for
making your interpersonal relationship with a person better and for building a horizontal relationship. If
you do not have the desire to make your relationship with that person better, then go ahead and sever it.
Because carrying out the severing is your task.
YOUTH: Then what if I’ve placed unconditional confidence in a friend in order to make our relationship
better? I’ve jumped through all sorts of hoops for this friend, gladly satisfied any requests for money, and
been unstinting with my time and efforts in his regard. But even in such cases, there are times when one
is taken advantage of. For example, if one were horribly taken advantage of by a person one has believed
in completely, wouldn’t that experience lead one to a lifestyle with an “other people are my enemies”
outlook?
PHILOSOPHER: It seems that you have not yet gained an understanding of the goal of confidence.
Suppose, for example, that you are in a love relationship, but you are having doubts about your partner
and you think to yourself, I’ll bet she’s cheating on me. And you start making desperate efforts in search of
evidence to prove that. What do you think would happen as a result?
YOUTH: Well, I guess that would depend on the situation.
PHILOSOPHER: No, in every instance, you would find an abundance of evidence that she has been
cheating on you.
YOUTH: Wait? Why is that?
PHILOSOPHER: Your partner’s casual remarks, her tone when talking to someone on the phone, the times
when you can’t reach her . . . As long as you are looking with doubt in your eyes, everything around you
will appear to be evidence that she is cheating on you. Even if she is not.
YOUTH: Hmm.
PHILOSOPHER: Right now, you are only concerned about the times you were taken advantage of, and
nothing else. You focus only on the pain from the wounds you sustained on such occasions. But if you
are afraid to have confidence in others, in the long run you will not be able to build deep relationships
with anyone.
YOUTH: Well, I see what you’re getting at—the main objective, which is to build deep relationships. But
still, being taken advantage of is scary, and that’s the reality, isn’t it?
PHILOSOPHER: If it is a shallow relationship, when it falls apart the pain will be slight. And the joy that
relationship brings each day will also be slight. It is precisely because one can gain the courage to enter
into deeper relationships by having confidence in others that the joy of one’s interpersonal relations can
grow, and one’s joy in life can grow, too.
YOUTH: No! That’s not what I was talking about, you’re changing the subject again. The courage to
overcome the fear of being taken advantage of—where does it come from?
PHILOSOPHER: It comes from self-acceptance. If one can simply accept oneself as one is, and ascertain
what one can do and what one cannot, one becomes able to understand that “taking advantage” is the
other person’s task, and getting to the core of “confidence in others” becomes less difficult.
YOUTH: You’re saying that taking advantage of someone is the other person’s task, and one can’t do
anything about it? That I should be resigned, in an affirmative way? Your arguments always ignore our
emotions. What does one do about all the anger and sadness one feels when one is taken advantage of?
PHILOSOPHER: When one is sad, one should be sad to one’s heart’s content. It is precisely when one tries
to escape the pain and sadness that one gets stuck and ceases to be able to build deep relationships with
anyone. Think about it this way. We can believe. And we can doubt. But we are aspiring to see others as
our comrades. To believe or to doubt—the choice should be clear.
The Essence of Work Is a Contribution to the Common
Good
YOUTH: All right. Well, suppose I have managed to attain self-acceptance. And that I have attained
confidence in others, too. What kind of changes would there be in me then?
PHILOSOPHER: First, one accepts one’s irreplaceable “this me” just as it is. That is self-acceptance. Then,
one places unconditional confidence in other people. That is confidence in others. You can accept
yourself, and you can have confidence in others. So what are other people to you now?
YOUTH: My comrades?
PHILOSOPHER: Exactly. In effect, placing confidence in others is connected to seeing others as comrades.
It is because they are one’s comrades that one can have confidence in them. If they were not one’s
comrades, one would not be able to reach the level of confidence. And then, having other people as one’s
comrades connects to finding refuge in the community one belongs to. So one can gain the sense of
belonging, that “it’s okay to be here.”
YOUTH: In other words, you’re saying that to feel “it’s okay to be here,” one has to see others as comrades.
And that to see others as comrades, one needs both self-acceptance and confidence in others.
PHILOSOPHER: That’s right. You are grasping this more quickly now. To take it a step farther, one may say
that people who think of others as enemies have not attained self-acceptance and do not have enough
confidence in others.
YOUTH: All right. It is true that people seek the sense of belonging, that “it’s okay to be here.” And to get
that they need self-acceptance and confidence in others. I have no objection to that. But I don’t know.
Can one really gain a sense of belonging just by seeing others as comrades and having confidence in
them?
PHILOSOPHER: Of course, community feeling is not something that is attainable with just self-acceptance
and confidence in others. It is at this point that the third key concept—contribution to others—becomes
necessary.
YOUTH: Contribution to others?
PHILOSOPHER: Is to act, in some way, on one’s comrades. To attempt to contribute. That is “contribution
to others.”
YOUTH: So when you say “contribute,” you mean to show a spirit of self-sacrifice and to be of service to
those around you?
PHILOSOPHER: Contribution to others does not connote self-sacrifice. Adler goes so far as to warn that
those who sacrifice their own lives for others are people who have conformed to society too much. And
please do not forget: We are truly aware of our own worth only when we feel that our existence and
behavior are beneficial to the community, that is to say, when one feels “I am of use to someone.” Do
you remember this? In other words, contribution to others, rather than being about getting rid of the “I”
and being of service to someone, is actually something one does in order to be truly aware of the worth of
the “I.”
YOUTH: Contributing to others is for oneself?
PHILOSOPHER: Yes. There is no need to sacrifice the self.
YOUTH: Uh-oh, your argument is starting to crumble here, isn’t it? You’ve done a wonderful job of
digging your own grave. In order to satisfy the “I,” one makes oneself of service to others. Isn’t that the
very definition of hypocrisy? I said it before: Your entire argument is hypocritical. It’s a slippery
argument. Look, I would rather believe in the villain who is honest about his desires than the good guy
who tells a pack of lies.
PHILOSOPHER: Those are a lot of hasty conclusions. You do not understand community feeling yet.
YOUTH: Then I wish you would provide concrete examples of what you consider to be contribution to
others.
PHILOSOPHER: The most easily understood contribution to others is probably work. To be in society and
join the workforce. Or to do the work of taking care of one’s household. Labor is not a means of earning
money. It is through labor that one makes contributions to others and commits to one’s community, and
that one truly feels “I am of use to someone” and even comes to accept one’s existential worth.
YOUTH: You are saying that the essence of work is contribution to others?
PHILOSOPHER: Making money is a major factor too, of course. It is something akin to that Dostoevsky
quote you happened upon: “Money is coined freedom.” But there are people who have so much money
that they could never use it all. And many of these people are continually busy with their work. Why do
they work? Are they driven by boundless greed? No. They work so they are able to contribute to others,
and also to confirm their sense of belonging, their feeling that “it’s okay to be here.” Wealthy people who,
on having amassed a great fortune, focus their energies on charitable activities, are doing so in order to
attain a sense of their own worth and confirm for themselves that “it’s okay to be here.”
YOUTH: Hmm, I suppose that is one truth. But . . .
PHILOSOPHER: But what?
Self-acceptance: accepting one’s irreplaceable “this me” just as it is. Confidence in others: to place
unconditional confidence at the base of one’s interpersonal relations rather than seeding doubt.
The young man found these two concepts sufficiently convincing. Contribution to others,
however, was something he could not quite grasp. If that contribution is supposed to be “for other
people,” then it would have to be one of bitter self-sacrifice. On the other hand, if that contribution
is actually “for oneself,” then it’s the height of hypocrisy. This point has to be made utterly clear. In
a resolute tone of voice, the young man continued.
Young People Walk Ahead of Adults
YOUTH: I will acknowledge that work has aspects of contribution to others. But the logic that says that
officially one is contributing to others when, in actuality, one is doing it for oneself, is nothing other than
hypocrisy. How do you explain that?
PHILOSOPHER: Imagine the following kind of scene. It’s after dinner at home, and there are still dishes left
on the table. The children have gone off to their rooms, and the husband is sitting on the sofa watching
television. It’s been left to the wife (me) to do the dishes and clear everything up. To make matters worse,
the family takes that for granted, and they don’t make the slightest effort to help. In such a situation,
normally one would think, Why won’t they give me a hand? or Why do I have to do all the work? Even if I
do not hear the words “thank you” from my family while I am cleaning up, I want them to think that I
am of use to the family. Instead of thinking about what others can do for me, I want to think about, and
put into practice, what I can do for other people. Just by having that feeling of contribution, the reality
right in front of me will take on a completely different hue. In fact, if I am grumbling to myself as I wash
the dishes, I am probably not much fun to be around, so everyone just wants to keep their distance. On
the other hand, if I’m humming away to myself and washing the dishes in good spirits, the children might
come and give me a hand. At the very least, I’d be creating an atmosphere in which it is easier for them to
offer their help.
YOUTH: Well, that might be the case in that setting, anyway.
PHILOSOPHER: Now, how come I have a feeling of contribution in that setting? I have it because I am able
to think of the members of my family as comrades. If I cannot do that, inevitably there will be thoughts
running through my head like, Why am I the only one doing this? and Why won’t anyone give me a
hand? Contribution that is carried out while one is seeing other people as enemies may indeed lead to
hypocrisy. But if other people are one’s comrades, that should never happen, regardless of the
contributions one makes. You have been fixating on the word “hypocrisy” because you do not
understand community feeling yet.
YOUTH: Okay . . .
PHILOSOPHER: For the sake of convenience, up to this point I have discussed self-acceptance, confidence
in others, and contribution to others, in that order. However, these three are linked as an indispensable
whole, in a sort of circular structure. It is because one accepts oneself just as one is—one self-accepts—
that one can have “confidence in others” without the fear of being taken advantage of. And it is because
one can place unconditional confidence in others, and feel that people are one’s comrades, that one can
engage in “contribution to others.” Further, it is because one contributes to others that one can have the
deep awareness that “I am of use to someone” and accept oneself just as one is. One can self-accept. The
notes you took down the other day, do you have them with you?
YOUTH: Oh, you mean that note on the objectives put forward by Adlerian psychology? I’ve kept it on
me ever since that day, of course. Here it is: “The two objectives for behavior: to be self-reliant and to live
in harmony with society. The two objectives for the psychology that supports these behaviors: the
consciousness that I have the ability and the consciousness that people are my comrades.”
PHILOSOPHER: If you overlap the content of this note with what we have just been discussing, you should
be able to gain a deeper understanding. In other words, “to be self-reliant” and “the consciousness that I
have the ability” correspond to our discussion of self-acceptance. And then “to live in harmony with
society” and “the consciousness that people are my comrades” connect to confidence in others and then to
contribution to others.
YOUTH: I see. So the objective of life is community feeling. I think it will be some time before I can get
this clear in my head, though.
PHILOSOPHER: Yes, it probably will. As Adler himself said, “Understanding a human being is no easy
matter. Of all the forms of psychology, individual psychology is probably the most difficult to learn and
put into practice.”
YOUTH: That’s exactly right! Even if the theories are convincing, it’s hard to put them into practice.
PHILOSOPHER: It is even said that to truly understand Adlerian psychology and apply it to actually
changing one’s way of living, one needs “half the number of years one has lived.” In other words, if you
were to start studying it at the age of forty, it would take another twenty years, until you turned sixty. If
you were to start studying at the age of twenty, it would take ten years, until you turned thirty. You are
still young. Starting at such an early stage in life means that you might be able to change more quickly. In
the sense that you can change quickly, you are walking ahead of the adults of the world. To go about
changing yourself and making a new world, in a way you are ahead of me, too. It is okay to lose your way
or lose focus. Do not be dependent on vertical relationships or be afraid of being disliked, and just make
your way forward freely. If all the adults could see that young people were walking ahead of them, I am
sure the world would change dramatically.
YOUTH: I am walking ahead of you?
PHILOSOPHER: You certainly are. We walk on the same ground, and you are moving on ahead of me.
YOUTH: Ha-ha. You’re the first person I’ve ever met who would say such a thing to someone young
enough to be his son.
PHILOSOPHER: I would like more and more young people to learn about Adler’s thought. And I would
like more adults to learn about it, too. Because people can change, regardless of their ages.
Workaholism Is a Life-Lie
YOUTH: All right. I readily admit that I do not have the courage to take steps toward self-acceptance or
confidence in others. But is this really the fault only of the “I”? Isn’t it also actually a problem brought
about by other people, who accuse me unreasonably and attack me?
PHILOSOPHER: To be sure, not everyone in the world is a good and virtuous person. One goes through
any number of unpleasant experiences in one’s interpersonal relations. But there is something one must
not get wrong at this juncture: the fact that, in every instance, it is “that person” who attacks you who has
the problem, and it is certainly not the case that everyone is bad. People with neurotic lifestyles tend to
sprinkle their speech with such words as “everyone” and “always” and “everything.” “Everyone hates me,”
they will say, or “It’s always me who takes a loss,” or “Everything is wrong.” If you think you might be in
the habit of using such generalizing statements, you should be careful.
YOUTH: Well, that does sound rather familiar.
PHILOSOPHER: In Adlerian psychology, we think of this as a way of living that is lacking in “harmony of
life.” It is a way of living in which one sees only a part of things but judges the whole.
YOUTH: Harmony of life?
PHILOSOPHER: In the teachings of Judaism, one finds the following anecdote: “If there are ten people, one
will be someone who criticizes you no matter what you do. This person will come to dislike you, and you
will not learn to like him either. Then, there will be two others who accept everything about you and
whom you accept too, and you will become close friends with them. The remaining seven people will be
neither of these types.” Now, do you focus on the one person who dislikes you? Do you pay more
attention to the two who love you? Or would you focus on the crowd, the other seven? A person who is
lacking in harmony of life will see only the one person he dislikes and will make a judgment of the world
from that.
YOUTH: Intriguing.
PHILOSOPHER: Some time ago, I participated in a workshop for people who stammer and their families.
Do you know anyone who has a stammer?
YOUTH: Yes, there was a student at the school I went to who stuttered. That must be hard to deal with,
both for the person who has it and for his family, too.
PHILOSOPHER: Why is stammering hard to deal with? The view in Adlerian psychology is that people who
suffer from stammering are concerned only about their own way of speaking, and they have feelings of
inferiority and see their lives as unbearably hard. And they become too self-conscious as a result and start
tripping over their words more and more.
YOUTH: They are concerned only about their own way of speaking?
PHILOSOPHER: That’s right. There are not many people who will laugh at or make fun of someone when
he trips over his words now and then. To use the example I just mentioned, it would probably be no
more than one person in ten, at most. In any case, with the sort of foolish person who would take such an
attitude, it is best to simply sever the relationship. But if one is lacking in harmony of life, one will focus
only on that person and end up thinking, Everyone is laughing at me.
YOUTH: But that’s just human nature!
PHILOSOPHER: I have a reading group that meets on a regular basis, and one of the participants has a
stammer. It comes out sometimes when it’s his turn to read. But not a single person there is the sort who
would laugh at him for that. Everyone just sits quietly and waits in a quite natural way for the next words
to come out. I am sure this is not a phenomenon that is isolated to my reading group. When one’s
interpersonal relations do not go well, it cannot be blamed on a stammer or a fear of blushing or
anything of the sort. Even though the problem is really that one has not attained self-acceptance or
confidence in others, or contribution to others, for that matter, one is focusing on only one tiny part of
things that simply should not matter and from that trying to form judgments with regard to the entire
world. This is a misguided lifestyle that is lacking in harmony of life.
YOUTH: Did you actually convey such a harsh idea to people who suffer from stammering?
PHILOSOPHER: Of course. At first, there were some adverse reactions, but by the end of the three-day
workshop, everyone was in deep agreement with it.
YOUTH: It certainly is a fascinating argument. But focusing on people who suffer from stammering seems
like a rather special example. Could you give me any others?
PHILOSOPHER: Well, another would be the workaholic. This, too, is an example of a person who is clearly
lacking in harmony of life.
YOUTH: A workaholic is? Why is that?
PHILOSOPHER: People who suffer from stammering are looking at only a part of things but judging the
whole. With workaholics, the focus is solely on one specific aspect of life.
They probably try to justify that by saying, “It’s busy at work, so I don’t have enough time to think
about my family.” But this is a life-lie. They are simply trying to avoid their other responsibilities by using
work as an excuse. One ought to concern oneself with everything, from household chores and childrearing
to one’s friendships and hobbies and so on. Adler does not recognize ways of living in which
certain aspects are unusually dominant.
YOUTH: Ah . . . That’s exactly the sort of person my father was. It was just: Be a workaholic, bury yourself
in your work, and produce results. And then rule over the family on the grounds that you are the
breadwinner. He was a very feudalistic person.
PHILOSOPHER: In a sense, that is a way of living of refusing to acknowledge one’s life tasks. “Work” does
not mean having a job at a company. Work in the home, child-rearing, contributing to the local society,
hobbies, and all manner of other things are work. Companies and such are just one small part of that. A
way of living that acknowledges only company work is one that is lacking in harmony of life.
YOUTH: It’s exactly as you say! And it’s not as if the family he’s supporting has any say in the matter,
either. You can’t argue with your father when he growls with a violent tone of voice, “It’s thanks to me
that there’s food on the table.”
PHILOSOPHER: Such a father has probably been able to recognize his own worth only on the level of acts.
He works all those hours, brings in enough money to support a family, and is recognized by society—
and, on that basis, he views himself as having greater worth than the other members of his family. For
each and every one of us, however, there comes a time when one can no longer serve as the provider.
When one gets older and reaches retirement age, for example, one may have no choice but to live off
one’s pension or support from one’s children. Even when one is young, injury or poor health can lead to
being unable work any longer. On such occasions, those who can accept themselves only on the level of
acts are severely damaged.
YOUTH: You mean those people whose lifestyle is all about work?
PHILOSOPHER: Yes. People whose lives lack harmony.
YOUTH: In that case, I think I’m starting to get what you mean by the level of being, which you brought
up last time. And I certainly haven’t given much thought to the fact that someday I won’t be able to
work any longer or do anything on the level of acts.
PHILOSOPHER: Does one accept oneself on the level of acts, or on the level of being? This is truly a
question that relates to the courage to be happy.
You Can Be Happy Now
YOUTH: The courage to be happy. Well, let’s hear what kind of courage that should be.
PHILOSOPHER: Yes, that is an important point.
YOUTH: You say that all problems are interpersonal relationship problems. And then you turn that
around and say that our happiness is to be found in our interpersonal relations, too. But I still find these
aspects hard to accept. Is what human beings call happiness merely something within our good
interpersonal relations? That is to say, do our lives exist for such minuscule repose and joy?
PHILOSOPHER: I have a good idea of the issues you are grappling with. The first time I attended a lecture
on Adlerian psychology, the lecturer, Oscar Christensen, who was a disciple of one of Adler’s disciples,
made the following statement: “Those who hear my talk today can be happy right now, this very instant.
But those who do not will never be able to be happy.”
YOUTH: Wow! That’s straight from the mouth of a con man. You’re not telling me you fell for that, are
you?
PHILOSOPHER: What is happiness to human beings? This is a subject that has been one of the consistent
threads of philosophy since ancient times. I had always regarded psychology as nothing more than a field
of philosophy, and as such had very little interest in psychology as a whole. So it was as a student of
philosophy that I had concerned myself, in my own way, with the question: What is happiness? I would
be remiss if I did not admit to having felt some reluctance on hearing Christensen’s words. However, at
the same time that I experienced that reluctance, I realized something. I had given much deep thought to
the true character of happiness. I had searched for answers. But I had not always given deep thought to
the question: How can one be happy? It occurred to me then that even though I was a student of
philosophy, maybe I wasn’t happy.
YOUTH: I see. So your first encounter with Adlerian psychology began with a feeling of incongruity?
PHILOSOPHER: That’s right.
YOUTH: Then, please tell me: Did you eventually become happy?
PHILOSOPHER: Of course.
YOUTH: How can you be so sure?
PHILOSOPHER: For a human being, the greatest unhappiness is not being able to like oneself. Adler came
up with an extremely simple answer to address this reality. Namely, that the feeling of “I am beneficial to
the community” or “I am of use to someone” is the only thing that can give one a true awareness that one
has worth.
YOUTH: Do you mean the “contribution to others” you mentioned earlier?
PHILOSOPHER: Yes. And this is an important point: When we speak of contribution to others, it doesn’t
matter if the contribution is not a visible one.
YOUTH: It doesn’t matter if the contribution is not a visible one?
PHILOSOPHER: You are not the one who decides if your contributions are of use. That is the task of other
people, and is not an issue in which you can intervene. In principle, there is not even any way you can
know whether you have really made a contribution. That is to say, when we are engaging in this
contribution to others, the contribution does not have to be a visible one—all we need is the subjective
sense that “I am of use to someone,” or in other words, a feeling of contribution.
YOUTH: Wait a minute! If that’s the case, then what you are calling happiness is . . .
PHILOSOPHER: Do you see it now? In a word, happiness is the feeling of contribution. That is the
definition of happiness.
YOUTH: But . . . but that’s . . .
PHILOSOPHER: Is something wrong?
YOUTH: There’s no way I can accept such a simplistic definition. Look, I’m not forgetting what you told
me before. You said that even though on the level of acts, one might not be of use to anyone, on the level
of being, every person is of use. But if that’s the case, according to your logic, all human beings would be
happy!
PHILOSOPHER: All human beings can be happy. But it must be understood that this does not mean all
human beings are happy. Whether it is on the level of acts or on the level of being, one needs to feel that
one is of use to someone. That is to say, one needs a feeling of contribution.
YOUTH: So you are saying that the reason I am not happy is that I don’t have a feeling of contribution?
PHILOSOPHER: That is correct.
YOUTH: Then how can I get a feeling of contribution? By working? Through volunteer activities?
PHILOSOPHER: Earlier, we were talking about desire for recognition. In response to my statement that one
must not seek recognition, you said that desire for recognition is a universal desire.
YOUTH: Yes, I did. But honestly, I’m still not entirely certain about this point.
PHILOSOPHER: But I am sure that the reason people seek recognition is clear to you now. People want to
like themselves. They want to feel that they have worth. In order to feel that, they want a feeling of
contribution that tells them “I am of use to someone.” And they seek recognition from others as an easy
means for gaining that feeling of contribution.
YOUTH: You are saying that desire for recognition is a means for gaining a feeling of contribution?
PHILOSOPHER: Isn’t it so?
YOUTH: No way. That contradicts everything you’ve been saying until now. Because isn’t receiving
recognition from others supposed to be a means for gaining a feeling of contribution? And then you say,
“Happiness is the feeling of contribution.” If it is, then fulfilling one’s desire for recognition is directly
linked with happiness, isn’t it? Ha-ha! At last, you’ve acknowledged the necessity of the desire for
recognition.
PHILOSOPHER: You are forgetting an important issue. If one’s means for gaining a feeling of contribution
turns out to be “being recognized by others,” in the long run, one will have no choice but to walk
through life in accordance with other people’s wishes. There is no freedom in a feeling of contribution
that is gained through the desire for recognition. We are beings who choose freedom while aspiring to
happiness.
YOUTH: So one can have happiness only if one has freedom?
PHILOSOPHER: Yes. Freedom as an institution may differ depending on the country, the times, or the
culture. But freedom in our interpersonal relations is universal.
YOUTH: There’s no way that you will acknowledge the desire for recognition?
PHILOSOPHER: If one really has a feeling of contribution, one will no longer have any need for
recognition from others. Because one will already have the real awareness that “I am of use to someone,”
without needing to go out of one’s way to be acknowledged by others. In other words, a person who is
obsessed with the desire for recognition does not have any community feeling yet, and has not managed
to engage in self-acceptance, confidence in others, or contribution to others.
YOUTH: So if one just has community feeling, the desire for recognition will disappear?
PHILOSOPHER: Yes, it will disappear. There is no need for recognition from others.
The philosopher’s points could be summed up as follows: People can be truly aware of their
worth only when they are able to feel “I am of use to someone.” However, it doesn’t matter if the
contribution one makes at such a time is without any visible form. It is enough to have the
subjective sense of being of use to someone, that is to say, a feeling of contribution. And then the
philosopher arrives at the following conclusion: Happiness is the feeling of contribution. There
certainly seemed to be aspects of the truth there. But is that really all that happiness is? Not if it’s
the happiness I’m searching for!
Two Paths Traveled by Those Wanting to Be “Special
Beings”
YOUTH: You still have not answered my question. Maybe I could actually learn to like myself through
contribution to others. Maybe I could come to feel that I have worth, that I am not a worthless being.
But is that all a person needs to be happy? Having come into this world, I think that unless I am able to
accomplish the sort of grand undertaking that future generations will remember me for, unless I can
prove myself as “I, who am no one else but me,” I will never find true happiness. You are trying to frame
everything within interpersonal relations without saying a thing about self-realizing happiness. If you ask
me, that’s nothing but evasion!
PHILOSOPHER: I’m not really sure what you mean by “self-realizing happiness.” What exactly are you
referring to?
YOUTH: It’s something that is different for each person. I suppose there are those who want to succeed in
society and those who have more personal objectives—a researcher endeavoring to develop a wonder
drug, for instance, or an artist who strives to create a satisfying body of work.
PHILOSOPHER: What is it for you?
YOUTH: I still don’t really know what I am looking for or what I’ll want to do in the future. But I know
that I’ve got to do something. There’s no way I’m going to spend the rest of my days working in a
university library. When I find a dream that I can devote my life to, and I attain self-realization, that’s
when I’ll experience true happiness. My father was someone who buried himself in his work from day to
night, and I have no idea if that was happiness to him or not. To my eyes, at least, he seemed forever busy
and never happy. That is not the kind of life I want to lead.
PHILOSOPHER: All right. If you think about this point using children who engage in problem behavior as
an example, it might be easier to grasp.
YOUTH: Problem behavior?
PHILOSOPHER: That’s right. First of all, we human beings have a universal desire that is referred to as
“pursuit of superiority.” Do you recall our discussion of this?
YOUTH: Yes. Simply put, it’s a term that indicates “hoping to improve” and “pursuing an ideal state.”
PHILOSOPHER: There are many children who, in their early stages, try to be especially good. In particular,
they obey their parents, comport themselves in a socially acceptable manner, apply themselves
assiduously to their studies and in sports, and excel in extracurricular activities as well. In this way, they
try to get their parents to acknowledge them. However, when being especially good does not work out—
their studies or sports don’t go well, for example—they do an about-face and try to be especially bad.
YOUTH: Why do they do that?
PHILOSOPHER: Whether they are trying to be especially good, or trying to be especially bad, the goal is the
same: to attract the attention of other people, get out of the “normal” condition and become a “special
being.” That is their only goal.
YOUTH: Hmm. All right, please go on.
PHILOSOPHER: In any case, whether it is one’s studies or one’s participation in sports, either way one
needs to make a constant effort if one is to produce any kind of significant results. But the children who
try to be especially bad—that is to say, the ones who engage in problem behavior—are endeavoring to
attract the attention of other people even as they continue to avoid any such healthy effort. In Adlerian
psychology, this is referred to as the “pursuit of easy superiority.” Take, for example, the problem child
who disrupts lessons by throwing erasers or speaking in a loud voice. He is certain to get the attention of
his friends and teachers. Even if it is something that is limited to that place, he will probably succeed in
becoming a special being. But that is a pursuit of easy superiority, and it is an unhealthy attitude.
YOUTH: So children who commit delinquent acts are engaging in the pursuit of easy superiority, too?
PHILOSOPHER: Yes, they are. All types of problem behavior, from refusing to attend school, to wrist
cutting, to underage drinking and smoking, and so on, are forms of the pursuit of easy superiority. And
your shut-in friend, whom you told me about at the beginning, is engaging in it, too. When a child
engages in problem behavior, his parents and other adults rebuke him. Being rebuked, more than
anything else, puts stress on the child. But even if it is in the form of rebuke, the child wants his parents’
attention. He wants to be a special being, and the form that attention takes doesn’t matter. So in a sense,
it is only natural that he does not stop engaging in problem behavior, no matter how harshly he is
rebuked.
YOUTH: It’s because of their rebuking that he doesn’t stop the problem behavior?
PHILOSOPHER: Exactly. Because the parents and other adults are giving him attention through the act of
rebuking.
YOUTH: But previously, you spoke of the goal of problem behavior as being revenge on the parents, right?
Does that connect with this in some way?
PHILOSOPHER: Yes. “Revenge” and “pursuit of easy superiority” are easily linked. One makes trouble for
another person while trying at the same time to be “special.”
The Courage to Be Normal
YOUTH: But how . . . ? It would be impossible for all human beings to be especially good, or anything like
that, wouldn’t it? No matter what, people have their strengths and weaknesses, and there will always be
differences. There’s only a handful of geniuses in the world, and not everyone is cut out to be an honors
student. So for all the losers, there’s nothing for it besides being especially bad.
PHILOSOPHER: Yes, it’s that Socratic paradox, that no one desires evil. Because to children who engage in
problem behavior, even violent acts and theft are accomplishments of “good.”
YOUTH: But that’s horrible! That’s a line of reasoning with no way out.
PHILOSOPHER: What Adlerian psychology emphasizes at this juncture are the words “the courage to be
normal.”
YOUTH: The courage to be normal?
PHILOSOPHER: Why is it necessary to be special? Probably because one cannot accept one’s normal self.
And it is precisely for this reason that when being especially good becomes a lost cause, one makes the
huge leap to being especially bad—the opposite extreme. But is being normal, being ordinary, really such
a bad thing? Is it something inferior? Or, in truth, isn’t everybody normal? It is necessary to think this
through to its logical conclusion.
YOUTH: So are you saying that I should be normal?
PHILOSOPHER: Self-acceptance is the vital first step. If you are able to possess the courage to be normal,
your way of looking at the world will change dramatically.
YOUTH: But . . .
PHILOSOPHER: You are probably rejecting normality because you equate being normal with being
incapable. Being normal is not being incapable. One does not need to flaunt one’s superiority.
YOUTH: Fine, I acknowledge the danger of aiming to be special. But does one really need to make the
deliberate choice to be normal? If I pass my time in this world in an utterly humdrum way, if I lead a
pointless life without leaving any record or memory of my existence whatsoever, am I to just be satisfied
with my lot, because that’s the sort of human being I am? You’ve got to be joking. I’d abandon such a life
in a second!
PHILOSOPHER: You want to be special, no matter what?
YOUTH: No! Look, accepting what you call “normal” would lead to me having to affirm my idle self! It
would just be saying, “This is all I am capable of and that’s fine.” I refuse to accept such an idle way of
life. Do you think that Napoleon or Alexander the Great or Einstein or Martin Luther King accepted
“normal”? And how about Socrates and Plato? Not a chance! More than likely, they all lived their lives
while carrying the torch of a great ideal or objective. Another Napoleon could never emerge with your
line of reasoning. You are trying to rid the world of geniuses!
PHILOSOPHER: So what you are saying is that one needs lofty goals in life.
YOUTH: But that’s obvious!
“The courage to be normal”—what truly dreadful words. Are Adler and this philosopher really
telling me to choose such a path? To go about my life as just another soul among the utterly
ordinary, faceless masses? I’m no genius, of course. Maybe “normal” is the only choice I have.
Maybe I will just have to accept my mediocre self and surrender to leading a mediocre, everyday
existence. But I will fight it. Whatever happens, I will oppose this man to the bitter end. We seem to
be approaching the heart of our discussion. The young man’s pulse was racing, and despite the
wintry chill in the air, his clenched fists shone with sweat.
Life Is a Series of Moments
PHILOSOPHER: All right. When you speak of lofty goals, I am guessing that you have an image of
something like a mountain climber aiming for the top.
YOUTH: Yes, that’s right. People, myself included, aim for the top of the mountain.
PHILOSOPHER: But if life were climbing a mountain in order to reach the top, then the greater part of life
would end up being “en route.” That is to say, one’s “real life” would begin with one’s trek on the
mountainside, and the distance one has traveled up until that point would be a “tentative life” led by a
“tentative me.”
YOUTH: I guess that’s one way of putting it. The way I am now, I am definitely an “en route” person.
PHILOSOPHER: Now, suppose you didn’t make it to the mountaintop, what would that mean for your
life? With accidents and diseases and the like, people don’t always make it all the way, and mountain
climbing itself is fraught with pitfalls and often ends in failure. So one’s life would be interrupted “en
route,” with just this “tentative me” leading a “tentative life.” What kind of life would that be?
YOUTH: That’s . . . Well, that’d be a case of getting one’s just deserts. So I didn’t have the ability, or I
didn’t have the physical strength to climb a mountain, or I wasn’t lucky, or I lacked the skill—that’s all!
Yes, that is a reality I am prepared to accept.
PHILOSOPHER: Adlerian psychology has a different standpoint. People who think of life as being like
climbing a mountain are treating their own existences as lines. As if there is a line that started the instant
one came into this world, and that continues in all manner of curves of varying sizes until it arrives at the
summit, and then at long last reaches its terminus, which is death. This conception, which treats life as a
kind of story, is an idea that links with Freudian etiology (the attributing of causes), and is a way of
thinking that makes the greater part of life into something that is “en route.”
YOUTH: Well, what is your image of life?
PHILOSOPHER: Do not treat it as a line. Think of life as a series of dots. If you look through a magnifying
glass at a solid line drawn with chalk, you will discover that what you thought was a line is actually a series
of small dots. Seemingly linear existence is actually a series of dots; in other words, life is a series of
moments.
YOUTH: A series of moments?
PHILOSOPHER: Yes. It is a series of moments called “now.” We can live only in the here and now. Our
lives exist only in moments. Adults who do not know this attempt to impose “linear” lives onto young
people. Their thinking is that staying on the conventional tracks—good university, big company, stable
household—is a happy life. But life is not made up of lines or anything like that.
YOUTH: So there’s no need for life planning or career planning?
PHILOSOPHER: If life were a line, then life planning would be possible. But our lives are only a series of
dots. A well-planned life is not something to be treated as necessary or unnecessary, as it is impossible.
YOUTH: Oh, nonsense! What an absurd idea!
Live Like You’re Dancing
PHILOSOPHER: What is wrong with it?
YOUTH: Your argument not only denies the making of plans in life, it goes as far as to deny even making
efforts. Take, for example, the life of someone who has dreamed of being a violinist ever since childhood,
and who, after years of strict training, has at long last become an active member in a celebrated orchestra.
Or another life, one of intensive studies that successfully leads to the passing of the bar examination and
becoming a lawyer. Neither of these lives would be possible without objectives and plans.
PHILOSOPHER: So in other words, like mountain climbers aiming to reach the mountaintop, they have
persevered on their paths?
YOUTH: Of course!
PHILOSOPHER: But is that really the case? Isn’t it that these people have lived each and every instant of
their lives here and now? That is to say, rather than living lives that are “en route,” they are always living
here and now. For example, the person who had dreams of becoming a violinist was always looking at
pieces of music, and concentrating on each piece, and on each and every measure and note.
YOUTH: Would they attain their objectives that way?
PHILOSOPHER: Think of it this way: Life is a series of moments, which one lives as if one were dancing,
right now, around and around each passing instant. And when one happens to survey one’s
surroundings, one realizes, I guess I’ve made it this far. Among those who have danced the dance of the
violin, there are people who stay the course and become professional musicians. Among those who have
danced the dance of the bar examination, there are people who become lawyers. There are people who
have danced the dance of writing and become authors. Of course, it also happens that people end up in
entirely different places. But none of these lives came to an end “en route.” It is enough if one finds
fulfillment in the here and now one is dancing.
YOUTH: It’s enough if one can dance in the now?
PHILOSOPHER: Yes. With dance, it is the dancing itself that is the goal, and no one is concerned with
arriving somewhere by doing it. Naturally, it may happen that one arrives somewhere as a result of
having danced. Since one is dancing, one does not stay in the same place. But there is no destination.
YOUTH: A life without a destination, who ever heard of such a thing? Who would acknowledge such an
unsteady life, that bends whichever way the wind blows?
PHILOSOPHER: The kind of life that you speak of, which tries to reach a destination, may be termed a
“kinetic (dynamic) life.” By contrast, the kind of dancing life I am talking about could be called an
“energeial (actual-active-state) life.”
YOUTH: Kinetic? Energeial?
PHILOSOPHER: Let’s refer to Aristotle’s explanation. Ordinary motion—which is referred to as kinesis—
has a starting point and an end point. The movement from the starting point to the end point is optimal
if it is carried out as efficiently and as quickly as possible. If one can take an express train, there is no need
to ride the local one that makes every stop.
YOUTH: In other words, if one’s destination is to become a lawyer, it’s best to get there as quickly and as
efficiently as one can.
PHILOSOPHER: Yes. And the road one takes to get to that destination is, in the sense that one’s goal has not
yet been reached, incomplete. This is kinetic life.
YOUTH: Because it’s halfway?
PHILOSOPHER: That’s right. Energeia, on the other hand, is a kind of movement in which what is “now
forming” is what “has been formed.”
YOUTH: What is “now forming” is what “has been formed”?
PHILOSOPHER: One might also think of it as movement in which the process itself is treated as the
outcome. Dance is like that, and so is a journey.
YOUTH: Ah, I’m getting confused . . . What is this about a journey?
PHILOSOPHER: What kind of goal is the act of going on a journey? Suppose you are going on a journey to
Egypt. Would you try to arrive at the Great Pyramid of Giza as efficiently and quickly as possible, and
then head straight back home by the shortest route? One would not call that a “journey.” You should be
on a journey the moment you step outside your home, and all the moments on the way to your
destination should be a journey. Of course, there might be circumstances that prevent you from making
it to the pyramid, but that does not mean you didn’t go on a journey. This is “energeial life.”
YOUTH: I guess I’m just not getting this. Weren’t you refuting the kind of value system of aiming for the
mountaintop? What happens if you liken energeial life to mountain climbing?
PHILOSOPHER: If the goal of climbing a mountain were to get to the top, that would be a kinetic act. To
take it to the extreme, it wouldn’t matter if you went to the mountaintop in a helicopter, stayed there for
five minutes or so, and then headed back in the helicopter again. Of course, if you didn’t make it to the
mountaintop, that would mean the mountain-climbing expedition was a failure. However, if the goal is
mountain climbing itself, and not just getting to the top, one could say it is energeial. In this case, in the
end it doesn’t matter whether one makes it to the mountaintop or not.
YOUTH: That sort of argument is just ridiculous! You’ve fallen into a completely self-defeating
contradiction. Before you lose face before the whole wide world, I’ll cut through your shameless
nonsense, once and for all.
PHILOSOPHER: Oh, I’d be much obliged.
Shine a Light on the Here and Now
YOUTH: Look, in your refutation of etiology, you rejected focusing on the past. You said that the past
does not exist, and that it has no meaning. I acknowledge those points. It is true that one cannot change
the past. If there is something that can be changed, it is the future. But now, by advocating this energeial
way of living, you are refuting planning; that is to say, you are rejecting even changing one’s future of
one’s own volition. So while you reject looking back, you are rejecting looking forward, too. It’s like
you’re telling me to just walk blindfolded along a pathless path.
PHILOSOPHER: You can see neither behind you nor in front of you?
YOUTH: That’s right, I can’t see!
PHILOSOPHER: Isn’t that only natural? Where is the problem here?
YOUTH: What? What are you talking about?
PHILOSOPHER: Imagine that you are standing on a theater stage. If the house lights are on, you’ll probably
be able to see all the way to the back of the hall. But if you’re under a bright spotlight, you won’t be able
to make out even the front row. That’s exactly how it is with our lives. It’s because we cast a dim light on
our entire lives that we are able to see the past and the future. Or at least we imagine we can. But if one is
shining a bright spotlight on here and now, one cannot see the past or the future anymore.
YOUTH: A bright spotlight?
PHILOSOPHER: Yes. We should live more earnestly only here and now. The fact that you think you can see
the past, or predict the future, is proof that rather than living earnestly here and now, you are living in a
dim twilight. Life is a series of moments, and neither the past nor the future exists. You are trying to give
yourself a way out by focusing on the past and the future. What happened in the past has nothing
whatsoever to do with your here and now, and what the future may hold is not a matter to think about
here and now. If you are living earnestly here and now, you will not be concerned with such things.
YOUTH: But . . .
PHILOSOPHER: When one adopts the point of view of Freudian etiology, one sees life as a kind of great big
story based on cause and effect. So then it’s all about where and when I was born, what my childhood was
like, the school I attended and the company where I got a job. And that decides who I am now and who I
will become. To be sure, likening one’s life to a story is probably an entertaining job. The problem is, one
can see the dimness that lies ahead at the end of the story. Moreover, one will try to lead a life that is in
line with that story. And then one says, “My life is such-and-such, so I have no choice but to live this way,
and it’s not because of me—it’s my past, it’s the environment,” and so on. But bringing up the past here
is nothing but a way out, a life-lie. However, life is a series of dots, a series of moments. If you can grasp
that, you will not need a story any longer.
YOUTH: If you put it that way, the lifestyle that Adler is advocating is a kind of story, too.
PHILOSOPHER: Lifestyle is about here and now, and is something that one can change of one’s own
volition. The life of the past that looks like a straight line appears that way to you only as a result of your
making ceaseless resolutions to not change. The life that lies ahead of you is a completely blank page, and
there are no tracks that have been laid for you to follow. There is no story there.
YOUTH: But that’s just living for the moment. Or worse, a vicious hedonism!
PHILOSOPHER: No. To shine a spotlight on here and now is to go about doing what one can do now,
earnestly and conscientiously.
The Greatest Life-Lie
YOUTH: To live earnestly and conscientiously?
PHILOSOPHER: For example, one wants to get into a university but makes no attempt to study. This an
attitude of not living earnestly here and now. Of course, maybe the entrance examination is still far off.
Maybe one is not sure what needs to be studied or how thoroughly, and one finds it troublesome.
However, it is enough to do it little by little—every day one can work out some mathematical formulas,
one can memorize some words. In short, one can dance the dance. By doing so, one is sure to have a
sense of “this is what I did today”; this is what today, this single day, was for. Clearly, today is not for an
entrance examination in the distant future. And the same thing would hold true for your father, too—he
was likely dancing earnestly the dance of his everyday work. He lived earnestly here and now, without
having a grand objective or the need to achieve that objective. And, if that was the case, it would seem
that your father’s life was a happy one.
YOUTH: Are you telling me to affirm that way of living? That I should accept my father’s constantly
work-burdened existence . . . ?
PHILOSOPHER: There is no need to make yourself affirm it. Only instead of seeing his life as a line that he
reached, start seeing how he lived it, see the moments of his life.
YOUTH: The moments.
PHILOSOPHER: And the same may be said with regard to your own life. You set objectives for the distant
future, and think of now as your preparatory period. You think, I really want to do this, and I’ll do it
when the time comes. This is a way of living that postpones life. As long as we postpone life, we can never
go anywhere and will pass our days only one after the next in dull monotony, because we think of here
and now as just a preparatory period, as a time for patience. But a “here and now” in which one is
studying for an entrance examination in the distant future, for example, is the real thing.
YOUTH: Okay, I’ll accept that. I can certainly accept living earnestly here and now, and not setting up
some fabricated line. But I don’t have any dreams or objectives in my life. I don’t know what dance to
do. My here and now is nothing but utterly useless moments.
PHILOSOPHER: Not having objectives or the like is fine. Living earnestly here and now is itself a dance.
One must not get too serious. Please do not confuse being earnest with being too serious.
YOUTH: Be earnest but not too serious.
PHILOSOPHER: That’s right. Life is always simple, not something that one needs to get too serious about.
If one is living each moment earnestly, there is no need to get too serious.
And there is another thing I would like you to keep in mind: When one has adopted an energeial
viewpoint, life is always complete.
YOUTH: It’s complete?
PHILOSOPHER: If your life, or mine, for that matter, were to come to an end here and now, it would not
do to refer to either of them as unhappy. The life that ends at the age of twenty and the life that ends at
ninety are both complete lives, and lives of happiness.
YOUTH: So if I have lived earnestly here and now, those moments will always be complete?
PHILOSOPHER: Exactly. Now, I have used the word “life-lie” again and again throughout our discussion. I
would like to conclude by talking about the greatest life-lie of all.
YOUTH: Please do.
PHILOSOPHER: The greatest life-lie of all is to not live here and now. It is to look at the past and the future,
cast a dim light on one’s entire life, and believe that one has been able to see something. Until now, you
have turned away from the here and now and shone a light only on invented pasts and futures. You have
told a great lie to your life, to these irreplaceable moments.
YOUTH: Oh, okay!
PHILOSOPHER: So cast away the life-lie and fearlessly shine a bright spotlight on here and now. That is
something you can do.
YOUTH: That is something I can do? Do you think I have in me the courage to live out these moments
earnestly, without resorting to the life-lie?
PHILOSOPHER: Since neither the past nor the future exists, let’s talk about now. It’s not yesterday or
tomorrow that decides it. It’s here and now.
Give Meaning to Seemingly Meaningless Life
YOUTH: What are you saying?
PHILOSOPHER: I think this discussion has now reached the water’s edge. Whether you drink the water or
not is entirely up to you.
YOUTH: Ah, maybe Adlerian psychology, and your philosophy, are actually changing me. Maybe I am
trying to let go of my resolve not to change, and choose a new way of living, a new lifestyle . . . But wait,
there is one last thing I’d like to ask.
PHILOSOPHER: And what would that be?
YOUTH: When life is taken as a series of moments, as existing only here and now, what meaning could it
possibly have? For what was I born, and for what am I enduring this life of hardship until I reach my last
gasp? The point of it all is beyond me.
PHILOSOPHER: What is the meaning of life? What are people living for? When someone posed these
questions to Adler, this was his answer: “Life in general has no meaning.”
YOUTH: Life is meaningless?
PHILOSOPHER: The world in which we live is constantly beset by all manner of horrendous events, and we
exist with the ravages of war and natural disasters all around us. When confronted by the fact of children
dying in the turmoil of war, there is no way one can go on about the meaning of life. In other words,
there is no meaning in using generalizations to talk about life. But being confronted by such
incomprehensible tragedies without taking any action is tantamount to affirming them. Regardless of the
circumstances, we must take some form of action. We must stand up to Kant’s “inclination.”
YOUTH: Yes!
PHILOSOPHER: Now, suppose one experiences a major natural disaster, and one’s response is to look back
at the past in an etiological manner and say, “What could have caused such a thing to happen?” How
meaningful would that be? An experience of hardship should be an opportunity to look ahead and think,
What can I do from now on?
YOUTH: I agree entirely!
PHILOSOPHER: And Adler, having stated that “life in general has no meaning,” then continues, “Whatever
meaning life has must be assigned to it by the individual.”
YOUTH: Assigned to it by the individual? What does that mean?
PHILOSOPHER: During the war, my grandfather was firebombed, and his face was severely burned. In
every way, it was a horrendous and inhumane event. It would certainly have been within the realm of
possibility for him to choose a lifestyle with the perspective of “the world is a horrible place” or “people
are my enemies.” However, when my grandfather rode the train on visits to the hospital, there were
always other passengers who would give up their seats for him. This is something I heard about through
my mother, so I do not know how he actually felt. But this is what I believe: My grandfather chose a
lifestyle with the perspective of “People are my comrades, and the world is a wonderful place.” That is
exactly what Adler is pointing to when he says whatever meaning life has must be assigned to it by the
individual. So life in general has no meaning whatsoever. But you can assign meaning to that life. And
you are the only one who can assign meaning to your life.
YOUTH: Then, please tell me! How can I assign proper meaning to a meaningless life? I do not have the
confidence yet!
PHILOSOPHER: You are lost in your life. Why are you lost? You are lost because you are trying to choose
freedom, that is to say, a path on which you are not afraid of being disliked by others and you are not
living others’ lives—a path that is yours alone.
YOUTH: That’s right! I want to choose happiness, and choose freedom!
PHILOSOPHER: When one attempts to choose freedom, it is only natural that one may lose one’s way. At
this juncture, Adlerian psychology holds up a “guiding star” as a grand compass pointing to a life of
freedom.
YOUTH: A guiding star?
PHILOSOPHER: Just like the traveler who relies on the North Star, in our lives we need a guiding star. That
is the Adlerian psychology way of thinking. It is an expansive ideal that says, as long as we do not lose
sight of this compass and keep on moving in this direction, there is happiness.
YOUTH: Where is that star?
PHILOSOPHER: It is contribution to others.
YOUTH: Huh? Contribution to others!
PHILOSOPHER: No matter what moments you are living, or if there are people who dislike you, as long as
you do not lose sight of the guiding star of “I contribute to others,” you will not lose your way, and you
can do whatever you like. Whether you’re disliked or not, you pay it no mind and live free.
YOUTH: If I have the star of contribution to others high in the sky above me, I will always have happiness
and comrades by my side.
PHILOSOPHER: Then, let’s dance in earnest the moments of the here and now, and live in earnest. Do not
look at the past, and do not look at the future. One lives each complete moment like a dance. There is no
need to compete with anyone, and one has no use for destinations. As long as you are dancing, you will
get somewhere.
YOUTH: A “somewhere” that no one else knows!
PHILOSOPHER: That is the nature of energeial life. If I look back on my own life up to now, no matter
how I try, I will never arrive at a satisfactory explanation as to why I am here and now. Though, at one
time, the study of Greek philosophy was my focus, before long I took up the study of Adlerian
psychology in tandem with it, and here I am today, deep in conversation with you, my irreplaceable
friend. It is the result of having danced the moments—that is the only way to explain it. When you have
danced here and now in earnest and to the full, that is when the meaning of your life will become clear to
you.
YOUTH: It will? I . . . I believe you!
PHILOSOPHER: Yes, please believe. Through my many years living with Adler’s thought, there is
something I have noticed.
YOUTH: And that is?
PHILOSOPHER: It is that the power of one person is great, or, rather, “my power is immeasurably great.”
YOUTH: What do you mean?
PHILOSOPHER: Well, in other words, if “I” change, the world will change. This means that the world can
be changed only by me and no one else will change it for me. The world that has appeared to me since
learning of Adlerian psychology is not the world I once knew.
YOUTH: If I change, the world will change. No one else will change the world for me . . .
PHILOSOPHER: It is similar to the shock experienced by someone who, after many years of being
nearsighted, puts on glasses for the first time. Previously indistinct outlines of the world become well
defined, and even the colors are more vivid. Furthermore, it is not only a part of one’s visual field that
becomes clear but also the entire visible world. I can only imagine how happy you will be if you have a
similar experience.
YOUTH: Ah, if only I’d known! I wish I had known this ten years ago, or even just five years ago. If only I
had known five years ago, before I got a job . . .
PHILOSOPHER: No, that is not the case. You say you wish you had known this ten years ago. It is because
Adler’s thought resonates with you now that you are thinking this. No one knows how you would have
felt about it ten years ago. This discussion was something that you needed to hear now.
YOUTH: Yes, I certainly did!
PHILOSOPHER: One more time, I give you the words of Adler: “Someone has to start. Other people might
not be cooperative, but that is not connected to you. My advice is this: You should start. With no regard
to whether others are cooperative or not.”
YOUTH: I cannot tell yet if it is I who have changed, or if it is the world that I can see from that vantage
point that has changed. But there is one thing I can say with conviction: Here and now is shining
brightly! Yes, it is so bright that I can see almost nothing of tomorrow.
PHILOSOPHER: I believe that you have drunk the water. So young friend who walks ahead, shall we walk
together?
YOUTH: I believe you, too. Yes, let’s walk together. And thank you for all your time.
PHILOSOPHER: Thank you, too.
YOUTH: I hope you will not mind if, at some point, I visit you here again. Yes, as an irreplaceable friend.
And I won’t be saying anything more about taking apart your arguments.
PHILOSOPHER: Ha-ha! At last, you have shown me a young person’s smile. Well, it’s quite late already.
Let’s pass our own nights, and greet the new morning.
The young man slowly tied his shoelaces and left the philosopher’s house. On opening the door,
he found a snowy scene spread out before him. The full moon, its floating form obscured,
illuminated the shimmering whiteness at his feet. What clear air. What dazzling light. I am
going to tread on this fresh snow, and take my first step. The young man drew a deep breath,
rubbed the slight stubble on his face, and murmured emphatically, “The world is simple, and life
is too.”
Afterword
In life, there are encounters in which a book one happens to pick up one day ends up completely altering
one’s landscape the following morning.
It was the winter of 1999, and I was a youth in my twenties, when I had the great fortune of
encountering such a book at a bookshop in Ikebukuro. This was Ichiro Kishimi’s Adorā Shinrigaku
Nyūmon (Introduction to Adlerian Psychology).
Here was a form of thought, profound in every way, yet conveyed in simple language, that seemed to
overturn our accepted wisdoms at their very roots. A Copernican revolution that denied trauma and
converted etiology into teleology. Having always felt something unconvincing in the discourses of the
Freudians and Jungians, I was affected very deeply. Who was this Alfred Adler? How had I never known
of his existence before? I purchased every single book by or about Adler that I could get my hands on and
became completely engrossed and read them over and over again.
But I was struck then by a certain fact. What I was interested in was not solely Adlerian psychology
but rather something that had emerged through the filter of the philosopher, Ichiro Kishimi: It was
Kishimi-Adler studies that I was seeking.
Grounded in the thought of Socrates and Plato and other ancient Greek philosophers, the Adlerian
psychology that Kishimi conveys to us reveals Adler as a thinker, a philosopher, whose work went far
beyond the confines of clinical psychology. For instance, the statement “It is only in social contexts that a
person becomes an individual” is positively Hegelian; in his laying emphasis on subjective interpretation
over objective truth, he echoes Nietzsche’s worldview; and ideas recalling the phenomenology of Husserl
and Heidegger are in abundance.
Adlerian psychology, which draws inspiration from these philosophical insights to proclaim “All
problems are interpersonal relationship problems,” “People can change and be happy from this moment
onward,” and “The problem is not one of ability, but of courage” was to utterly change the worldview of
this rather confused youth.
Nevertheless, there was almost no one around me who had heard of Adlerian psychology. Eventually,
it occurred to me that I would like to make a book some day with Kishimi that would be a definitive
edition of Adlerian psychology (Kishimi-Adler studies), and I contacted one editor after another and
waited impatiently for the opportunity to arise.
It was in March 2010 that I was at last able to meet with Kishimi, who lives in Kyoto. More than ten
years had passed since my first reading of Introduction to Adlerian Psychology.
When Kishimi said to me then, “Socrates’s thought was conveyed by Plato. I would like to be a Plato
for Adler,” without a second thought, I answered, “Then, I will be a Plato for you, Mr. Kishimi.” And
that is how this book was conceived.
One aspect of Adler’s simple and universal ideas is that there are times when he may seem to be stating
the obvious, while at others he is likely to be regarded as espousing utterly unrealizable, idealistic theories.
Accordingly, in this book, in hopes of focusing on any doubts that might be harbored by the reader, I
have adopted the format of a dialogue between a philosopher and a young man.
As is implied in this narrative, it is not a simple thing to make the ideas of Adler one’s own and put
them into practice. There are points that make one want to rebel, statements that are difficult to accept,
and proposals that one may struggle to grasp.
But the ideas of Adler have the power to completely change a person’s life, just like they did for me
over a decade ago. Then it is only a question of having the courage to take a step forward.
In closing, I would like to express my deep gratitude to Ichiro Kishimi, who never treated me as a
disciple, even though I was much younger than he, but met me forthrightly as a friend; to the editor
Yoshifumi Kakiuchi, for his steadfast and unstinting support at every step of the way; and last but not
least, to all the readers of this book.
Thank you very much.
Fumitake Koga
More than half a century has passed since the death of Adler, and the times still cannot catch up with the
freshness of his ideas. Though compared to Freud or Jung, the name Adler is little known in Japan today.
Adler’s teachings are said to be a “communal quarry” that anyone can excavate something from. And
though his name often goes unmentioned, the influence of his teachings has spread far and wide.
I had been studying philosophy ever since my late teens, and it was around the time my child was
born, when I was in my early thirties, that I first encountered Adlerian psychology. Eudaimonic theory,
which investigates the question “What is happiness?,” is one of the central themes of Western philosophy.
I had spent many years pondering this question before I attended the lecture where I first learned of
Adlerian psychology. On hearing the lecturer declare from his podium, “Those who have listened to my
talk today will be able to change and be happy from this moment onward,” I felt repulsed. But at the
same time, it dawned on me that I had never thought deeply about how I myself can find happiness, and
with the notion that “finding happiness” itself was perhaps easier than I’d imagined, I took an interest in
Adlerian psychology.
In this way, I came to study Adlerian psychology side by side with philosophy. I soon realized,
however, that I could not study them separately, as two distinct fields.
For instance, the idea of teleology, far from being something that appeared suddenly in Adler’s time,
is present in the philosophy of Plato and Aristotle. It became clear to me that Adlerian psychology was a
way of thinking that lay in the same vein as Greek philosophy. Moreover, I noticed that the dialogues that
Socrates engaged in with youths, which Plato recording in writing for posterity, could be said to
correspond very closely to the counseling practiced today.
Though many people think of philosophy as something difficult to understand, Plato’s dialogues do
not contain any specialized language.
It is strange that philosophy should be something that is discussed using words understood only by
specialists. Because in its original meaning, philosophy refers not to “wisdom” itself but to “love of
wisdom,” and it is the very process of learning what one does not know and arriving at wisdom that is
important.
Whether or not one attains wisdom in the end is not an issue.
A person reading Plato’s dialogues today may be surprised to find that the dialogue concerning
courage, for instance, ends without arriving at any conclusion.
The youths engaged in dialogues with Socrates never agree with what he says at the outset. They refute
his statements thoroughly. This book is continuing in the tradition of philosophy since Socrates, and that
is why it follows the format of a dialogue between a philosopher and a youth.
Upon learning of Adlerian psychology, which is another philosophy, I became dissatisfied with the
way of living of the researcher who only reads and interprets the writings of his predecessors. I wanted to
engage in dialogues in the way that Socrates did, and eventually I began to practice counseling at
psychiatry clinics and other venues.
In doing so, I met many youths.
All of these youths wanted to live sincerely, but many of them were people who had been told by
worldly, jaded elders to “be more realistic” and were on the verge of giving up on their dreams, people
who had been through arduous experiences of being entangled in interpersonal relationships that were
complicated precisely because they were pure.
Wanting to live sincerely is an important thing, but it is not enough on its own. Adler tells us that all
problems are interpersonal relationship problems. But if one does not know how to build good
interpersonal relationships, one may end up trying to satisfy other people’s expectations. And unable to
communicate out of fear of hurting other people even when one has something to assert, one may end
up abandoning what one really wants to do.
While people may certainly be popular among those they know, and not many people will dislike
them perhaps, they will end up being incapable of living their own lives.
To a young person like the youth in this book, who has many problems and has already had a harsh
awakening to reality, the views put forward by this philosopher, that this world is a simple place and that
anyone can be happy from this day onward, may come as a surprise.
“My psychology is for all people,” says Adler, and dispensing with specialized language much as Plato
did, he shows us specific steps for improving our interpersonal relationships.
If Adler’s way of thinking is hard to accept, it is because it is a compilation of antitheses to normal
social thinking, and because to understand it one must put it into practice in everyday life. Though his
words are not difficult, there may be a sense of difficulty like that of imagining the blazing heat of
summer in the dead of winter, but I hope that readers will be able to grasp keys here to solving their
interpersonal relationship problems.
The day Fumitake Koga, my collaborator and writer for this book, first visited my study, he said, “I
will be a Plato for you, Mr. Kishimi.”
Today the reason we can learn about the philosophy of Socrates, who left no known writings, is that
Plato took down his dialogues in written form. But Plato did not simply record what Socrates said. It is
thanks to Plato’s correct understanding of his words that Socrates’s teachings are still conveyed today.
It is thanks to the exceptional powers of understanding of Koga, who persisted in carrying out
repeated dialogues with me over a period of several years, that this book has seen the light of day. Both
Koga and I often made visits to our teachers in our university days, and the youth in this book could be
either one of us, but more than anyone, he is you, who picked up this book. It is my sincere hope that
while your doubts may linger, I will be able to support your resolution in all manner of life situations
through this dialogue with a philosopher.
Ichiro Kishimi
The Courage to Be Disliked by Ichiro Kishimi and Fumitake Koga
This reading group guide for The Courage to Be Disliked includes an introduction, discussion questions,
and ideas for enhancing your book club. The suggested questions are intended to help your reading group
find new and interesting angles and topics for your discussion. We hope that these ideas will enrich your
conversation and increase your enjoyment of the book.
Introduction
The Courage to Be Disliked follows a conversation between a young man and a philosopher as they
discuss the tenets of Alfred Adler’s theories. Alder, a lesser-known twentieth-century psychologist whose
work stands up to Freud and Jung, believes in a liberating approach to happiness in which each human
being has the power and potential to live a happy and fulfilled life without worry about the past or
future. Their dialogue spans five nights, and the reader is invited to journey alongside the youth as he
grapples with, fights against, and is ultimately moved by the profundity of Alder’s wisdom.
Topics & Questions for Discussion
The First Night: Deny Trauma
1. Like the youth, do you feel determined from the outset to reject the philosopher’s theories? Why
might that be?
2. “Everyone wishes they could change,” the youth says. Do you agree? If you could change one thing
about yourself, what would it be and why?
3. What “equipment” do you possess? Assess how successfully, on a scale from 1–10, you are using your
equipment to bring happiness to your life in this moment?
The Second Night: All Problems Are Interpersonal Relationship Problems
4. Do you find it comforting to hear that it is “basically impossible to not get hurt in your relations with
other people”? Why or why not?
5. Describe a time when your own feeling of inferiority acted as a kind of launchpad to change or move
forward in your life.
6. Do you agree that love is the most difficult life-task? Why do you think so?
The Third Night: Discard Other People’s
7. Answer the philosopher’s question: why does one want to be praised by others? (page 116)
8. The philosopher offers the following definition of freedom: “Freedom is being disliked by other
people.” How would you define freedom?
9. Do you have the courage to be disliked? Or do you know anyone in your life who seems to? If so, do
their relationships or yours seem “things of lightness” as the philosopher suggests?
The Fourth Night: Where the Center of the World Is
10. From where in your life do you derive a sense of community feeling?
11. Is your life worth living because you are of use to someone? Consider how we manifest this worth—
think of the jobs we take, the places we chose to live, or the experiences we accept or decline.
12. The philosopher offers the youth the same advice Adler offered once: “someone has to start.” That is,
to create a meaningful life, a sense of community, it must begin with you regardless of what others
around you are doing. How practical do you find this advice? What are concrete ways you might
begin to “start”?
The Fourth Night: Where the Center of the World Is
13. Were you surprised, comforted, and/or fascinated to read that “there is no such thing as a 100 percent
person”? How can you actively acknowledge this fact to yourself, as the philosopher suggests?
14. Labor is one way we come to feel useful and worthwhile, and therefore happy. What aspects of your
work give you a sense of fulfillment? Do some aspects of your labor detract from your happiness?
15. Share how you plan to cast a spotlight on the here and now. What sort of action plan can you make to
focus on living in the present moment?
Enhance Your Book Club
1. The Courage to be Disliked is a book that instructs readers how to have the courage to live a happy,
authentic life. All of the advice of the philosopher hinges on retraining your mind to accept yourself
as you are, and in turn to accept others as they are. In order to help declutter your mind, spend some
time in meditation with your book club. Turn the lights down and sit in a circle. Together, practice
relaxation techniques, including breathing in deeply through your nose and out through your
mouth. Visualize your entire body filling with air and then emptying out completely. In the
background, play some relaxing music or ocean sounds. Feel yourself relax and prepare to discuss
the concepts you find most challenging in the book.
2. The structure of The Courage to be Disliked is inspired by Socratic dialogue, a literary genre derived
from Plato’s dialogues in which Socrates is a main character who, through conversation, seeks to
answer questions on the meaning of life. Participate in your own version of this ancient quest for
discovering truth. Have your book club perform a Socratic circle. Come up with a list of a few
questions you’d like to discuss and prepare responses individually. Once your group meets, form an
inner circle and an outer circle. The inner circle will do the discussing, while the outer circle will
watch, listen, and take notes. Over lunch, discuss how the circle felt different from your regular
book club meeting. Did the tone of the conversation change? Rules for a Socratic circle can be
found here: http://www.corndancer.com/tunes/tunes_print/soccirc.pdf
3. Go on a nature walk with your book club. Notice everything around you using your five senses—
what do you hear? Smell? See? Taste? How do you feel in this moment? Are you happy? Collect as
much “data” on your walk as possible, feeling the ground underneath you, the air around you, the
sky overhead. In essence, “shine a spotlight on the here and now . . . earnestly and conscientiously.”
Once the walk is complete, reconvene with your book club and exchange notes about the
experience. What was it like to live in the moment? Was it a new experience for you, or something
you try often? Were you successful at shutting out the past and/or future? Why or why not?
About the Authors
ICHIRO KISHIMI was born in Kyoto, where he currently resides. He writes and lectures on
Adlerian psychology and provides counseling for youths in psychiatric clinics as a certified counselor and
consultant for the Japanese Society of Adlerian Psychology. He is the translator, into Japanese, of selected
writings by Alfred Adler—The Science of Living and Problems of Neurosis—and he is the author of
Introduction to Adlerian Psychology, in addition to numerous other books.
FUMITAKE KOGA is an award-winning professional writer and author. He has released numerous
bestselling works of business-related and general nonfiction. He encountered Adlerian psychology in his
late twenties and was deeply affected by its conventional wisdom—defying ideas. Thereafter, Koga made
numerous visits to Ichiro Kishimi in Kyoto, gleaned from him the essence of Adlerian psychology, and
took down the notes for the classical “dialogue format” method of Greek philosophy that is used in this
book.
MEET THE AUTHORS, WATCH VIDEOS AND MORE AT
SimonandSchuster.com
Authors.SimonandSchuster.com/Ichiro-Kishimi
Authors.SimonandSchuster.com/Fumitake-Koga
Facebook.com/AtriaBooks @AtriaBooks @AtriaBooks
An Imprint of Simon & Schuster, Inc.
1230 Avenue of the Americas
New York, NY 10020
www.SimonandSchuster.com
Copyright © 2013 by Ichiro Kishimi and Fumitake Koga
English translation copyright © 2017 by Ichiro Kishimi and Fumitake Koga
First published in Japan as Kirawareru Yuki by Diamond Inc., Tokyo in 2013
All rights reserved, including the right to reproduce this book or portions thereof in any form whatsoever. For information, address Atria
Books Subsidiary Rights Department, 1230 Avenue of the Americas, New York, NY 10020.
First Atria Books hardcover edition May 2018
and colophon are trademarks of Simon & Schuster, Inc.
For information about special discounts for bulk purchases, please contact Simon & Schuster Special Sales at 1-866-506-1949 or
business@simonandschuster.com.
The Simon & Schuster Speakers Bureau can bring authors to your live event. For more information or to book an event, contact the Simon
& Schuster Speakers Bureau at 1-866-248-3049 or visit our website at www.simonspeakers.com.
Interior design by Jason Snyder
Jacket design by Albert Tang
Jacket art © Elinacious/Depositphotos
Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication Data
Names: Kishimi, Ichiro, 1956- author. | Koga, Fumitake, 1973- author.
Title: The courage to be disliked : the Japanese phenomenon that shows you how to change your life and achieve real happiness / Ichiro
Kishimi, Fumitake Koga.
Other titles: Kirawareru Yuki. English
Description: New York : Atria Books, 2018.
Identifiers: LCCN 2018002432 (print) | LCCN 2018009555 (ebook)
Subjects: LCSH: Adler, Alfred, 1870-1937. | Self-actualization (Psychology) | Adlerian psychology. | Conduct of life. | Thought and
thinking. | BISAC: SELF-HELP / Personal Growth / Happiness. | SELF-HELP / Motivational & Inspirational. | PHILOSOPHY / Free
Will & Determinism.
Classification: LCC BF637.S4 (ebook) | LCC BF637.S4 K553513 2018 (print) | DDC 158—dc23
LC record available at https://lccn.loc.gov/2018002432
ISBN 978-1-5011-9727-7
ISBN 978-1-5011-9729-1 (ebook)
This English edition published by arrangement with Diamond, Inc. c/o Tuttle-Mori Agency, Inc., Tokyo through Chandler Crawford
Agency, Massachusetts, USA.

What are the discrepancies between patient and provider explanatory models of illness and disease?

CULTURAL COMPETENCY AND QUALITY OF CARE:
OBTAINING THE PATIENT’S PERSPECTIVE
Quyen Ngo-Metzger, Joseph Telfair, Dara H. Sorkin, Beverly Weidmer,
Robert Weech-Maldonado, Margarita Hurtado, and Ron D. Hays
October 2006
ABSTRACT: Provision of “culturally competent” medical care is one of the strategies advocated
for reducing or eliminating racial and ethnic health disparities. This report identifies five domains of
culturally competent care that can best be assessed through patients’ perspectives: 1) patient–provider
communication; 2) respect for patient preferences and shared decision-making; 3) experiences
leading to trust or distrust; 4) experiences of discrimination; and 5) linguistic competency. The
authors review the literature focusing on these domains, summarize the salient issues and current
knowledge, and discuss the policy and research implications. Incorporating patients’ perspectives
on culturally and linguistically appropriate services into current measures of quality will provide
important data and create opportunities for providers and health plans to make improvements.
Support for this research was provided by The Commonwealth Fund. The views presented here
are those of the authors and not necessarily those of The Commonwealth Fund or its directors,
officers, or staff. This report and other Fund publications are available online at www.cmwf.org.
To learn more about new publications when they become available, visit the Fund’s Web site and
register to receive e-mail alerts. Commonwealth Fund pub. no. 963.

iii
CONTENTS
About the Authors……………………………………………………………………………………………. iv
Acknowledgments …………………………………………………………………………………………….. v
Executive Summary………………………………………………………………………………………….. vi
Introduction ……………………………………………………………………………………………………..1
Methodology…………………………………………………………………………………………………….3
Aspects of Culturally Competent, Patient-Centered Care…………………………………………. 3
Patient–Provider Communication…………………………………………………………………… 3
Shared Decision-Making and Respect for Patient Preferences ……………………………… 7
Experiences Leading to Trust or Distrust ………………………………………………………….. 9
Experiences of Discrimination………………………………………………………………………. 13
Linguistic Competence ……………………………………………………………………………….. 14
Discussion……………………………………………………………………………………………………… 20
Implications ……………………………………………………………………………………………………. 22
Recommendations for Providers and Health Systems ……………………………………….. 22
Recommendations for Applied Research ……………………………………………………….. 23
Incorporating Patients’ Perspectives of Cultural Competence
into Quality Measures …………………………………………………………………………………. 25
Notes……………………………………………………………………………………………………………. 29
LIST OF FIGURES AND TABLES
Figure 1 Conceptual Framework of Culturally Competent Care
from the Patient’s Perspective ………………………………………………………………. 2
Table 1 Comparisons of Diverse Patients’ Health Care Experiences and
Quality of Care Domains Covered by the CAHPS Instruments ……………….. 26
iv
ABOUT THE AUTHORS
Quyen Ngo-Metzger, M.D., M.P.H., is assistant professor of medicine and director of
Asian health studies at the Center for Health Policy Research at the University of
California, Irvine, and adjunct natural scientist at the RAND Corporation, Santa Monica,
Calif. Her research interests include the health status and health care needs of immigrant
populations. In particular, she is interested in how cultural and linguistic barriers
contribute to health disparities, and in developing interventions to improve chronic
disease management among vulnerable populations. She received her M.D. from the
University of Chicago and her M.P.H. from the Harvard University School of Public Health.
Joseph Telfair, Dr.P.H., M.P.H., M.S.W., is professor of public health research and
practice at the University of North Carolina at Greensboro and senior advisor to the
Center for Cultural Competence at Georgetown University. Dr. Telfair received his dual
M.S.W./M.P.H. from the University of California at Berkeley. He later graduated from
Johns Hopkins University School of Hygiene and Public Health as a Doctor of Public
Health. His expertise and areas of interests include community-based and communityoriented
program evaluation and research; culturally competent research and evaluation;
health practice, research, program evaluation, and policy issues of women, teens and
children with chronic conditions.
Dara H. Sorkin, Ph.D., is assistant professor at the Center for Health Policy Research
at the University of California, Irvine. The focus of her research involves understanding
and promoting social psychological factors that contribute to the effective management of
Type 2 diabetes, particularly among ethnically diverse older adults. Other research interests
include investigating the impact of social relationships on psychological and physical health
in later life. She received her Ph.D. in psychology and social behavior from the University
of California, Irvine.
Beverly Weidmer, M.A., is a survey director in the survey research group at the
RAND Corporation, Santa Monica, Calif. Ms. Weidmer has more than15 years
experience in both quantitative and qualitative survey research methodology, has worked
on numerous studies focusing on racial and ethnic inequalities in access to care, and has
considerable experience working with immigrant and minority populations. Ms. Weidmer
is experienced in all aspects of survey design and management, survey operations,
instrument design methods, and has special expertise in community-based, participatory
research and in working with difficult-to-reach populations. She received her M.A. from
the University of Texas, Austin.
v
Robert Weech-Maldonado, M.B.A., Ph.D., is associate professor of health services
research, management, and policy at the College of Public Health and Health Professions,
University of Florida. His research examines the impact of organizational and market
factors on access, quality, and costs of care for vulnerable populations, particularly the
elderly and racial/ethnic minorities. Dr. Weech-Maldonado and colleagues were the
recipients of the 1999 American College of Health Care Executives Health Management
Research Award for their study on diversity management of hospitals in Pennsylvania. He
received his M.B.A. from the University of Puerto Rico and his Ph.D. in business
administration from Temple University.
Margarita Hurtado, Ph.D., M.H.S., is principal research scientist at the American
Institutes for Research in Silver Spring, Md. Her research focuses on quality of care
measurement and improvement, survey and evaluation research, and health
communication research. She has a special interest in Latino health and health care for
underserved communities. Dr. Hurtado received her Ph.D. in health services research
from the Johns Hopkins University School of Hygiene and Public Health, as well as an
M.H.S. in international health and an M.A. in international relations.
Ron D. Hays, Ph.D., is professor of medicine in the division of general internal
medicine and health services research at the University of California, Los Angeles, and
senior behavioral scientist at the RAND Corporation in Santa Monica, Calif. He received
his Ph.D. from the University of California, Riverside.
ACKNOWLEDGMENTS
The authors would like to express their gratitude to Anne Beal, senior program officer at
The Commonwealth Fund, and Laurin Mayeno for their valuable assistance in reviewing
the drafts of this document and to Disa Lubker and Michelle Nguyen for their
administrative support.
Editorial support was provided by Martha Hostetter.
vi
EXECUTIVE SUMMARY
Noteworthy problems with access to health care and poor health outcomes among
racial and ethnic minorities have been documented. Provision of “culturally competent”
medical care is one of the strategies advocated for reducing or eliminating racial and ethnic
health disparities. Cultural competence has been defined by the Office of Minority Health
as “a set of congruent behaviors, attitudes, and policies that come together in a system,
agency, or among professionals that enables effective work in cross-cultural situations.”
This report examines culturally competent care from the patient’s perspective, explores
methods for assessing culturally competent care, and identifies areas for further research. In
particular, the authors sought to:
• develop a conceptual framework that identifies domains of culturally
competent care from the patient’s perspective;
• review the literature focusing on these domains;
• summarize the salient issues and current knowledge; and
• discuss the policy and research implications.
Aspects of Culturally Competent Care from the Patient’s Perspective
Patient–provider communication. Patient–provider communication can be affected by
such factors as differences in verbal and non-verbal communication styles and explanatory
models of illness. Minority patients and individuals from lower socioeconomic
backgrounds tend to receive less health-related information from their providers compared
with non-minorities and individuals from higher socioeconomic backgrounds. Lack of
patient–provider communication about the use of complementary and alternative medical
practices is also a noteworthy problem.
• Provider/health system recommendations: The authors recommend that health
care providers and health systems continually monitor their patient populations
through quantitative and qualitative data collection methods. Specifically, data
collection should include patients’ race or ethnicity, socioeconomic status, English
language skills, and preferred language or language spoken at home. Intake forms
should be modified to include questions that measure health literacy, English
proficiency, language spoken at home, and use of complementary and alternative
medical practices.
vii
• Applied research recommendations: Research is needed to examine factors that
influence patient–provider interactions among diverse racial/ethnic groups.
Further research is needed to investigate the roles that patient navigators/coaches,
community health workers, parish nurses, interpreters, and case managers can play
in influencing patient–provider communication.
Shared decision-making and respect for patient preferences. Patient-centered care requires
effective patient–provider partnerships, including shared decision-making among
providers, patients, and families. Providers should work with patients to select treatments
that take into account patients’ health-related values, weighing available treatment options
and patient preferences. Current research shows that minority and low-income
populations are more likely than white or higher-income patients to feel disenfranchised
in the decision-making process and perceive a lack of respect for their preferences. In
addition, studies have found that patients who make frequent use of complementary or
alternative medicine often feel that providers do not respect their decision to use such
therapies instead of (or in addition to) conventional medicine.
• Provider/health system recommendations: The authors recommend that providers
investigate patients’ explanatory models of common diseases and their healthrelated
values and preferences (e.g., why a patient thinks he has lung cancer and
how he wants to involve his family in end-of-life decisions). At the systems level,
policies should aim to democratize decision-making processes among patients,
their families, and providers. Additionally, policies are needed to recognize
patients’ rights to use alternative therapy or community-based programs in addition
to conventional medical facilities.
• Applied research recommendations: Research is needed to investigate the
association between patients and providers’ race/ethnicity and their treatment
preferences. It is also important to examine what happens when patients and
providers disagree on treatment options. More research is needed to determine
how patients’ disclosure of their use of complementary or alternative medicine
affects patient–provider interactions. Finally, research is needed to examine the use
of lay health workers or other “cultural communicators” as facilitators. Cultural
communicators observe the doctor–client interaction and help the health care
provider and client understand each other.
Experiences leading to trust or distrust. Only a few studies have looked at the
underlying causes of patient dissatisfaction and distrust of providers among racial and
ethnic minorities. The existing studies consist mainly of small, qualitative investigations of
viii
special populations. Current research indicates that minority patients who have raceconcordant
providers report higher levels of satisfaction with their care and lower levels
of distrust.
• Provider/health system recommendations: It is important to evaluate the factors
that affect patients’ trust in their providers. Such factors may differ by racial/
ethnic populations as well as socioeconomic and insurance status. Providers should
seek to develop open channels of communication and empower patients
to speak up about issues affecting their trust.
• Applied research recommendations: Further research is needed to understand
why some patients prefer to be race concordant with their providers, and to
gauge the effects of racial concordance on access to care, quality of care, and health
outcomes. Research is also needed to explore and understand the root causes of
distrust in providers, particularly among Latino and African American patients, for
which studies conducted in different health care settings have
yielded contradictory results. Finally, there is a need to explore whether differences
in levels of trust of providers among racial and ethnic minorities, compared with
whites, result from past experiences with the medical system
or varying expectations.
Experiences of discrimination. Compared with white patients, racial and ethnic
minorities perceive more instances of racism in the medical care system, tend to be less
satisfied with their health care, and have higher levels of distrust in their health care
providers. The reasons for these perceptions have not been definitively determined.
Research on the role of racial bias or discrimination in the practice and delivery of health
care is needed, as are valid measures for use in large-scale, population-based studies of the
causes and health effects of perceived discrimination.
• Provider/health system recommendations: Providers need to be aware that racial
and ethnic minority patients might perceive discrimination or bias in the health
care system. Specific complaints of discrimination should be investigated and
structural, system-wide changes and improvements should be sought. Patients
should be given opportunities to voice their concerns about discrimination.
• Applied research recommendations: More research is needed to determine the
placement of responsibility (e.g., on providers, staff, or others) for discrimination in
health care settings and the characteristics (of patients or of the providers/staff
members) that are most associated with incidents of bias. In addition,
ix
understanding the consequences of perceived discrimination or bias on health is an
important next step for future research.
Linguistic competence. Compared with English-speaking patients and those with
higher levels of health literacy, limited English proficiency (LEP) patients and those with
low health literacy are less likely to use health care services and adhere to medical
regiments and more likely to have worse health outcomes. Linguistic competence includes
communication strategies for LEP individuals and those with low health literacy. Language
concordance between patients and providers is the most effective strategy to improve
communication and health outcomes for LEP patients, though the use of professional
interpreters can also be effective. Still, the majority of LEP patients lack access to trained
interpreters. There are also effective techniques for communicating with patients with low
health literacy.
• Provider/health system recommendations: The Joint Commission on
Accreditation of Healthcare Organizations (JCAHO) and National Committee for
Quality Assurance (NCQA) should require hospitals and health plans to collect
data on their patients’ health literacy and English proficiency as part of the
accreditation process. Insurers and policymakers should provide incentives for
health care providers to improve services that specifically target patients who have
low health literacy or limited English proficiency. Providers and health care
systems should avoid the use of ad-hoc interpreters to communicate with LEP
patients, and instead rely on trained bilingual staff and professional interpreters.
Health plans and providers must monitor and assess the quality of interpreter
services. Finally, medical schools and other health professional schools should
incorporate issues pertaining to communication with patients who have low health
literacy and/or LEP into their curricula. Medical schools should seek to increase
recruitment and retention of bilingual students.
• Applied research recommendations: Further research is needed to assess the impact
of various communication strategies for low health literacy patients, considering
effects on health-related knowledge, compliance with care regimens, and health
outcomes. More research on the mechanisms through which low health literacy
and LEP may affect health outcomes is also needed. Finally, it is important to
consider the implications for the health care system of patients who have both low
health literacy and LEP.
Patient–provider communication, shared decision-making, and trust affect the
quality of care of all patients, not just racial/ethnic minorities or those with low
x
socioeconomic status. However, problems in these areas of patient-centered care
disproportionately affect vulnerable populations. Incorporating patients’ perspectives on
culturally and linguistically appropriate services into current measures of quality
will provide important data and create opportunities for providers and health plans to
make improvements.
1
CULTURAL COMPETENCY AND QUALITY OF CARE:
OBTAINING THE PATIENT’S PERSPECTIVE
INTRODUCTION
Ample research has documented the existence of significant racial and ethnic disparities in
access to health care, as well as poorer outcomes and health status among racial and ethnic
minorities.1 Various studies have looked at the causes of these disparities and
recommended strategies for reducing or eliminating them. Among the strategies advocated
is the provision of “culturally competent” medical care. The Office of Minority Health,
using the definition developed by Cross and colleagues, has defined cultural and linguistic
competence as “a set of congruent behaviors, attitudes, and policies that come together in
a system, agency, or among professionals that enables effective work in cross-cultural
situations.”2 Although there has been much discussion in the medical, research, and public
health communities about “culturally competent care,” little is known about how to
accurately measure it.
In recent years, a “patient-centered” approach to the process and delivery of health
care has been identified as crucial to providing culturally competent medical care. The
Institute of Medicine defines patient-centered care as “care that is respectful of and
responsive to individual patient preferences, needs, and values.”3 McWhinney described
patient-centered care as being able to “see through the patient’s eyes.”4 Thus, one
important way to measure the quality of culturally competent care is to obtain patients’
perspectives. Patients experience health care through their interactions with providers and
other staff, and within the context of the health care systems such as health insurance plans
and health care clinics. Patients’ previous experiences and unique characteristics will affect
their views. For example, the perspective of care “through the patient’s eyes” may be
different for an older African American woman from Haiti than for a young, white, non-
Latino male.
This report examines culturally competent care from the patient’s perspective,
explores methods for assessing culturally competent care, and identifies areas for further
research. Figure 1 depicts a conceptual framework for obtaining patients’ perspectives on
culturally competent care. The authors developed this framework based on the conceptual
model of measuring health care quality among diverse populations developed by Bethell
and colleagues.5 Many provider and system factors contribute to culturally competent care;
this report focuses on the overlap between the three circles in Figure 1, which represents
areas of care best measured through patient reports, rather than through provider reports
or other sources.
2
The first two domains in these areas of overlap—patient–provider communication
and respect for patient preferences/shared decision-making—include interactions between
patients and providers: The other three domains—patient experiences leading to trust or
distrust; experiences of discrimination; and linguistic competency—refer to patient–
provider interactions, as well as patients’ interactions with other health care staff and the
health care system overall.
Patients may be the best and perhaps the only source for these types of
information. For example, one study found that Asian immigrants with limited English
proficiency (LEP) reported experiencing discrimination from office staff, including
interpreters, who “looked down” on them because of their limited English language
abilities.6 This type of information would not have been revealed from interviews with
Figure 1. Conceptual Framework of Culturally Competent Care
from the Patient’s Perspective
Patient Factors Provider Factors
Healthcare System Factors
•Access (ability to get appointments quickly, short wait time during visits, etc.)
•Healthcare facilities convenient for community
•Diverse workforce reflecting patient population
•Coordination of care between different providers and health care settings
•Quality improvement environment with continued patient feedback
•Patient/provider
communication
•Respect for patient
preferences/shared
decision-making
•Experiences leading
to trust or distrust
•Experiences of
discrimination
•Linguistic competency
•Race/ethnicity
•Age
•Gender
•Training/specialty
•Experience with
diverse populations
•Language competency
•Communication style
•Religion/spirituality
•Beliefs and values
•Explanatory models
•Race/ethnicity
•Age
•Gender
•Socioeconomic status
(education, income, etc.)
•Health literacy
•Insurance status
•Utilization (time constraints, transportation, etc.)
•Religion/spirituality
•Beliefs and values
•Explanatory models
•Expectations
•English proficiency
3
providers or health care administrators. Thus, the authors determined that these five
domains of culturally competent care should be measured “through the patient’s eyes.”
Other domains of care, such as access and coordination, are important aspects of quality of
care in general. However, because these domains of quality have been extensively
examined as part of “patient-centered” care, they are not examined in this report.
METHODOLOGY
Using the conceptual framework, the authors reviewed the literature addressing these five
domains of care. The authors searched for articles published in English from January 1990
to September 2005, focusing on empirical studies conducted in the United States that
included people of color (African Americans, Latinos, Asians and Pacific Islanders, and
Native Americans).
ASPECTS OF CULTURALLY COMPETENT, PATIENT-CENTERED CARE
Patient–Provider Communication
Some racial/ethnic minority groups and those with lower socioeconomic status have a
high probability of being uninsured, impeding their ability to seek and obtain health
services.7 But even when access to care, diagnosis, and illness severity are the same, some
minorities use health services that require a doctor’s referral at lower rates than whites.
This suggests that barriers to care may emerge in the context of patient–provider
interactions, rather than in accessing providers.8
Indeed, communication during medical interactions plays a central role in
decisions about subsequent interventions, and can influence patient adherence, satisfaction
with care, and health outcomes.9 One goal of the Cultural and Linguistic Access to
Services (CLAS) standards on “Language Access Services,” as derived from the Healthy
People 2010 goals, is to ensure the use of communication strategies to improve health.10
As defined in the Healthy People 2010 and CLAS documents, health communication is
“the use of communication strategies to inform and influence individual and community
decisions that enhance health.”11 This includes efforts to assist patients in reaching their
personal health goals. Better patient–provider communication increases awareness of
health risks and risky behaviors, helps patients make choices by clarifying complicated
issues, and increases the likelihood that patients understand and adhere to complex
treatment regimens.12 The negative impacts of ineffective patient–provider
communication on health may be increased when cultural and linguistic barriers are also
factors. Implementing the CLAS standards is expected to increase demand for appropriate
health services and lower demand for inappropriate services.13
4
A Commonwealth Fund survey conducted in 2001 found that there was a positive
association between physicians’ cultural sensitivity and patient ratings of the quality of
patient–physician interactions (including communication behaviors), regardless of the
patient’s racial/ethnic group.14 However, Asian Americans were less satisfied with care,
more likely to report not being involved in decisions about their care, and less likely to
report the doctor ever talking to them about lifestyle or mental health issues compared
with white patients.15 Another study suggests that some physicians may be more verbally
dominant, engage in less patient-centered communication, and exhibit lower levels of
positive exchanges with African American patients than with white patients.16 The study
did not explore the reasons for these differences, though racism may have played a factor.
Disparities in patient–provider communication. Some racial/ethnic groups and
individuals of lower socioeconomic status are more likely than non-minority individuals
and those of higher socioeconomic status to report poor communication with their
physicians.17 Findings from the Commonwealth Fund’s 2001 Health Care Quality Survey
indicate that, while all demographic groups reported problems with patient–provider
interactions, such difficulties were most pronounced for patients from racial/ethnic
minority groups as well as populations with low education levels, low health literacy, and
low incomes.18 Differences in communication styles and explanatory models of illness and
disease can affect patient–provider communication.
Differences in communication styles. Patient–provider communication styles can be
broadly grouped into verbal and non-verbal behaviors. As defined in the literature,
“verbal” health communication includes providing directions, giving information, asking
for clarification, showing concern, offering reassurance, talking socially, and establishing
agreement. “Non-verbal” communications includes body language, including facial
expressions and gestures designed to convey information and feelings such as happiness
and distress.
Communication works in two directions. More expressive patients seem to fair
better with Western providers than those that tend to be less expressive. Both verbal and
non-verbal interactions can be affected by expressiveness, a trait that is influenced both by
the patient’s individual personality and his cultural background. Street et al. found that
physicians’ dispensing of information was influenced by patients’ communication styles,
such as whether they asked questions or were otherwise expressive.19 Research has also
found that some physicians give more information to particular types of patients: for
example, more educated patients receive more diagnostic and health information than
their less-educated counterparts.20
5
Strategies to encourage patients to express themselves have been shown to
strengthen patient–provider communication. In a study of women with HIV/AIDS from
various minority groups, patients involved in activities to encourage participation in
decision-making about their care reported higher levels of communication with their
providers and received more information and had more positive interactions than those
who were not involved in such activities.21 In another study, Krupat and colleagues
showed that assertive behavior among black patients and those with low socioeconomic
status—but not among whites or those with low socioeconomic status—resulted in a
greater likelihood that physicians would order full tumor staging for women seeking care
for breast cancer.22
Examining the issue of communications from patients’ perspectives can yield
insights into how different groups value the different aspects of medical interactions.
African American, Latino, and Asian patients rated providers’ displays of “concern,
courtesy, and respect” as the most important factor in the health interactions.23 Physicians’
non-verbal and interpersonal communication behaviors related to empathy and
establishing rapport were found to be more important to minority patients compared with
white patients than the verbal transmission of health-related information.24 In separate
studies based on the Commonwealth Fund 2001 Health Care Quality Survey, both Ngo-
Metzger and Saha found that listening and spending adequate time were especially
important aspects of health interactions for Asian and Latino patients.25 In another study,
Latinos were more likely than other racial groups to mention accessibility and availability
as being important, while Asians and Pacific Islanders were more likely to mention that
physicians ordering tests and giving appropriate referrals was important.26 In contrast,
African Americans cited participating in decision-making and building a trusting
relationship with providers as the most important aspects of provider–patient
interactions.27
Discrepancies between patient and provider explanatory models of illness and disease.
Patient–provider communication involves the use of meaningful language and gestures by
providers to elicit a patient’s explanatory model of illness and arrive at a common
understanding.28 This approach to the construction of the meaning of health problems and
concerns has been labeled the “explanatory model” by Kleinman and defined as “notions
about episodes of sickness and its treatment that are employed by all those engaged in the
clinical process.”29 From a Western medical perspective, disease is the objective, measurable
pathophysiology that creates the illness, which is the meaning of the disease to the individual
and his or her social group.30
6
Discrepancies between a patient’s and a provider’s explanatory models of illness
and disease can lead to miscommunication. People who become ill, after self-treatment and
home remedies, make choices about what to do next (e.g., whether to consult popular, folk,
or professional sectors for additional assistance) based on their own assessment of their health
needs. Individuals may choose to seek advice or treatment from relatives (e.g., for routine or
familiar conditions), sacred folk healers (e.g., for spiritual or moral matters in which their
expertise is required), and/or physicians or nurses (e.g., for serious biomedical conditions).
People may act on one or more of these choices. For example, a state of illness perceived as
divine retribution for a dishonest act may be treated with prayer and repentance alone, or
may be treated with prayer together with medication prescribed by a physician.
Physicians, patients, and their families have explanatory models to guide them in
making choices about illnesses and treatments and give personal and social meaning to their
health experiences. Most providers trained in Western biomedicine belong to a biomedical
culture in which diseases are natural, mechanistic errors, correctable by repairing organs or
manipulating chemical pathways.31 In Western biomedicine, “disease” has no spiritual or
metaphysical causes, though some diseases (such as sexually transmitted diseases) may have
moral undertones related to risky behaviors. In contrast, patients from non-Western or
indigenous cultures may understand their illnesses differently, and the separation of mind,
body, and spirit characteristic of Western biomedicine may be difficult for such patients to
accept.32 For some patients, the meaning of illness may include natural explanations (such as
a fall that breaks a bone), supernatural (God’s will or malevolent spirits), or metaphysical (such
as bad airs or seasonal changes).33 Miscommunication may occur when providers view the
biomedical view of disease as the “right way” and discount the patient’s perspective on his or
her illness. When a provider and patient understand each other’s explanatory models of
disease and illness, negotiations for shared decision-making can take place in an atmosphere
of mutual respect rather than frustration and misunderstanding.34
Lack of communication about complementary and alternative medical practices.
Complementary and alternative medicine (CAM) refers to diverse practices and products
that are not currently considered part of conventional medicine.35 The use of CAM has
increased in the last two decades. It is estimated that a racially and ethnically diverse group
of 36 to 42 percent of the U.S. population used CAM in 2003, representing about $27
billion in out-of-pocket spending.36 An estimated 26 percent of African Americans, 28
percent of Hispanics, 36 percent of non-Hispanic whites, and 43 percent of Asian
Americans use CAM.37
7
The prevalence of CAM use among different racial/ethnic groups varies depending
on the definition used.38 For example, if the definition is expanded to include prayers for
one’s own health and megavitamins (high-dose vitamins), then approximately 60 percent
of whites, Asians, and Latinos and 71 percent of African Americans use CAM.39
Despite a steady increase in use of alternative therapies, there has been little change
in the rate of patients’ disclosure of CAM usage to their providers.40 It is important for
patients to discuss their use of CAM with their medical practitioners. Some therapies, such
as herbal or vitamin therapies, may cause adverse events or interfere with medical
regimens. Furthermore, knowledge of patients’ CAM practices can provide valuable
insight into patients’ values, lifestyles, and health beliefs, which may, in turn, assist
practitioners in providing optimum care.41 Yet, in a national survey of U.S. adults, 70
percent of patients who used CAM reported that their providers did not discuss CAM use
with them.42
Communication and patient-centered care. Effective patient–provider communication is
crucial to the health outcomes of patients, yet some demographic groups disproportionately
experience communication breakdowns. These problems may be partially explained by
differences in communication styles, explanatory models of illness, and views of conventional
Western medicine versus CAM.43 However, little is known about the types of interventions
that can help to bridge these communication gaps and improve patient–provider interactions.
Relationships between providers and patients are central to patient-centered care,
which is based on partnerships among clinicians, patients, and their families and takes into
account patients’ needs and preferences.44 This is furthered when patients receive
information that is easy to understand, when providers are aware of potential communication
challenges, and when care is provided with respect for patients’ explanatory models, social
environment, family context, and cultural beliefs and practices.45
Shared Decision-Making and Respect for Patient Preferences
The Institute of Medicine encourages providers to respect patients’ preferences and
promote their active participation in clinical decision-making to the extent that patients’
feel comfortable and are willing to take part. Patients may participate in their care in a
variety of ways, including having meaningful discussions about their preferences, knowing
all of the available options, and making final decisions about treatment. Patients who are
active participants in their care have been shown to have improved health outcomes,
including lower levels of blood pressure and blood glucose.46
8
Many people of color and those with lower socioeconomic status report problems
with shared decision-making and respect for their preferences.47 These individuals are
more likely than white patients and those of higher socioeconomic status to perceive a
lack of mutual trust and respect between them and their providers.48 Lack of mutual trust
and respect may limit clinicians’ ability to provide care and patients’ willingness to follow
clinicians’ advice. This can lower the quality of care and lead to increased morbidity and
mortality. Ideally, in shared decision-making, a provider helps a patient translate their
values into treatment decisions. Patients and providers collaboratively rank health-related
values as they pertain to the decisions at hand, weighing available treatments against
patient preferences.
A recent report by the Agency for Healthcare Research and Quality found that
“blacks, Asians, Hispanics, and low income populations are more likely to feel
disenfranchised in the decision-making process.”49 In a national survey, nearly one of four
people reported that they were not as involved in health care decisions as they would like.
Compared with whites, African Americans and Asians more frequently reported underinvolvement
in the health care decision-making process (e.g., 22% of whites, versus 27%
of African Americans and 42% of Asians reported that they were “not as involved as they
would like to have been”). Similarly, Latinos were more likely than non-Latino whites to
report feeling disenfranchised (34% vs. 21%), and low-income populations were more
likely than higher-income populations to report this (30% vs. 20%).50 In another study,
more African American patients reported that their visits with physicians were less
participatory than did whites.51
Roter et al. used audiotape analysis of 537 interactions to explore the relationships
between primary care doctors and their patients.52 A key finding of the study was that
African American and low-income patients were approached by their physicians in a
narrowly biomedical pattern of communication (e.g., one that precluded psychosocial
discussions and shared decision-making), compared with other patient groups. The reasons
for this are unclear, although provider bias and stereotyping may be part of
the explanation.53
Shared decision-making and CAM use. An important component of respect for
patient preferences is respect for their explanatory models of illness. As mentioned
previously, many patients choose to use CAM in addition to conventional Western
medicine. In a study among cancer patients, 35 percent of patients’ attempts to initiate
discussions about CAM were ignored by their providers.54 In another study that included
Latino patients, providers asked questions about the use of alternative therapies during
only 3 percent of discussions.55 To many patients, this lack of communication signified
9
disinterest on the part of their providers. Patients also worried that their providers may be
unsupportive of CAM use, or try to persuade them not to use CAM.56 Some patients
feared that their providers might emphasize the need for scientific evidence. Or, when
attempting to discuss CAM with their providers, patients feared they would become
overwhelmed by the statistics and data demanded by the provider.57
As discussed above, effective communication about CAM use is especially crucial
for patients who take herbs or vitamins that can interact with prescription medications.58
Patients are more likely to discuss CAM with their providers if they are confident that
their preferences will be respected. Showing respect for patient’s preferences should lead
to a more effective relationship and potentially better health outcomes.59 However, this
assumption has not been tested and is an important area of future research.
Experiences Leading to Trust or Distrust
Patients who perceive positive characteristics in their providers (such as being thorough,
understanding, responsive, and respectful) are more likely to seek treatment and heed
medical advice.60 Patients with higher levels of trust report improved satisfaction in the
patient–provider relationship and patients with lower levels of trust report lower levels of
satisfaction.61 A study by Thom et al. found that patients with low levels of trust in their
providers were substantially less likely than those with higher levels to report that they
intended to adhere to their physician’s advice, and more likely to say they did not receive
the services they requested or needed.62 When providers deny patients’ requests for tests or
treatment, patients’ trust in their physicians may be eroded.63 Bell et al. found that patients
who felt their expectations for care had not been met reported less satisfaction with their
visits, less improvement in their health conditions, and weaker intentions to adhere to
treatment, compared with patients who felt their expectations had been met.64
Collaboration and satisfaction in patient–provider relationships are associated with patients’
participation in their care, fewer appointment cancellations and no-shows, and improved
outcomes.65
Racial and ethnic differences in patient trust. Several recent studies found low levels of
patient trust and satisfaction among racial and ethnic minorities.66 In a study of the
foundations of mistrust in physicians, Schnittker found that people of lower
socioeconomic status and members of racial and ethnic minorities said their physicians
were less responsive and they were less trusting of their physicians compared with those of
higher socioeconomic status and non-minority patients. In a study by LaVeist et al., both
African American and white patients reported substantial mistrust of the medical system,
yet African Americans were significantly more likely than white patients to report mistrust
10
across all measures. In this study, African American patients were more likely than
whites to report racial discrimination as playing a factor in access to care. Those who
perceived more racism and felt more mistrust of the medical system reported less
satisfaction with care.
Using data from a nationally representative sample of adults, Hunt et al. found that
the restrictiveness of an individual’s health plan did not explain why some minority groups
were less satisfied with their care.67 African Americans and Latinos were less trusting and
less satisfied with their physicians than whites regardless of their health plan characteristics.
Other studies have found that Latinos and African Americans were less satisfied than
whites were with their care and health plans. Weech-Maldonado et al. also found that
Asians and Pacific Islanders had lower levels of satisfaction with their care and health plans
than did whites.68 In a study looking at patients’ preferences for initial care by specialists,
Wong et al. found that blacks and Asian patients had the least trust and the lowest ratings
of specialists and were much less likely to prefer a specialist than were whites.69
Only a few studies have looked at the underlying causes of patient dissatisfaction
and mistrust, particularly among racial and ethnic minorities.
Organizational factors that affect patient trust. Some studies consider how the
organization and delivery of medical care affect patient–provider relationships and patient
trust and satisfaction. One study found a significant decline in the quality of patient–
physician interactions between 1998 and 2000, as reported by Medicare beneficiaries.70
Respondents reported “less thorough discussions about their problems and symptoms,
greater difficulty reaching their doctor by phone for medical advice and in seeing the
doctor when sick, and interpersonal treatment that felt less caring and more rushed.” A
study of low-income, mostly African American women demonstrated that primary care
offices that were accessible (e.g., through long hours, short waiting times for
appointments, easy telephone contacts, and ample time for individual appointments) and
offered continuous and coordinated care (by assigning patients to the same clinicians and
helping to coordinate specialty services) were associated with strong patient–provider
relationships. Respondents who described their delivery sites as accessible and as ones that
offered continuous and coordinated care were more likely than those who did not to say
they had high levels of trust in their physicians.71
Hsu et al. found that patients who were allowed to select their primary care
providers (PCPs) were more likely to retain their providers after one year and reported
greater overall satisfaction with them, compared with patients who did not have such a
11
choice.72 In addition, patients who were allowed to choose their providers were more
likely than those who were not allowed to do so to: follow their providers’ advice, say
their provider offered the best medical care, believe their provider thought the same way
as they did, and believe their provider was well qualified and knew them well. Such
patients also reported that their PCP created less of a barrier to obtaining care with
specialists or prescription medications.
Hunt et al. found evidence that enrollment in a tightly managed health
maintenance organization (HMO) was significantly associated with patients’ reporting
lower levels of trust in their physicians, compared with enrollment in a preferred provider
organization (PPO).73 The researchers also found that enrollment in a capitated HMO
plan was significantly associated with lower levels of patient satisfaction, compared with a
PPO plan. These findings are important, because racial and ethnic minorities are more
likely than whites to be enrolled in restrictive, tightly managed health care plans.74
Patient trust and health care utilization. The literature exploring the causes of patient
mistrust among racial and ethnic minorities includes primarily small, qualitative studies of
special populations. Nevertheless, these studies provide some insight into the factors that
increase or decrease patient trust among racial and ethnic minorities, and the effects of trust
on patient satisfaction and health care utilization.75 A study of low-income, mostly minority,
prenatal and postpartum women found that patient trust is closely associated with a provider’s
behaviors. This study found that patients’ perceptions of a provider’s competence were
closely associated with their interpersonal skills and expressions of caring.76 Three
qualitative studies of battered, minority women point to the importance of providers’
interpersonal skills in promoting positive relationships with their patients, and to the role
of trust in encouraging women to seek help to address their partners’ violence.77 In
particular, study participants identified provider behaviors such as compassion,
understanding, accessibility, confidentiality, shared decision-making, and communication
as adding to patient trust in providers and encouraging them to seek help for abuse.
Patient preferences, racial concordance, and trust. Studies show that racial and ethnic
disparities in care can be partially explained by minority patients’ preferences for care.
Some studies found that African Americans are less likely than white patients to prefer
certain treatments such as renal transplantation or invasive cardiac procedures.78 In a study
of patients’ preferences for initial care, Wong et al. found that African Americans and
Asians were less likely than whites to prefer initial care by a specialist in both hypothetical
situations (i.e., when presented with a hypothetical scenario) and when asked about actual
health problems. In addition, patients who were older and had more confidence in their
12
PCPs were less likely than younger patients or those with less confidence in their PCPs to
prefer initial treatment by specialists.79
In a study of doctor–patient racial concordance, Laveist and Nuru-Jeter found that
respondents from various racial/ethnic groups, when given a choice among physicians,
were more likely to select a physician of their own race or ethnicity than to select a
physician of a different race/ethnicity.80 Respondents who had physicians of the same
race/ethnicity reported greater satisfaction with their physicians compared with
respondents who were not race concordant with their physicians. This was true across
racial and ethnic groups. The study did investigate why patients tend to choose a physician
of their own race/ethnicity or whether racial concordance was associated with higher
levels of patient trust.
In a study of racial concordance between HIV-positive patients and their providers,
King et al. found that African American patients of white providers received protease
inhibitors much later than did white patients of white providers or African American
patients of African American providers.81 This study did not provide sufficient information
to explain this difference. While it is possible that varying treatment times were the result
of provider discrimination, it is also possible that lower levels of trust and satisfaction
among African American patients in racially discordant patient–physician relationships
influenced their willingness to try new therapies. Further research is needed to understand
why patients prefer providers of the same race or ethnicity and to explore the effects of
such racial concordance on access to care, quality of care, and health outcomes.
In addition, further research is needed to explore the root causes of Asian, Latino,
and African American patients’ mistrust of physicians. In addition, research is needed to
better understand the degree to which patient mistrust is provider-driven (e.g., through
discrimination or bias), structural (e.g., due to the organization and delivery of health
care), or patient-driven (e.g. due to patient expectations and health beliefs). Furthermore,
research is needed to explore whether differences in levels of trust among racial and ethnic
minorities, compared with whites, could result from inadequate measures (e.g., poor
translations or measures that are not culturally appropriate). Future studies should evaluate
existing measures of patient trust and should be conducted in languages other than English
and should explore the associations among age, education, socioeconomic status,
acculturation, and patient trust among racial and ethnic minorities. A better understanding
of the root causes of patient mistrust is crucial to developing strategies to increase trust and
thereby improve health outcomes.
13
Experiences of Discrimination
While research uncovers inequalities in terms of access to and availability of health services
as well as care among racial and ethnic minorities, compared with white patients, the
reasons for these inequalities have not been definitively determined. For example, there is
a large body of literature documenting racial differences in the treatment of cardiovascular
disease.82 Other studies have found racial differences in rates of lung cancer surgery and
immunizations.83 In addition, greater morbidity and mortality from HIV have been
observed among African American patients than whites.84 Some studies have found that
racial and ethnic minorities perceive more racism in the medical care system and tend to
be less satisfied with their health care and their health care providers than white patients.85
As described above, patients’ attitudes toward health providers and health care institutions
affect their willingness to seek medical care, undergo treatments, and adhere to
recommended care.86
While some studies have speculated that racial bias or discrimination in the practice
and delivery of health care is at least partly responsible for racial and ethnic health
disparities, more research on this issue is needed.87,88,89 In particular, further research is
needed to improve our understanding of the consequences of discrimination (or perceived
discrimination) for patients’ health. Some studies have found that perceived discrimination
is associated with negative health outcomes, in addition to lower health care satisfaction
and treatment adherence. For example, Thornburn et al. found that many HIV-positive
patients have experienced discrimination in getting treatment for HIV, and that such
racially and socioeconomically based discrimination was associated with higher rates of
depression and post-traumatic stress symptoms, greater severity of AIDS-related symptoms,
and lower perceived general health.90 However, too few studies have looked at this issue,
and existing studies are limited by small sample sizes, cross-sectional designs, and the use of
discrimination measures that have not been adequately evaluated.
To explore the health effects of perceived discrimination, studies need reliable and
valid measures that can be feasibly used in large-scale, population-based studies. Krieger et
al. set out to fill this gap by investigating the psychometric properties of a short self-report
instrument called the “Experiences of Discrimination” (EOD) measure.91 In this study, the
EOD was tested on a sample of black, Latino, and white adults in the Boston area. The
results yielded evidence in favor of the reliability and validity of the nine-item EOD scale
and showed that single-item discrimination measures were less reliable than, and had low
correlations with, multi-item measures. These findings provide support for use of the
EOD to assess perceived discrimination among African Americans and Latinos.
14
The Consumer Assessment of Healthcare Providers and Systems (CAHPS) surveys
are designed to assess patients’ health care experiences in a variety of settings.92 A six-item
measure of perceived discrimination adapted from items used in the Commonwealth Fund
2001 Health Care Quality Survey was evaluated as part of a field test of the CAHPS
American Indian survey conducted in 2005.93 Analyses were conducted to examine survey
response rates, items missing data, and the reliability and validity of the survey. The overall
survey findings are encouraging in terms of the quality of the data collected, and
psychometric analyses provided strong support for the reliability and validity of the survey,
but the discrimination items did not coalesce into a homogenous scale (item-scale
correlations tended to be low).94
Linguistic Competence
The National Center for Cultural Competence defines linguistic competence as:
The capacity of an organization and its personnel to communicate effectively,
and convey information in a manner that is easily understood by diverse
audiences including persons of limited English proficiency, those who have
low literacy skills or are not literate, and individuals with disabilities.95
Racial and ethnic minorities are disproportionately affected by communication barriers
associated with LEP and low health literacy.
Health literacy. Healthy People 2010 defines health literacy as the “degree to which
individuals can obtain, process, and understand the basic health information and services
they need to make appropriate health decisions.”96 Health literacy is not limited to reading
and writing; it also includes speaking and listening skills. As such, people with low health
literacy tend to have problems with both written and oral communication.97
According to the 1992 National Adult Literacy Survey, half of U.S. adults have
limited or low literacy skills.98 In a meta-analysis of studies on health literacy, Paasche-
Orlow et al. found that the prevalence of low and marginal health literacy was 46 percent.
Low health literacy was significantly associated with level of education, ethnicity, and age.99
Individuals with low health literacy are less likely than those with adequate health
literacy to understand their disease, possess skills to manage their own conditions, and use
preventive health care services.100 In addition, individuals with low health literacy have
lower rates of adherence to recommended treatments, are more prone to experience medication
errors, and are more likely to have poorer health status and worse health outcomes.101
15
The mechanisms by which poor health literacy affects health outcomes are not
clear.102 However, it is likely that poor patient–provider communication may be a
mediating factor. Research has generally found that individuals with low health literacy
have more difficulties understanding health information.103 Schillinger et al. found that,
compared with diabetic patients with adequate health literacy, diabetic patients with low
health literacy were more likely to report worse communication in the domains of general
clarity, explanation of conditions, and explanation of processes of care.104 Communication
barriers can affect all aspects of health care encounters, from history-taking to explaining
diagnoses and treatments.
Physicians’ use of medical terms and the speed with which they transmit
information may cause communication problems. Such problems may be exacerbated by
the fact that patients with low health literacy tend to have passive communication styles.105
Patients with low health literacy may be hesitant to disclose their problems to their
providers or unwilling to admit they do not understand their physicians. Furthermore,
they may lack the vocabulary to phrase their questions.106 Communication barriers may
arise when individuals with low health literacy attempt to understand medical forms and
instructions, which are usually written at high school reading level or higher.107 This
includes informed consent and insurance forms, prescription labels, and medication
package inserts.
Such communication problems may be exacerbated by the current health care
environment, in which physicians have little time for providing information or
explanations. Indeed, the American Medical Association concluded that “physicians are
not successful in communicating essential health care information to their patients,
particularly to those with inadequate health literacy.”108 Often, providers are unaware of
the communication needs of their patients and do not tailor their communication styles to
fit patients’ needs.109 Providers should be encouraged to look for clues of limited literacy
skills. For example, patients may make excuses to avoid reading something (e.g., they have
forgotten their reading glasses or will read it when they get home), fill out forms
incompletely or inaccurately, or bring family members along to office visits.110
Although educational level can be a marker for low literacy, it is not strongly
correlated with literacy skills.111 Therefore, it is recommended that providers formally
assess the health literacy of their patients. Common instruments to assess literacy levels
include the Rapid Estimate of Adult Literacy in Medicine, the Test of Functional Health
Literacy in Adults (TOFHLA), a shortened version of TOFHLA, and the Wide Range
Achievement Test (WRAT).112 The only health literacy measure for Spanish-speaking
16
patients that has been evaluated psychometrically is the TOFHLA, and further research is
needed to evaluate the performance of the shortened version of TOFHLA among Spanish
speakers.113 Research is also needed to evaluate these health literacy assessments among
other non-English speakers, especially Asians.
Several strategies have been suggested as ways for providers to improve their oral
and written communication with patients who have low health literacy, as follows: 114
• Reduce the content of discussions to what patients really needs to know; for
example, discussing how to manage a chronic disease as opposed to the disease’s
pathophysiology.
• Avoid use of medical jargon and instead, use commonly understood words.
• Use audiovisual aids to supplement oral and written instructions, such as diagrams
and pictures or short audio or videotaped instructions.
• Include interactive instructions by making patients do, write, say, or show
something to demonstrate their understanding. For example, ask patients to “teach
back” by repeating or restating the instructions as the patient might tell a friend.
• Test the readability of educational materials. Write materials at a sixth-grade
reading level or lower.
• Pretest materials to evaluate whether they are suitable for the intended audience.
Most studies examining the effectiveness of such communication strategies have
focused on their impact on patients’ knowledge, health behavior, biochemical markers,
measures of disease incidence, and use of preventive services.115 To date there have been
no studies examining the impact of communication strategies on health care service use or
health outcomes. The authors’ literature review found only five studies that used a
controlled research design to assess the impact of communication strategies by literacy
level, and these were limited to studying knowledge outcomes. For example, Michielutte
et al. compared the effects on patients’ knowledge of an illustrated brochure on cervical
cancer and a brochure using bulleted text only. The study found that patients with low
health literacy scores understood the illustrated materials better than the text-only
version.116
Limited English proficiency. According to the 2000 census, approximately 47 million
people in the U.S. speak a language other than English at home and over 21 million are
limited English proficient (LEP)—the term used by the U.S. Department of Health and
17
Human Services Office of Civil Rights to refer to people that have poor or no English
skills.117 Previous research has shown that LEP patients have worse access to care and give
poorer ratings of their care than English-speaking patients.118 Strategies used to surmount
language barriers include: bilingual providers who are proficient in the patient’s language
(often referred to as language-concordant encounters); in-person, third-party
interpretation, using dedicated, trained professional interpreters or ad-hoc interpreters,
such as patient’s family members, friends, or clinic staff; and remote, third-party
interpretation using technology.119
A nationally representative survey in 2001 found that only 49 percent of Hispanic
adults who said they needed medical interpretation always or usually got an interpreter.120
Of those who used an interpreter, 55 percent of patients worked with an ad-hoc staff
interpreter, 43 percent relied on a family member or friend, and only 1 percent had a
trained, dedicated medical interpreter. A 2003 survey in California found that, among
non-English-speaking patients who did not have a doctor who spoke their native
language, most (56%) did not rely on interpreters but rather did “the best they can in
English.”121 Only 9 percent had professional interpreters, while 15 percent used ad-hoc
interpreters and 19 percent depended on family members or friends for translation.
Language-concordant encounters. Language-concordant encounters result in better
communication, interpersonal processes, and health outcomes than language-discordant
encounters. Bilingual providers who can speak directly to their patients may develop
better rapport with them.122 Seijo et al. found that Spanish-speaking patients who saw
bilingual physicians asked more questions and had greater information recall of their
physician’s diagnosis, treatment, and recommendations than Spanish-speaking patients
who saw a monolingual (English-speaking) physician.123 Wilson et al. found that, among a
multilingual population, LEP patients with language-discordant physicians were more
likely to report problems understanding a medical situation than LEP patients with
language-concordant physicians.124 Finally, Perez-Stable et al. found that patients with
diabetes and hypertension reported better health outcomes when their physician spoke
their native language.125 One limitation of these studies was that, when considering
language-discordant encounters, they did not differentiate between interpreted and noninterpreted
encounters.
Studies comparing language-concordant encounters with interpreted encounters
have shown that patients in language-concordant encounters have better experiences with
care. For example, studies indicate that language-concordant encounters can result in
patients having a better understanding of their condition.126 Compared with language18
concordant encounters, patients communicating through an interpreter rated their
providers as less friendly, less respectful, less concerned for them as a person, and less likely
to make them feel comfortable.127 These studies did not distinguish between the types of
interpreter services available.
Interpreter services. The limited supply of bilingual providers has led health care
organizations to use interpreter services to bridge language gaps. Research has shown that
language-discordant patients report better experiences with care in interpreted encounters
than in non-interpreted encounters. Work by Baker et al. found that interpreter use
among Spanish-speaking patients led to greater understanding of their disease and
treatment.128 Spanish-speaking patients who communicated directly with their providers
but thought an interpreter should have been called were less satisfied with their provider’s
friendliness, concern, efforts to make them feel comfortable, and the amount of time spent
with them, compared with patients who had language-concordant encounters and those
who used an interpreter.127
When examining the impact of language services, it is important to distinguish
between professional interpreters and ad-hoc interpreters. Availability of professional
interpreters may reduce barriers to care among LEP patients. Jacobs et al. found that
professional interpreter services offered by a managed care organization increased the use
of clinical and preventive services among Portuguese- and Spanish-speaking patients.129
Tocher and Larson reported that the quality of care for diabetic LEP patients was as good,
if not better, than for their English-speaking counterparts when professional interpreter
services were available.130 The availability of staff interpreters has been shown to improve
compliance with follow-up appointments and overall satisfaction.131
Several studies have found communication problems with the use of ad-hoc
interpreters. Although such interpreters are bilingual, they are not formally trained as
interpreters and may lack appropriate knowledge of health-related terminology. As a
result, patients may receive insufficient information about potential side effects and be less
satisfied generally with their care.132 Elderkin-Thompson et al. reported that translation
errors occurred frequently when untrained nurse interpreters were used—approximately
half of the encounters observed had serious miscommunication problems that affected the
physician’s understanding of the patient’s symptoms and concerns.133 Flores et al. found
that, compared with errors committed by professional interpreters, errors committed by
ad-hoc interpreters were more likely to be errors of clinical significance.134 Finally, several
studies in a variety of different settings found significantly higher quality of patient–
19
physician interactions when professional interpreters were used instead of ad-hoc medical
staff or patients’ friends or family members.135
In addition to the potential for the problems discussed above, use of family members
or friends as translators may result in them filtering information to reduce emotional
distress for the patients.136 Furthermore, relaying medical information can be burdensome
on family members or friends—particularly children—and may lead to patient dependency
and passivity.137 There may be certain advantages to using adult family members as
interpreters, including their ability to offer support, help remember details, encourage
adherence to treatment, and increase knowledge in the family.138 Some studies have found
similar levels of patient satisfaction with professional and family member/friend translators,
while other studies indicate that patients prefer professional interpreters.139
Professional interpreter services may be in-person or remote. Remote interpreter
services rely on telephones, video links, or other systems. Some remote interpreter services
offer simultaneous interpretation through wireless headsets, based on the model in use at
the United Nations. One limitation of remote systems is that the interpreter cannot
capture non-verbal communication cues.140 Studies contrasting in-person and remote
interpreter services have had mixed results. Kuo and Fagan found that patients using
professional in-person interpreters were more satisfied than those using telephone
interpreters.141 On the other hand, Hornberger et al. found that remote-simultaneous
interpretation was more accurate than in-person interpretation, and Spanish-speaking
parents reported a significant preference for this interpretation style.142 One limitation of
this study was that training was provided only to the remote-simultaneous interpreters and
not to the in-person interpreters.
There is wide variation in the quality of interpreter services. Interpretation should
include proficiency in both languages, mastery of medical terminology in both languages,
memory skills, ability to negotiate a three-way conversation, and basic knowledge of
cultural aspects that can influence health. Moreover, bilingual providers should be
proficient in the target language, including knowledge of medical terminology.143 There
are currently no minimum requirements for medical interpreter training programs, but the
National Council on Interpreting in Health Care recommends at least 40 hours of
instruction on medical terminology, interpreting skills, ethical issues, role playing, and
cultural awareness.144
20
DISCUSSION
Our review of the literature demonstrates the importance of culturally competent, patientcentered
care to patient satisfaction, adherence, and outcomes. From the patient’s
perspective, the patient–provider interaction is a key, if not the primary, component of
quality medical care.
Yet, multiple studies in multiple settings have found that racial/ethnic minority
patients as well as those with low socioeconomic status or LEP report worse experiences
of care, compared with whites, those with higher socioeconomic status, and English
speakers. The causes of these health disparities remain unclear: they may result from bias
on the part of the providers, differences in patients’ expectations, or miscommunication
across biomedical or cultural divides.145 Organizational factors—such as the lack of
continuous care and pressure on providers to work quickly—may further erode the quality
of patient–provider interactions. Indeed, research has suggested that the pressure on
providers to make decisions in short periods of time may contribute to stereotyping of
patients.146
Given current knowledge, how can we improve the cultural competency of
providers and organizations? Incorporating the patient’s perspective into current quality
improvement efforts is an important step. The authors have identified five domains of care
that are best identified and measured “through the patient’s eyes.”
Patient–provider communication can be affected by such factors as differences in verbal
and non-verbal communication styles and explanatory models of illness and disease. Some
disparities in use of provider services emerge after the patient gets to the provider (in the
context of patient–provider interaction) rather than just difficulties in getting to the
provider, demonstrating that patient–provider communication is not unidirectional: just as
providers can influence patient behaviors, patients can influence provider behavior. For
example, if clients consistently demonstrate an in-ability to understand provider
instructions, the provider must make an effort to modify the means used to communicate
these instructions, such as illustrations or the adoption of terms and phrases that are
commonly used by that client’s group.
In terms of shared decision-making and respect for patient preferences, the authors found
that: 1) patient-centered care requires effective patient–provider partnerships and shared
decision-making among clinicians, patients, and families; 2) providers should work with
patients to select interventions that reflect patients’ values, weighing available treatments
with patient preferences; and 3) shared decision-making is influenced by the unique
21
characteristics of providers and patients, though there is a dearth in the understanding of
how this plays out. Focused, formative research is needed to examine patient–provider
relationships. Then, outcome-based interventions are needed to evaluate findings from the
formative research process.
In terms of experiences leading to trust or distrust, the authors found that: 1) patients
consider their provider’s interpersonal characteristics essential to competent care and take
them into consideration when determining the quality of the care they receive; 2) shared
decision-making between patients and providers is unlikely to occur without mutual trust;
3) patient participation in care is associated with greater collaboration and increased
satisfaction on the part of patients; and 4) few studies have looked at the underlying causes
of patient dissatisfaction and distrust among racial and ethnic minorities. Studies examining
the factors that influence patient–provider relationships should be undertaken. In
particular, evidenced-based studies are needed to gauge the extent to which trust
influences patient–provider relationships.
In the fourth domain, experiences of discrimination, findings indicate that: 1) compared
with white patients, racial and ethnic minorities perceive more racism in the medical care
system, tend to be less satisfied with their health care, and have higher levels of distrust in
their health care providers; 2) the inequalities in access and availability of care among racial
and ethnic minorities have not been definitively explained; 3) further research on the role
of racial bias or discrimination in the practice and delivery of health care is needed; and 4)
reliable and valid measures that can be used in large-scale, population-based studies are
needed to understand the causes and health effects of perceived discrimination.
For the fifth domain of care, linguistic competency, the authors examined
communication strategies for individuals with LEP and low health literacy. They found
that: 1) low health literacy is an important communication barrier, especially among
racial/ethnic minorities; 2) low health literacy can have consequences for health care
utilization, adherence to medical regimens, and ultimately health outcomes; 3) there are
different strategies for providers to improve their oral and written communication with
low health literacy patients; and 4) providers must be cognizant of their patients’ health
literacy needs so they can adapt their communication styles.
With respect to LEP patients, the authors found that: 1) the majority of LEP
patients in the U.S. still lack access to language services; 2) access to language services can
help improve LEP patients’ experiences with and access to care; 3) language-concordant
encounters result in better communication, interpersonal processes, and outcomes than
22
language-discordant encounters; and 4) language concordance between patients and
providers, as well as interpreting by trained professionals, are the most effective strategies
for communicating with LEP patients.
IMPLICATIONS
It is important for all sectors of the health care system to continuously monitor their own
patient populations with regard to the five domains of culturally competent care. In
addition, evaluations of cultural competency should be incorporated at all levels of care.
This should include cultural competency training and assessment of all people who are the
points of contact for clients, such as front-desk staff, providers, and others. Obtaining
patients’ perspective will provide thorough and in-depth knowledge of how to make
improvements. It is also critical that providers seek to understand the community and
socio-cultural environments that influence patients’ beliefs about illness and disease, as well
as the values that patients assign to various elements of the health system.
Recommendations for Providers and Health Systems
Patient–provider communication. The authors recommend that health care providers
and health systems continually monitor their patient populations through quantitative and
qualitative data collection methods. Specifically, data collection should include patients’
race/ethnicity, socioeconomic status, and linguistic abilities. Intake forms should be
modified to include questions regarding health literacy, English proficiency, language
spoken at home, and use of complementary and alternative medical practices.
Shared decision-making and respect for patient preferences. Providers should work with
patients to select treatments that take into account patients’ health-related values, weighing
available treatment options and patient preferences. To do so, they should adopt strategies
to determine patients’ explanatory models of common diseases. The health system should
implement policies to democratize the decision-making process among patients, their
families, and providers. Policies should also recognize the rights of health consumers to use
community-based agencies and programs in addition to conventional medical facilities.
Experiences leading to trust or distrust. It is important to evaluate the factors that affect
patients’ trust in their providers. Such factors may differ by racial/ethnic populations as well
as socioeconomic and insurance status. Providers should seek to create open channels of
communication and empower patients to speak up about issues affecting their trust.
Experiences of discrimination. Providers must be aware that racial and ethnic minority
patients might perceive discrimination or bias in the health care system. Specific
23
complaints of discrimination should be investigated and structural, system-wide changes
and improvements should be sought. Patients should be given opportunities to voice their
concerns about discrimination. Providers and health systems should use a modified version
of the “Experiences of Discrimination” measure for quality improvement purposes.
Linguistic competence. Health plans and providers should assess the health literacy and
language needs of their patient population, and adopt strategies that will improve their
written and oral communication with patients. The Joint Commission on Accreditation of
Healthcare Organizations (JCAHO) and National Committee for Quality Assurance
(NCQA) should require hospitals and health plans to collect data on their patients’ health
literacy and English proficiency as part of the accreditation process. Patient assessments of
care such as the CAHPS surveys should include dimensions related to communication
barriers for patients with low health literacy and limited English proficiency. Policymakers
should make health literacy assessments available in languages other than English and Spanish.
Insurers and policymakers should offer incentives for health care providers to
create services that improve care for patients with low health literacy and/or limited
English proficiency. Providers and health care systems should avoid the use of ad-hoc
interpreters to communicate with LEP patients, and instead rely on trained bilingual staff
and professional interpreters. Health plans and providers must monitor and assess the
quality of interpreter services.
Finally, medical schools and other health professional schools should incorporate
issues pertaining to communication with patients who have low health literacy and/or
limited English proficiency into their curricula. Medical schools should seek to increase
recruitment and retention of bilingual students.
Recommendations for Applied Research
Patient–provider communication. Research is needed to examine factors that influence
patient–provider interactions among diverse racial/ethnic groups. Further research is
needed to investigate the roles that patient navigators/coaches, community health
workers, parish nurses, interpreters, and case managers might play in influencing patient–
provider communication.
Respect for patient preferences and shared decision-making. Research is needed to
investigate the association between patients and providers’ race/ethnicity and their
treatment preferences. It is also important to examine what happens when patients and
providers disagree on treatment options. More research is needed to determine how
24
patients’ disclosure of their use of complementary or alternative medicine affects patient–
provider interactions. Finally, research is needed to examine the use of lay health workers
or other “cultural communicators” as facilitators to enhance the shared decision-making
process and improve the desired outcomes of the encounter.
Experiences leading to trust or distrust. Further research is needed to understand why
some patients prefer to be race concordant with their providers, and to gauge the effects of
racial concordance on access to care, quality of care, and health outcomes. Research is also
needed to explore and understand the root causes of distrust in providers, particularly
among Latino and African American patients, for which studies conducted in different
health care settings have yielded contradictory results. Finally, there is a need to explore
whether differences in levels of trust of providers among racial and ethnic minorities,
compared with whites, result from past experiences with the medical system or varying
expectations.
Experiences of discrimination. More research is needed to determine the placement of
responsibility (e.g., on providers, staff, or others) for discrimination in health care settings
and the characteristics of patients or providers/staff members associated with incidents of
reported bias. In addition, understanding the consequences of perceived discrimination or
bias on health is an important next step for future research. It should be possible to modify
the “Experiences of Discrimination” measure to evaluate health encounters.
Linguistic competence. More research on the mechanisms through which low health
literacy and limited English proficiency may affect health outcomes is needed. It is also
important to consider the implications for the health care system of patients who have
both low health literacy and limited English proficiency.
Further research is also needed to assess the impact of various communication
strategies on low health literacy patients, considering effects on health-related knowledge,
compliance with care regimens, and health outcomes. It is also important to examine the
reliability and validity of health literacy assessments that have been translated into
languages other than English.
For patients with limited English proficiency, it is important to evaluate various
translation methods, for example considering the cost-effectiveness of remote versus inperson
professional interpreter services or the appropriateness of using family members as
interpreters.
25
Incorporating Patients’ Perspectives of Cultural Competence into
Quality Measures
To measure and improve care, it will be important to incorporate patients’ perspectives of
cultural competence into existing measures of health care quality. In October 2005,
NCQA and U.S. News & World Report collaborated to rank hundreds of commercial,
Medicare, and Medicaid health plans.147 The NCQA is a private, nonprofit organization
that accredits and certifies a range of health care organizations. NCQA’s accreditation
program is voluntary; participating health plans submit information about member
satisfaction and clinical performance. Two of the five areas used to rank health plans were
access to care and communication with doctors. “Access to care” takes into account
patients’ reports of their experiences with getting needed care, getting care quickly, and
health plan customer service. “Communication with doctors” includes patients’ perceptions
on how well doctors communicate, as well as patient ratings of their personal doctor or
nurse, the specialist seen most often, and the overall health care received. These areas were
assessed using the CAHPS health plan survey version 3.0.
It would be possible to include additional survey questions to assess a health plan’s
cultural competency, at least from the patient’s perspective. For example, the authors
recommend that all health plans, including Medicare and Medicaid plans, routinely collect
the following socio-demographic data from their members: 1) race and ethnicity;
2) education; 3) preferred language; 4) English-language proficiency; 5) health literacy
level; and 6) acculturation level, or degree of assimilation to mainstream American culture.
It would also be important to ask patients about the race/ethnicity of their personal doctor
or nurse and the language spoken during most health encounters. For patients with limited
English proficiency, additional questions could be asked about the language services
available to them and about the quality of interpreter services. Furthermore, patients could
be asked whether they share in the decision-making process with their providers, given
the importance this holds for their adherence to recommended treatments. Given the
widespread use of CAM among all population groups, including whites, it is also
important to determine if providers are asking patients about their use of CAM. Additional
questions about trust and discrimination would provide understanding about patients’
experiences in these areas. Table 1 shows the cultural competency domains discussed in this
report and indicates whether there are existing CAHPS survey questions to solicit patients’
perspectives on these domains of care.
26
Table 1. Comparisons of Diverse Patients’ Health Care Experiences and
Quality of Care Domains Covered by the CAHPS Instruments*
Quality Domains
Diverse Patients’
Health Care Experiences
CAHPS
Questions
Patient–Provider Communication
􀂾 How Well Providers
Communicate
􀂾 How Well Providers
Understand and Respect
Patients’ Explanatory Models
of Illness and Disease
• Providers listen carefully.
• Providers explain things in a way
that is easy to understand.
• Providers spend enough time.
• Providers discuss patients’ health
beliefs and practices in a nonjudgmental
manner.
• Providers can communicate about
non-conventional or complementary
and alternative medical practices.
• Providers find common ground
between biomedical view of disease
and patients’ perspectives on their
illness.
YES
YES
YES
NO
NO
NO
Respect for Patients Preferences/
Shared Decision-Making
• Providers and staff show respect and
treat patients with dignity.
• Providers and staff display empathy
and show emotional support.
• Providers discuss pros and cons of
treatment options.
• Providers allow patients and family to
have a voice in treatment decisionmaking.
YES
NO
YES
YES
Experiences Leading to Patient
Trust or Distrust in Health Care
Systems and/or Providers
• Health Care staff treated patients in a
way that led to distrust.
• Providers treated patients in a way
that led to distrust.
• Patient had experiences with denial of
services that led to distrust.
• Patient had experiences with denial of
payment that led to distrust.
NO
NO
NO
NO
Experiences of Discrimination • Providers or staff treated patients with
disrespect because of patients’
racial/ethnic backgrounds.
• Providers or staff treated patients with
disrespect because of patients’
insurance status.
• Providers or staff treated patients with
disrespect because of patients’ ability
to speak English.
NO
NO
NO
27
Quality Domains
Diverse Patients’
Health Care Experiences
CAHPS
Questions
Linguistic Competence
􀂾 Effective Communication for
Individuals Who Have Low
Health Literacy Skills
􀂾 Effective Communication for
Individuals Who Have
Limited English Proficiency
• Providers and staff use plain language
and not medical jargon.
• Providers and staff provide written
health-related information that is easy
to understand.
• Providers and staff provide nonwritten
patient education materials
such as pictures, models, and
videotapes.
• Providers and staff give patients small
amount of information and repeat
information until patients understand.
• Providers and staff make patients feel
comfortable asking questions and
allow time for questions.
• Patients are able to make
appointments using the language they
are most comfortable with.
• Patients have access to professional,
culturally appropriate interpreters at
the time of visit.
• Interpreters are available at the
appropriate time and spend enough
time as needed.
• Gender-concordant interpreters are
available for sensitive issues.
• Interpreters provide accurate and
complete translations.
• Interpreters treat patients with
courtesy and respect.
• Written and non-written healthrelated
information is provided in the
patients’ native language.
NO
YES
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
* Some CAHPS surveys may include questions that partially cover these domains. Domains that are not covered, or
have limited coverage, have been designated as “NO.”
In collecting such data, it would be important for health plans to address any
methodological issues inherent in the survey design and sampling process. Often, problems
with data collection processes lead to under-representation of low-income, LEP, and low
health literacy patients, resulting in a sample skewed toward populations with higher
socioeconomic status—excluding patients who are most at risk.148
28
Efforts such as the collaboration between the NCQA and U.S. News and World
Report are important ways to give health consumers more information about health care
quality. The authors recommend going a step further to include patient reports and ratings
that will enable evaluations of the cultural and linguistic abilities of a health plan and its
providers. Improving patient–provider communication, shared decision-making, and trust
are quality issues that affect all patients—not just racial/ethnic minorities or patients with
low socioeconomic status. However, the lack of patient-centered care may affect certain
vulnerable populations disproportionately. Incorporating patients’ views on cultural
competency and linguistic services into current quality measures will provide important
information and give health plans and providers opportunities for improvement.
29
NOTES
1 B. Smedley, A. Stith, A. Nelson, eds. Unequal Treatment: Confronting Racial and Ethnic
Disparities in Health Care. Washington, D.C.: National Academy Press, 2002.
2 T. L. Cross, B. J. Bazron, K. W. Dennis et al., Toward a Culturally Competent System of Care,
Volume 1: Washington, D.C.: National Institute of Mental Health, Child and Adolescent Service
System Program (CASSP) Technical Assistance Center, Georgetown University Child
Development Center, 1999.
3 Committee on Quality Health Care in America, Crossing the Quality Chasm. Washington,
D.C.: National Academy Press, 2001.
4 I. McWhinney, “The Need for a Transformed Clinical Method,” in M. Stewart, D. Roter,
eds. Communicating with Medical Patients. London: Sage,1989.
5 C. Bethell, K. Carter, D. L. Latzke et al., Measuring and Interpreting Health Care Quality Across
Culturally-Diverse Populations: A Focus on Consumer-Reported Indicators of Health Care Quality.
Portland: Foundation for Accountability, 2003.
6 Q. Ngo-Metzger, M. P. Massagli, B. Clarridge et al., “Health Care Experiences of Limited-
English Proficient Chinese and Vietnamese Americans,” Journal of General Internal Medicine, 2003
18(S):184.
7 C. M. Ashton, P. Haidet, D. A. Paterniti et al., “Racial and Ethnic Disparities in the Use of
Health Services: Bias, Preferences, or Poor Communication?” Journal of General Internal Medicine,
2003 18(2):146–152.
8 B. Smedley, A. Stith, A. Nelson, 2002; S. A. Fox and J. A. Stein, “The Effect of Physician–
Patient Communication on Mammography Utilization by Different Ethnic Groups,” Medical Care,
1991 29(11):1065–1082; K. Fiscella, P. Franks, M. P. Doescher et al., “Disparities in Health Care
by Race, Ethnicity, and Language Among the Insured: Findings from a National Sample,” Medical
Care, 2002 40(1):52–59; P. Franks, K. Fiscella, and S. Meldrum, “Racial Disparities in the
Content of Primary Care Office Visits,” Journal of General Internal Medicine, 2005 20:599–603; A.
L. Long, V. W. Chang, S. A. Ibrahim et al., “Update on the Health Disparities Literature,” Annals
of Internal Medicine, 2004 141:805–812.
9 B. L. Lambert, R. L. Street, D. J. Cegala et al., “Provider–Patient Communication, Patient-
Centered Care, and the Mangle of Practice, Health Communication, 1997 9(1):27–43.
10 U.S. Department of Health and Human Services, Assuring Cultural Competence in Health
Care: Recommendations for National Standards and an Outcomes-Focused Research Agenda
(CLAS). Rockville: DHHS, Agency for Health care Research and Quality, 2001; U.S.
Department of Health and Human Services, National Healthcare Disparities Report. Rockville:
DHHS, Agency for Health care Research and Quality, 2003.
11 U.S. Department of Health and Human Services, 2003.
12 B. L. Lambert, R. L. Street, D. J. Cegala et al., 1997; U.S. Department of Health and
Human Services, 2003; D. L. Roter and J. A. Hall, Doctors Talking with Patients/Patients Talking
with Doctors: Improving Communication in Medical Visits. Westport: Auburn House, 1992; R. L.
Street, Jr., “Information-Giving in Medical Consultations: The Influence of Patients’
Communicative Styles and Personal Characteristics,” Social Science and Medicine, 1991 32(5):541–548;
M. Stewart, “Effective Physician–Patient Communication and Health Outcomes: A Review,”
Canadian Medical Association Journal, 1995 152:1423–1433; S. Willems, S. De Maesschalck, M.
Deveugele et al., “Socio-Economic Status of the Patient and Doctor-Patient Communication:
Does it Make a Difference?” Patient Education and Counseling, 2005 56(2):139–146.
30
13 U.S. Department of Health and Human Services, 2001; U.S. Department of Health and
Human Services, 2003.
14 K. S. Collins, D. Hughes, M. M. Doty et al., Diverse Communities, Common Concerns:
Assessing the Health Quality for Minority Americans. New York: The Commonwealth Fund, 2002.
15 Q. Ngo-Metzger, A. T. R. Legedza, and R. S. Phillips, “Asian Americans’ Reports of
Their Health Care Experiences: Results of a National Survey,” Journal of General Internal Medicine,
2004 19:111–119.
16 R. L. Johnson, D. Roter, N. R. Powe et al., “Patient Race/Ethnicity and Quality of
Patient–Physician Communication During Medical Visits,” American Journal of Public Health, 2004
94(12):2084–2090.
17 U.S. Department of Health and Human Services, 2003.
18 K. S. Collins, D. Hughes, M. M. Doty et al., 2002.
19 R. L. Street, Jr., 1991.
20 R. L. Street, Jr., 1991; K. Fiscella, M. A. Goodwin, and K. C. Stange, “Does Patient
Educational Level Affect Office Visits to Family Physicians?” Journal of the National Medical
Association, 2002 94(3):157–165.
21 W. D. Marelich and D. A. Murphy, “Effects of Empowerment Among HIV-Positive
Women on the Patient–Provider Relationship,” AIDS Care, 2003 15(4):475–481.
22 E. Krupat, J. T. Irish, L. E. Kasten et al., “Patient Assertiveness and Physician Decision-
Making Among Older Breast Cancer Patients,” Social Science and Medicine, 1999 49(4):449–457.
23 J. L. Murray-Garcia, J. V. Selby, J. Schmittdiel et al., “Racial and Ethnic Differences in a
Patient Survey: Patients’ Values, Ratings, and Reports Regarding Physician Primary Care
Performance in a Large Health Maintenance Organization,” Medical Care, 2000 38(3):300–310; A.
M. Napoles-Springer, J. Santoyo, K. Houston et al., “Patients’ Perceptions of Cultural Factors
Affecting the Quality of their Medical Encounters,” Health Expectations, 2005 8(1):4–17.
24 M. Hurtado, K. Frazier, A. Levin et al., Valued Aspects of Ambulatory Care: Comparing Patients
and Providers Based on Office Visit Accounts. Paper presented at: Poster presentation at the Academy
Health Annual Research Meeting, Boston, 2005.
25 Q. Ngo-Metzger, A. T. R. Legedza, and R. S. Phillips, 2004; S. Saha, J. J. Arbelaez, and L.
A. Cooper, “Patient–Physician Relationships and Racial Disparities in the Quality of Health
Care,” American Journal of Public Health, 2003 93(10):1713–1719.
26 K. K. Shore, R. E. Levine, J. Mitchell et al., Perceptions of Specific Clinician Behaviors Linked to
Health Care Quality. Paper presented at: Poster presentation at the Academy Health Annual
Research Meeting, Boston, 2005.
27 S. Saha, J. J. Arbelaez, and L. A. Cooper, 2003; T. C. Collins, J. A. Clark, L. A. Petersen et
al., “Racial Differences in How Patients Perceive Physician Communication Regarding Cardiac
Testing,” Medical Care, 2002 40(1 Suppl):I27–34.
28 L. J. Kirmayer, “Cultural Variations in the Clinical Presentation of Depression and Anxiety:
Implications for Diagnosis and Treatment,” Journal of Clinical Psychiatry, 2001 62 Suppl 13:22–28,
discussion 29–30.
29 A. Kleinman, Patients and Healers in the Context of Culture. Berkeley: University of California
Press, 1980; M. Pounds, “The Explanatory Model,” Unpublished paper, 1985.
31
30 A. Kleinman, The Illness Narratives: Suffering, Healing, and the Human Condition. New York:
Basic Books, 1988.
31 M. Kagawa-Singer and S. Kassim-Lakha, “A Strategy to Reduce Cross-Cultural
Miscommunication and Increase the Likelihood of Improving Health Outcomes,” Academic
Medicine, 2003 78(6):577–587.
32 T. W. Day, “Duluth Family Practice Residency Program,” Minnesota Medicine, 1992
75(3):15–22; K. Y. Pang, “Symptom Expression and Somatization Among Elderly Korean
Immigrants,” Journal of Clinical Geropsychology, 2000 6(3):199–212.
33 M. Kagawa-Singer and S. Kassim-Lakha, 2003.
34 Ibid.
35 D. M. Eisenberg, R. C. Kessler, C. Foster et al., “Unconventional Medicine in the United
States. Prevalence, Costs, and Patterns of Use,” New England Journal of Medicine, 1993 328(4):246–
252.
36 D. M. Eisenberg, R. B. Davis, S. L. Ettner et al., “Trends in Alternative Medicine Use in
the United States, 1990–1997: Results of a Follow-Up National Survey,” Journal of the American
Medical Association, 1998 280(18):1569–1575; P. M. Barnes, E. Powell-Griner, K. McFann et al.,
“Complementary and Alternative Medicine Use Among Adults: United States, 2002,” Advance
Data, 2004(343):1–19.
37 P. M. Barnes, E. Powell-Griner, K. McFann et al., 2004.
38 H. Ni, C. Simile, and A. M. Hardy, “Utilization of Complementary and Alternative
Medicine by United States Adults: Results from the 1999 National Health Interview Survey,”
Medical Care, 2002 40(4):353–358; R. B. Bausell, W. L. Lee, and B. M. Berman, “Demographic
and Health-Related Correlates to Visits to Complementary and Alternative Medical Providers,”
Medical Care, 2001 39(2):190–196; J. A. Astin, “Why Patients Use Alternative Medicine,” Journal
of the American Medical Association, 1998 279(19):1548–1553.
39 P. M. Barnes, E. Powell-Griner, K. McFann et al., 2004.
40 D. M. Eisenberg, R. C. Kessler, C. Foster et al., 1998; M. A. Richardson and S. E. Straus,
“Complementary and Alternative Medicine: Opportunities and Challenges for Cancer
Management and Research,” Seminars in Oncology, 2002 29(6):531–545; J. S. Cauffield, “The
Psychosocial Aspects of Complementary and Alternative Medicine,” Pharmacotherapy, 2000
20(11):1289–1294.
41 S. Pappas and A. Perlman, “Complementary and Alternative Medicine. The Importance of
Doctor–Patient Communication,” Medical Clinics of North America, 2002 86(1):1–10; A. Robinson
and M. R. McGrail, “Disclosure of CAM Use to Medical Practitioners: A Review of Qualitative
and Quantitative Studies. Complementary Therapies in Medicine, 2004 12(2–3):90–98.
42 D. M. Eisenberg, R. C. Kessler, C. Foster et al., 1993.
43 A. Hsiao, R. D. Hays, G. W. Ryan et al., “A Self-Report of Measure of Clinicians’
Orientation Toward Integrative Medicine,” Health Services Research, 2005 40:1553–1569.
44 Institute of Medicine, “Envisioning the National Health Care Quality Report,” M. P.
Hurtado, E. K. Swift, and J. M. Corrigan, eds., Washington D.C.: National Academy Press, 2001.
45 E. A. Berlin and W. C. Fowkes, Jr., “A Teaching Framework for Cross-Cultural Health
Care. Application in Family Practice,” Western Journal of Medicine, 1983 139(6):934–938; J. H.
Pfefferling, “A Cultural Prescription for Medicocentrism.” In L. Eisenberg and A. Kleinman, eds.,
The Relevance of Social Science for Medicine. Dordrecht: D. Reidel Publishing Co. 1980:197–222; T.
32
L. Shelton and J. S. Stepanel, Family-Centered Care for Children Needing Special Health and
Developmental Services. Bethesda: Association for the Care of Children’s Health, 1994; C. J. Scott,
“Enhancing Patient Outcomes Through an Understanding of Intercultural Medicine: Guidelines
for the Practitioner,” Maryland Medical Journal, 1997 46(4):175–180; K. S. Powers and J. S.
Rubenstein, “Family Presence During Invasive Procedures in the Pediatric Intensive Care Unit: A
Prospective Study,” Archives of Pediatric and Adolescent Medicine, 1999 153(9):955–958; E. Vermeire,
H. Hearnshaw, P. Van Royen, and J. Denekens, “Patient Adherence to Treatment: Three
Decades of Research. A Comprehensive Review,” Journal of Clinical Pharmacy and Therapeutics,
2001 26(5):331–342.
46 M. Stewart, 1995; S. H. Kaplan, S. Greenfield, J. E. Ware, Jr., “Assessing the Effects of
Physician-Patient Interactions on the Outcomes of Chronic Disease,” Medical Care, 1989 27(3
Suppl):S110–127.
47 U.S. Department of Health and Human Services, 2003.
48 S. A. Fox and J. A. Stein, 1991; W. J. Strickland and D. L. Strickland, “Partnership Building
with Special Populations,” Family and Community Health, 1996 19(3):21–34; D. L. Roter, M.
Stewart, S. M. Putnam et al., “Communication Patterns of Primary Care Physicians,” Journal of the
American Medical Association, 1997 277(4):350–356; B. McKinstry, “Do Patients Wish to be
Involved in Decision Making in the Consultation? A Cross Sectional Survey with Video
Vignettes,” BMJ, 2000 321(7265):867–871; C. Beeker, J. M. Kraft, R. Goldman et al., “Strategies
for Increasing Colorectal Cancer Screening Among African American Women,” Journal of
Psychosocial Oncology, 2001 19:113–132.
49 U.S. Department of Health and Human Services, 2003.
50 K. S. Collins, D. Hughes, M. M. Doty et al., 2002.
51 L. Cooper-Patrick, J. J. Gallo, J. J. Gonzales et al., “Race, Gender, and Partnership in the
Patient–Physician Relationship,” Journal of the American Medical Association, 1999 282(6):583–589.
52 D. L. Roter, M. Stewart, S. M. Putnam et al., 1997.
53 B. Smedley, A. Stith, A. Nelson, eds., 2002; M. van Ryn and J. Burke,” The Effect of
Patient Race and Socio-Economic Status on Physicians’ Perceptions of Patients,” Social Science and
Medicine, 2000 50(6):813–828.
54 P. E. Schofield, I. Juraskova, and P. N. Butow, “How Oncologists Discuss Complementary
Therapy Use with Their Patients: An Audio-Tape Audit,” Supportive Care in Cancer, 2003
11(6):348–355.
55 B. Sleath, R. H. Rubin, W. Campbell et al., “Ethnicity and Physician–Older Patient
Communication About Alternative Therapies,” Journal of Alternative and Complementary Medicine,
2001 7(4):329–335.
56 A. Robinson and M. R. McGrail, 2004; K. Tasaki, G. Maskarinec, D. M. Shumay et al.,
“Communication Between Physicians and Cancer Patients About Complementary and Alternative
Medicine: Exploring Patients’ Perspectives,” Psychooncology, 2002 11(3):212–220; J. K. Rao, R.
Arick, K. Mihaliak, and M. Weinberger, “Using Focus Groups to Understand Arthritis Patients’
Perceptions About Unconventional Therapy,” Arthritis Care and Research, 1998 11(4):253–260; H.
Boon, J. B. Brown, A. Gavin et al., “Breast Cancer Survivors’ Perceptions of
Complementary/Alternative Medicine (CAM): Making the Decision to Use or Not to Use,”
Qualitative Health Research, 1999 9(5):639–653.
33
57 K. Tasaki, G. Maskarinec, D. M. Shumay et al., 2002; S. R. Adler and J. R. Fosket,
“Disclosing Complementary and Alternative Medicine Use in the Medical Encounter: A
Qualitative Study in Women with Breast Cancer,” Journal of Family Practice, 1999 48(6):453–458.
58 J. I. Boullatta and A. M. Nace, “Safety Issues with Herbal Medicine,” Pharmacotherapy, 2000
20(3):257–269; S. Brent, H. Goldberg, A. Padula et al., “Spontaneous Bleeding Associated with
Ginkgo Biloba,” Journal of General Internal Medicine, 2005 20:657–661; J. O. Rivera and K. M.
Verma, “Hidden Problems with Herbal Remedies,” Pharmacotherapy, 2000 20(7):874–876; R. B.
Saper, S. N. Kales, J. Paquin et al., “Heavy Metal Content of Ayurvedic Herbal Medicine
Products,” Journal of the American Medical Association, 2004 292(23):2868–2873; K. Shapiro and W.
C. Gong, “Natural Products Used for Diabetes,” Journal of the American Pharmaceutical Association,
2002 42:217–226.
59 S. Pappas and A. Perlman, 2002.
60 D. H. Thom and B. Campbell, “Patient-Physician Trust: An Exploratory Study,” Journal of
Family Practice, 1997 44(2):169–176; J. E. Montgomery, J. T. Irish, I. B. Wilson et al., “Primary
Care Experiences of Medicare Beneficiaries, 1998 to 2000,” Journal of General Internal Medicine,
2004 19(10):991–998.
61 K. A. Hunt, A. Gaba, and R. Lavizzo-Mourey, “Racial and Ethnic Disparities and
Perceptions of Health Care: Does Health Plan Type Matter?” Health Services Research, 2005
40(2):551–576.
62 D. H. Thom, R. L. Kravitz, R. A. Bell et al., “Patient Trust in the Physician: Relationship
to Patient Requests,” Family Practice, 2002 19(5):476–483.
63 D. H. Thom and B. Campbell, 1997.
64 R. A. Bell, R. L. Kravitz, D. Thom et al., “Unmet Expectations for Care and the Patient–
Physician Relationship,” Journal of General Internal Medicine, 2002 17(11):817–824.
65 D. H. Thom and B. Campbell, 1997; D. Mechanic and M. Schlesinger, “The Impact of
Managed Care on Patients’ Trust in Medical Care and Their Physicians,” Journal of the American
Medical Association, 1996 275(21):1693–1697; J. Murphy, H. Chang, J. E. Montgomery et al.,
“The Quality of Physician–Patient relationships. Patients’ Experiences 1996–1999,” Journal of
Family Practice, 2001 50(2):123–129.
66 J. L. Murray-Garcia, J. V. Selby, J. Schmittdiel et al., 2000; K. A. Hunt, A. Gaba, R.
Lavizzo-Mourey, 2005; J. Schnittker, “Social Distance in the Clinical Encounter: Interactional and
Sociodemographic Foundations for Mistrust in Physicians,” Social Psychology Quarterly, 2004
67(3):217–235; R. Weech-Maldonado, L. S. Morales, K. Spritzer et al., “Racial and Ethnic
Differences in Parents’ Assessments of Pediatric Care in Medicaid Managed Care,” Health Services
Research, 2001 36(3):575–594; L. S. Morales, W. E. Cunningham, J. A. Brown et al., “Are Latinos
Less Satisfied with Communication by Health Care Providers?: Journal of General Internal Medicine,
1999;14(7):409–417; L. S. Morales, S. P. Reise, and R. D. Hays, “Evaluating the Equivalence of
Health Care Ratings by Whites and Hispanics,” Medical Care, 2000 38(5):517–527; D. A. Taira,
D. G. Safran, T. B. Seto et al., “Asian-American Patient Ratings of Physician Primary Care
Performance,” Journal of General Internal Medicine, 1997 12(4):237–242; L. S. Meredith and A. L.
Siu, “Variation and Quality of Self-Report Health Data. Asians and Pacific Islanders Compared
with Other Ethnic Groups,” Medical Care, 1995 33(11):1120–1131; T. A. LaVeist, K. J.
Nickerson, and J. V. Bowie, “Attitudes About Racism, Medical Mistrust, and Satisfaction with
Care Among African American and White Cardiac Patients,” Medical Care Research and Review,
2000 57 Suppl. 1:146–161.
67 K. A. Hunt, A. Gaba, and R. Lavizzo-Mourey, 2005.
34
68 R. Weech-Maldonado, L. S. Morales, K. Spritzer et al., 2001.
69 M. D. Wong, S. M. Asch, R. M. Andersen et al., “Racial and Ethnic Differences in Patients’
Preferences for Initial Care by Specialists,” American Journal of Medicine, 2004 116(9):613–620.
70 J. E. Montgomery, J. T. Irish, I. B. Wilson et al., 2004.
71 A. S. O’ Malley and C. B. Forrest, “Beyond the Examination Room: Primary Care
Performance and The Patient–Physician Relationship for Low-Income Women,” Journal of
General Internal Medicine, 2002 17(1):66–74.
72 J. Hsu, J. Schmittdiel, E. Krupat et al., “Patient Choice. A randomized Controlled Trial of
Provider Selection,” Journal of General Internal Medicine, 2003 18(5):319–325.
73 K. A. Hunt, A. Gaba, and R. Lavizzo-Mourey, 2005.
74 Community Tracking Study. Household Survey. Survey Methodology Report (Round One).
Washington D.C.: Center for Studying Health System Change, 1998. Technical Publication No. 15.
75 C. M. Tucker, K. C. Herman, T. R. Pederson et al., “Cultural Sensitivity in Physician–
Patient Relationships: Perspectives of an Ethnically Diverse Sample of Low-Income Primary Care
Patients,” Medical Care, 2003 41:859–70; D. A. Barr and S. F. Wanat, “Listening to Patients:
Cultural and Linguistic Barriers to Health Care Access,” Family Medicine, 2005 37:199–204; E. A.
Jacobs, I. Rolle, C. E. Ferrans et al., “Understanding African Americans’ Trust in Physicians,”
Journal of General Internal Medicine, 2006 (in press).
76 V. B. Sheppard, R. E. Zambrana, and A. S. O’Malley, “Providing Health Care to Low-
Income Women: A Matter of Trust,” Family Practice, 2004 21(5):484–491.
77 M. A. Rodriguez, S. S. Quiroga and H. M. Bauer, “Breaking the Silence. Battered
women’s Perspectives on Medical Care,” Archives of Family Medicine, 1996 5(3):153–158; M. A.
Rodriguez, H. M. Bauer, Y. Flores-Ortiz et al., “Factors Affecting Patient-Physician
Communication for Abused Latina and Asian Immigrant Women,” Journal of Family Practice, 1998
47(4):309–311; T. A. Battaglia, E. Finley, and J. M. Liebschutz, “Survivors of Intimate Partner
Violence Speak Out: Trust in the Patient–Provider Relationship,” Journal of General Internal
Medicine, 2003 18(8):617–623.
78 J. Z. Ayanian, P. D. Cleary, J. S. Weissman et al., “The Effect of Patients’ Preferences on
Racial Differences in Access to Renal Transplantation,” New England Journal of Medicine, 1999
341(22):1661–1669.
79 M. D. Wong, S. M. Asch, R. M. Andersen et al., 2004.
80 T. A. Laveist and A. Nuru-Jeter, “Is Doctor-Patient Race Concordance Associated with
Greater Satisfaction with Care?” Journal of Health and Social Behavior, 2002 43(3):296–306.
81 W. D. King, M. D. Wong, M. F. Shapiro et al., “Does Racial Concordance Between HIVPositive
Patients and Their Physicians Affect the Time to Receipt of Protease Inhibitors?” Journal
of General Internal Medicine, 2004 19(11):1146–1153.
82 J. Z. Ayanian, I. S. Udvarhely, C. A. Gatsonis et al., “Racial Differences in the
Revascularization Procedures After Angiography,” Journal of the American Medical Association,
1993:2642–2646; A. L. Franks, D. S. Mays, N. K. Wegner et al., “Racial Differences in the Use of
Invasive Coronary Procedures After Acute Myocardial Infarction in Medicare Beneficiaries,”
Ethnicity and Disease, Summer 1993 3(3):213–220; W. H. Giles, R. F. Anda, M. L. Casper et al.,
“Race and Sex Differences in Rates of Invasive Cardiac Procedures in U.S. Hospitals,” Archives of
Internal Medicine, 1995 155(3):318–324; J. Whittle, J. Coniglaro, C. B. Good et al., “Racial
Differences in the Use of Invasive Cardiovascular Procedures in the Department of Veterans
Affairs Medical System,” New England Journal of Medicine. 1993 329(9):621–627.
35
83 T. E. King and P. Brunetta, “Racial Disparity in Rates of Surgery for Lung Cancer,” New
England Journal of Medicine, 1999 341(16):1231–1233; R. Prislin, J. A. Dyer, C. H. Blakely et al.,
“Immunization Status and Sociodemographic Characteristics: The Mediating Role of Beliefs,
Attitudes, and Perceived Control,” American Journal of Public Health, 1998 88(12):1821–1826.
84 W. D. King, M. D. Wong, M. F. Shapiro et al., 2004.
85 T. A. LaVeist, K. J. Nickerson, and J. V. Bowie, 2000.
86 R. Prislin, J. A. Dyer, C. H. Blakely et al., 1998.
87 W. D. King, M. D. Wong, M. F. Shapiro et al., 2004.
88 Giles, W.H., R.F. Andar, M.L. Casper, L.G. Escobedo, and H.A. Taylor, “Race and Sex
Differences in Rates of Invasive Cardiac Procedures in U.S. Hospitals,” Archives of Internal
Medicine, February 13, 1995, 155:318–24.
89 King, T.E. and P. Brunetta, “Racial Disparity in Rates of Surgery for Lung Cancer,” New
England Journal of Medicine, October 1999, 341:1231–33.
90 B. S. Thornburn, L. M. Bogart, and D. L. Delahanty, “Health-Related Correlates of
Perceived Discrimination in HIV Care,” AIDS Patient Care STDS, 2004 18(1):19–26.
91 N. Krieger, K. Smith, D. Naishadham et al., “Experiences of Discrimination: Validity and
Reliability of a Self-Report Measure for Population Health Research on Racism and Health,”
Social Science & Medicine, 2005 61(7):1576–1596.
92 Consumer Assessment of Health Plans (CAHPS). Fact sheet. AHRQ Publication No. 00-
PO47. Agency for Health Care Research and Quality. Available at:
http://www.ahrq.gov/qual/cahpfact.htm. Accessed August 7, 2002.
93 K. S. Collins, D. Hughes, M. M. Doty et al., 2002.
94 R. D. Hays, P. Johansson, B. Weidmer et al., “Psychometric Assessment of an Experience
with Care Survey for American Indians,” Paper presented at: Society for General Internal
Medicine Annual Meeting, 2006, Los Angeles, CA.
95 T. Goode and W. Jones, “Linguistic Competence: Definition,” 2004. Washington, DC:
National Center for Cultural Competence, Georgetown University. Available at:
http://www11.georgetown.edu/research/gucchd/nccc/foundations/frameworks.html. Accessed
September 20, 2006.
96 U.S. Department of Health and Human Services. Healthy People 2010. Available at:
http://www.healthypeople.gov/lhi. Accessed December 7, 2005.
97 Center for Health Care Strategies, “What is health literacy?” Fact sheet 1 of 9. Available at:
http://www.chcs.org/publications3960/publications_show.htm?doc_id=291711. Accessed Dec. 6, 2005.
98 I. Kirsch, A. Jungeblut, L. Jenkins et al., “Adult Literacy in America: A First Look at the
Findings of the National Adult Literacy Survey,” Washington, DC: Office of the Educational
Research and Improvement, US Department of Education, 1993.
99 M. K. Paasche-Orlow, R. M. Parker, J. A. Gazmararian et al., “The Prevalence of Limited
Health Literacy,” Journal of General Internal Medicine, 2005 20(2):175–184.
100 M. V. Williams, D. W. Baker, R. M. Parker et al., “Relationship of Functional Health
Literacy to Patients’ Knowledge of Their Chronic Disease. A Study of Patients with Hypertension
and Diabetes,” Archives of Internal Medicine, 1998 158(2):166–172; T. L. Scott, J. A. Gazmararian,
M. V. Williams et al., “Health Literacy and Preventive Health Care Use Among Medicare
Enrollees in a Managed Care Organization,” Medical Care, 2002 40(5):395–404.
36
101 S. C. Kalichman, B. Ramachandran, and S. Catz, “Adherence to Combination
Antiretroviral Therapies in HIV Patients of Low Health Literacy,” Journal *of General Internal
Medicine, 1999 14(5):267–273; D. W. Baker, R. M. Parker, M. V. Williams et al., “The Health
Care Experience of Patients with Low Literacy,” Archives of Family Medicine, 1996 5(6):329–334;
D. W. Baker, R. M. Parker, M. V. Williams et al., “The Relationship of Patient Reading Ability
to Self-Reported Health and Use of Health Services,” American Journal of Public Health 1997
87(6):1027–1030; D. Schillinger, K. Grumbach, J. Piette et al., “Association of Health Literacy
with Diabetes Outcomes,” Journal of the American Medical Association, 2002 288(4):475–482.
102 American Medical Association Ad Hoc Committee on Health Literacy for the Council on
Scientific Affairs, “Health Literacy: Report of the Council on Scientific Affairs,” Journal of the
American Medical Association, 1999 281(6):552–557.
103 M. V. Williams, R. M. Parker, and D. W. Baker, “Inadequate Functional Health Literacy
Among Patients at Two Public Hospitals,” Journal of the American Medical Association, 1995
274(21):1677–1682.
104 D. Schillinger, A. Bindman, F. Wang et al., “Functional Health Literacy and the Quality of
Physician–Patient Communication Among Diabetes Patients,” Patient Education and Counseling,
2004 52(3):315–323.
105 M. V. Williams, T. Davis, R. M. Parker et al., “The Role of Health Literacy in Patient–
Physician Communication,” Family Medicine, 2002 34(5):383–389.
106 S. C. Kalichman, B. Ramachandran, and S. Catz, 1999; E. J. J. Mayeaux, P. W. Murphy,
C. Arnold et al., “Improving Patient Education for Patients with Low Literacy Skills,” American
Family Physician, 1996 53(1):205–211.
107 Center for Health Care Strategies, “Health Literacy and Understanding Medical
Information,” Fact sheet 4 of 9. Available at:
http://www.chcs.org/publications3960/publications_show.htm?doc_id=291711. Accessed
December 6, 2005.
108 American Medical Association Ad Hoc Committee on Health Literacy for the Council on
Scientific Affairs, 1999.
109 D. Schillinger, A. Bindman, F. Wang et al., 2004.
110 M. V. Williams, T. Davis, R. M. Parker et al., 2002; G. G. Mayer and M. Villaire, “Low
Health Literacy and Its Effects on Patient Care,” Journal of Nursing Administration, 2004
34(10):440–442.
111 M. V. Williams, T. Davis, R. M. Parker et al., 2002.
112 D. A. Dewalt, N. D. Berkman, S. Sheridan et al., “Literacy and Health Outcomes: A
Systematic Review of the Literature,” Journal of General Internal Medicine, 2004 19(12):1228–1239.
113 R. M. Parker, D. W. Baker, M. V. Williams et al., “The Test of Functional Health
Literacy in Adults: A New Instrument for Measuring Patients’ Literacy Skills,” Journal of General
Internal Medicine, 1995 10(10):537–541; A. C. Aguirre, N. Ebrahim, and J. A. Shea, “Performance
of English and Spanish S-TOFHLA Among Publicly Insured Medicaid and Medicare Patients,”
Patient Education and Counseling, 2005 56(3):332–339.
114 American Medical Association Ad Hoc Committee on Health Literacy for the Council on
Scientific Affairs, 1999; M. V. Williams, T. Davis, R. M. Parker et al., 2002; Center for Health
Care Strategies, “Strategies to Assist Low-Literate Health Care Consumers,” Available at:
http://www.chcs.org/publications3960/publications_show.htm?doc_id=291711. Accessed
December 6, 2005.
37
115 M. Pignone, D. A. Dewalt, S. Sheridan et al., “Interventions to Improve Health Outcomes
for Patients with Low Literacy. A Systematic Review,” Journal of General Internal Medicine, 2005
20(2):185–192.
116 R. Michielutte, J. Bahnson, M. B. Dignan et al., “The Use of Illustrations and Narrative
Text Style to Improve Readability of a Health Education Brochure,” Journal of Cancer Education,
1992 7(3):251–260.
117 U.S. Census Bureau, Census 2000 Summary File 3, Matrices P19, P20, PCT13, and PCT14.
Washington, D.C., 2000.
118 R. Weech-Maldonado, L. S. Morales, K. Spritzer et al., 2001; L. S. Morales, W. E.
Cunningham, J. A. Brown et al., 1999; J. M. Solis, G. Marks, M. Garcia et al., “Acculturation,
Access to Care, and Use of Preventive Services by Hispanics: Findings from HHANES 1982–84,”
American Journal of Public Health, 1990 80(Suppl.):11–19; J. A. Stein and S. A. Fox, “Language
Preference as an Indicator of Mammography Use Among Hispanic Women,” Journal of the
National Cancer Institute, 1990 82(21):1715–1716; C. L. Timmins, “The Impact of Language
Barriers on the Health Care of Latinos in the United States: A Review of the Literature and
Guidelines for Practice,” Journal of Midwifery & Women’s Health, 2002 47(2):80–96; B. Kirkman-
Liff and D. Mondragon, “Language of Interview: Relevance for Research of Southwest
Hispanics,” American Journal of Public Health, 1991 81(11):1399–1404; O. Carrasquillo, E. J. Orav,
T. A. Brennan et al., “Impact of Language Barriers on Patient Satisfaction in an Emergency
Department,” Journal of General Internal Medicine, 1999 14(2):82–87; R. Weech-Maldonado, L. S.
Morales, M. Elliott et al., “Race/Ethnicity, Language, and Patients’ Assessments of Care in
Medicaid Managed Care,” Health Services Research, 2003 38(3):789–808.
119 Grantmakers in Health (GIH), In the Right Words: Addressing Language and Culture in
Providing Health Care, Washington, D.C., 2003(Issue Brief #18).
120 M. M. Doty, Hispanic Patients’ Double Burden: Lack of Health Care Insurance and Limited
English, New York: The Commonwealth Fund. 2003.
121 New California Media (NCM), Bridging Language Barriers in Health Care: Public Opinion
Survey of California Immigrants from Latin America, Asia and the Middle East. Los Angeles, CA: The
California Endowment, 2003.
122 Grantmakers in Health (GIH), 2003.
123 R. Seijo, H. Gomez, and J. Freidenberg, “Language as a Communication Barrier in
Medical Care for Hispanic Patients,” Hispanic Journal of Behavioral Sciences, 1991, 13(4):363–376.
124 E. Wilson, A. H. Chen, K. Grumbach et al., “Effects of Limited English Proficiency and
Physician Language on Health Care Comprehension,” Journal of General Internal Medicine, 2005
20(9):800–806.
125 E. J. Perez-Stable, A. Napoles-Springer, and J. M. Miramontes, “The Effects of Ethnicity
and Language on Medical Outcomes of Patients with Hypertension or Diabetes,” Medical Care,
1997 35(12):1212–1219.
126 J. Sarver and D. W. Baker, “Effect of Language Barriers on Follow-Up Appointments After
an Emergency Department Visit,” Journal of General Internal Medicine, 2000 15(4):256–264; D. W.
Baker, R. M. Parker, M. V. Williams et al., “Use and Effectiveness of Interpreters in an
Emergency Department,” Journal of the American Medical Association, 1996 275(10):783–788; L. C.
Baker and K. S. Corts, “HMO Penetration and the Cost of Health Care: Market Discipline or
Market Segmentation?” American Economic Review, 1996 86(2):389–394.
38
127 D. W. Baker, R. Hayes, and J. P. Fortier, “Interpreter Use and Satisfaction with Interpersonal
Aspects of Care for Spanish-Speaking Patients,” Medical Care, 1998 36(10):1461–1470.
128 D. W. Baker, R. M. Parker, M. V. Williams et al., 1996.
129 E. A. Jacobs, D. S. Lauderdale, D. Meltzer et al., “Impact of Interpreter Services on
Delivery of Health Care to Limited-English-Proficient Patients,” Journal of General Internal
Medicine, 2001 16(7):468–474.
130 T. M. Tocher and E. B. Larson, “Do Physicians Spend More Time with Non-English-
Speaking Patients?” Journal of General Internal Medicine, 1999 14(5):303–309.
131 E. R. Enguidanos and P. Rosen, “Language as a Factor Affecting Follow-Up Compliance
from the Emergency Department,” Journal of Emergency Medicine, 1997 15(1):9–12; L. J. Lee, H. A.
Batal, J. H. Maselli et al., “Effect of Spanish Interpretation Method on Patient Satisfaction in an
Urban Walk-In Clinic,” Journal of General Internal Medicine, 2002 17(8):641–645.
132 M. B. Laws, R. Heckscher, S. J. Mayo et al., “A New Method for Evaluating the Quality
of Medical Interpretation,” Medical Care, 2004 42(1):71–80; R. Rivadeneyra, V. Elderkin-
Thompson, R. C. Silver et al., “Patient Centeredness in Medical Encounters Requiring an
Interpreter,” American Journal of Medicine, 2000 108(6):470–474.
133 V. Elderkin-Thompson, R. C. Silver, and H. Waitzkin, “When Nurses Double as
Interpreters: A Study of Spanish-Speaking Patients in a US Primary Care Setting,” Social Science
and Medicine, 2001 52(9):1343–1358.
134 G. Flores, M. B. Laws, S. J. Mayo et al., “Errors in Medical Interpretation and Their
Potential Clinical Consequences in Pediatric Encounters,” Pediatrics, 2003 111(1):6–14.
135 L. J. Lee, H. A. Batal, J. H. Maselli et al., 2002; G. Flores, M. B. Laws, S. J. Mayo et al.,
2003; P. Rhodes and A. Nocon, “A Problem of Communication? Diabetes Care Among
Bangladeshi People in Bradford,” Health and Social Care in the Community, 2003 11(1):45–54; Q.
Ngo-Metzger, M. P. Massagli, B. R. Clarridge et al., “Linguistic and Cultural Barriers to Care:
Perspectives of Chinese and Vietnamese Immigrants,” Journal of General Internal Medicine, 2003
18:44–52.
136 Grantmakers in Health (GIH), 2003.
137 P. Rhodes and A. Nocon, 2003.
138 Q. Ngo-Metzger, M. P. Massagli, B. R. Clarridge et al., 2003.
139 E. A. Jacobs, D. S. Lauderdale, D. Meltzer et al., 2001; R. Rivadeneyra, V. Elderkin-
Thompson, R. C. Silver et al., 2000.
140 Grantmakers in Health (GIH), 2003.
141 D. Kuo and M. J. Fagan, “Satisfaction with Methods of Spanish Interpretation in an
Ambulatory Care Clinic,” Journal of General Internal Medicine, 1999 14(9):547–550.
142 J. Hornberger, H. Itakura, and S. R. Wilson, “Bridging Language and Cultural Barriers
Between Physicians and Patients,” Public Health Reports, 1997 112(5):410–417.
143 Grantmakers in Health (GIH), 2003.
144 National Council on Interpreting in Health Care (NCIHC), The Role of the Health Care
Interpreter: An Evolving Dialogue, 2001.
145 C. M. Ashton, P. Haidet, D. A. Paterniti et al., 2003.
146 B. Smedley, A. Stith, A. Nelson, eds., 2002.
39
147 National Committee for Quality Assurance, “NCQA, U.S. News & World Report
Collaborate to List ‘America’s Best Health Plans,’ Available at:
http://www.ncqa.org/Communications/SOMC/2005%20ranking%20methodology.pdf. Accessed
September 30, 2005.
148 C. Bethell, K. Carter, D. L. Latzke et al., 2003.
40
RELATED PUBLICATIONS
Publications listed below can be found on The Commonwealth Fund’s Web site at www.cmwf.org.
The Role and Relationship of Cultural Competence and Patient-Centeredness in Health Care Quality
(October 2006). Mary Catherine Beach, Somnath Saha, and Lisa A. Cooper.
Improving Quality and Achieving Equity: The Role of Cultural Competence in Reducing Racial and Ethnic
Disparities in Health Care (October 2006). Joseph R. Betancourt.
The Evidence Base for Cultural and Linguistic Competency in Health Care (October 2006). Tawara D.
Goode, M. Clare Dunne, and Suzanne M. Bronheim.
Taking Cultural Competency from Theory to Action (October 2006). Ellen Wu and Martin Martinez.
Obtaining Data on Patient Race, Ethnicity, and Primary Language in Health Care Organizations: Current
Challenges and Proposed Solutions (August 2006). Romana Hasnain-Wynia and David W. Baker.
Health Services Research, vol. 41, no. 4, pt. 1 (In the Literature summary).
Promising Practices for Patient-Centered Communication with Vulnerable Populations: Examples from Eight
Hospitals (August 2006). Matthew Wynia and Jennifer Matiasek.
Patients’ Attitudes Toward Health Care Providers Collecting Information About Their Race and Identity
(October 2005). David W. Baker, Kenzie A. Cameron, Joseph Feinglass et al. Journal of General
Internal Medicine, vol. 20, no. 10 (In the Literature summary).
Resident Physicians’ Preparedness to Provide Cross-Cultural Care (September 7, 2005). Joel S.
Weissman, Joseph R. Betancourt, Eric G. Campbell et al. Journal of the American Medical Association,
vol. 294, no. 9 (In the Literature summary).
Providing Language Services in Small Health Care Provider Settings: Examples from the Field (April 2005).
Mara Youdelman and Jane Perkins.
Who, When, and How: The Current State of Race, Ethnicity, and Primary Language Data Collection in
Hospitals (May 2004). Romana Hasnain-Wynia, Debra Pierce, and Mary A. Pittman.
Insurance, Access, and Quality of Care Among Hispanic Populations (October 2003). Michelle M. Doty.
Providing Language Interpretation Services in Health Care Settings: Examples from the Field (May 2002).
Mara Youdelman and Jane Perkins.

How does genetics apply in health and disease?

6203NATSCI Applications of Genetics in Health and Disease Practical 1

Today we are going to begin the procedure of using DNA sequencing to profile the bacteria present on your phones. To do this we will firstly swab the bacteria from your phone then we will extract DNA from the bacteria and then finally set up a PCR to amplify bacteria using the 16SrRNA gene (which is routinely used to identify bacteria to species).

You will work in pairs. So decide 1) whose phone you want to swab and 2) whose phone you want to put on agar to see what bacteria grow. The only purpose of putting the phone on LB agar is just to see what bacteria will grow and not for identification. I will take pictures of the bacteria colonies growing on the agar and put them on Canvas later in the week.

At any point if you don’t understand what is a spin column or Eppendorf or collection tube etc. I’ve put pictures at the back of this document.

  1. To swab bacteria of phone:

PUT ON A LAB COAT AND PUT ON SOME GLOVES!

  1. Take your swab and dip it in the sterile water and swab the face of your phone for 2 minutes.
  2. Add 20 µl of PROTEINASE K and 180 µl DIGESTION SOLUTION (Buffer ATL) to a 1.5 ml Eppendorf tube.
  3. Swirl the swab in the solution in the 1.5 ml Eppendorf tube for 2 minutes.
  4. Cut off the swab tip (with scissors) and leave in the liquid.
  5. To extract DNA from your swab:
  6. Close the tube lid and incubate at 56⁰C for 10 mins on heating block/water bath.
  7. Remove swab tip, squeeze out as much liquid as possible and dispose of swab.
  8. Add 200 µl of LYSIS SOLUTION (Buffer AL). Mix thoroughly by vortexing to obtain a uniform suspension.
  9. Add 400 µl of 100% ETHANOL and mix by vortexing. Transfer the prepared lysate to a DNA purification Column (see pictures last page!) inserted in a collection tube. Centrifuge the column for 1 min at 8,000 rpm. IT IS IMPORTANT THAT WHEN YOU CENTRIFUGE YOU DO IT WITH ANOTHER GROUP AS THE CENTRIFUGE MUST BE CORRECTELY BALANCED!
  10. Discard the collection tube containing the flow-through solution. Place the DNA Purification Column into a new 2 ml collection tube.
  11. Add 500 µl of WASH BUFFER 1 (AW1) to the DNA Purification Column. Centrifuge for 1 min at 10,000 rpm. Discard the flow-through and place the purification column back into the collection tube.
  12. Add 500 µl of WASH BUFFER 2 (AW2) to the DNA Purification Column. Centrifuge for 3 mins at maximum speed (13,000 rpm).
  13. Discard the collection tube containing the flow-through solution and transfer the DNA Purification Column to a sterile 1.5 ml Eppendorf tube and chop lid off with scissors.
  14. Add 50 µl of ELUTION BUFFER (Buffer AE) to the center of the DNA Purification Column membrane to elute genomic DNA. Incubate for 2 min at room temperature and centrifuge for 1 min at 10,000 rpm.
  15. Your bacterial DNA is now at the bottom of the 1.5 ml Eppendorf tube so you can throw away the purification column and progress to PCR.
  16. To set up PCR of bacterial 16SrRNA gene

We are going to set up two PCR reactions. One will contain the bacterial DNA you just extracted and the other will contain no DNA, just water (negative control), and will check whether you have contaminated your reagents with bacteria during the DNA extraction process!

The first thing to do is take 2 PCR tubes. They have already been labelled with a number (that’s your group) and on the side one tube is called “+ve” and the other “-ve” corresponding to the tube that has bacterial DNA (+ve) in it and the other which has just water (-ve).

To each of the tubes you need to add the following:

PCR Master Mix:                                                         13 µl

Forward Primer called 27F:                                        2 µl

Reverse Primer called 1492R:                                    2 µl

DNA that you extracted (or water if –ve control):     2 µl

Water:                                                                         6 µl

PLEASE REMEMBER: The negative control will have all the reagents added but NO DNA and 2 µl of water added instead!

FYI: Forward primer contains the DNA sequence: 5’-AGAGTTTGATCMTGGCTCAG-3’

Reverse primer contains the DNA sequence: 5’-TACGGYTACCTTGTTACGACTT-3’, both are at concentration of 10 µM.

Once you have added the ingredients to each tube please put the lid on each, label with your initials and give them to Robbie. This is the end of Practical 1 and (fingers crossed!) you have managed to successfully extract DNA from your bacteria!

The next stage is to run the PCR which I will carry out. The conditions are as follows (if interested):

3 mins at 95⁰C

15 seconds at 95⁰C

35 cycles

30 seconds at 55⁰C

1.5 mins at 72⁰C

8 mins at 72⁰C

Finish at 16⁰C

Has my PCR worked? In order to understand this we have to run a gel. I will do this before the next practical and put the images up on canvas. If it has worked then we will proceed to the next stage which is cloning the PCR product and then heat shocking the bacteria into E. coli (see Prac 2).

Historical Misrepresentation of Voodoo in Hollywood:So what is voodoo?

ENG 450

11/15/19

Historical Misrepresentation of Voodoo in Hollywood

Abstract

People often think they know what voodoo involves. Like me, most people relate it to spells, dolls, potions, and magic. Voodoo has been grossly misrepresented in the media leading people to be fascinated with it today. Going on with my research, my goal is to ultimately find how it evolved as a religion and came to New Orleans and became what it is today. Additionally, I will be hitting points on the history and the religion of voodoo and stereotypes Hollywood has presented to the world.

So what is voodoo? It’s been practiced in different places of the world like Africa and the Caribbean, mainly in Haiti. It is supposed to be a mixture of different traditions like those of the catholic, African, and Native American religions. It mostly community-centered and supports individual empowerment and has little to do with dolls and zombies.(Voodoo 2.0) It has developed into people believing it to only being a spiritual possession practice. Due to Hollywood’s films and shows today, its led people to view it as something scary and dangerous. Movies like Disney’s Princess and the Frog has even led children to believe it is all bad magic. Furthermore, my intention for this research paper will be to answer the questions I have came across in my research and to hopefully help clarify the stereotypes that films have led people to believe in.

 

Introduction

Voodoo, a folk religion of the Haitians, has over the history of Hollywood been misrepresented through the development of cinematic. A study of the indigenous tradition reveals that the current understanding is laced with massive misconceptions and ill-formed depictions. In essence the culture is now associated with witchcraft, barbaric sacrifice and Satanism. The popularity of voodoo in western culture first took effect in the 18th century. However, it is important to understand that initially, the tradition is indeed a spiritual practice that was essentially a mechanism of unity that brought about independence in the Caribbean’s through the Haitian revolution. This paper explores how voodoo has been misrepresented in the western culture while at the same time depicting the essence of voodoo as a product of transnationalism.  Also the paper will demonstrate how the voodoo culture has impacted the inhabitants of New Orleans through history. Ultimately the essay will be the explanation of rediscovering voodoo as one of the most misunderstood religions in the world.  Contemporary images of voodoo in the film industry portrays it as black magic with stereotypes comprising of general physical, emotional and cultural practices. In other cases voodoo has been symbolically used to pass across various social and political undertakings that were perpetrated by western sumpremacists.

Existing Scholarship On Voodoo

            The origin of voodoo is believed to be West Africa with the traditional practices being originally African before the arrival of the Europeans. Once the French explorers enslaved the Africans, transporting them to the shore of Domingues, they attempted to replace the tradition with Christianity. However, the slaves progressed with the practice under the disguise of Catholicism. In this regard as opposed to the popular belief that voodoo is black magic and pagan cult, the tradition is indeed a religion that originated from Africa and is regarded as a way of life and mode of survival.  Those who practice voodoo attest of its potency to heal various maladies including both historical and social-economical misfortunes.

Following the Haitian Revolution, the reign of horrific reign of the French came to an end. However, the population continues to suffer from ill-treatment of the following rule of dictators being subjected to both environmental and economic exploitation. Therefore, the poor and oppressed invoked the voodoo spirits for guidance and salvation to withstand the medical, economic and social-political maladies. In return the spirits required a sacrifice which could be in the form of a simple act such as lighting a candle. However for more severe problems, the people would conduct a more intricate sacrifice for several spirits including animal sacrifice, dancing and even drumming. Mostly, the voodoo tradition was democratic and functional incorporating allowing both women and men to assume the roles of leadership. Also, the authority of the priests and priestesses is limited to the people who voluntarily submit to the initiation to the tradition. Voodoo in present-day Hollywood demonstrates negative US cultural discourse with little or no scholarship on nature and scope.

Misrepresentation of voodoo in literature film and television

The voodoo rituals were meant to demonstrate the interconnection between humans, nature and the spiritual world. However, following colonialism and introduction of Christianity, the harmonic balance between humans and nature was destroyed by the introduction of destructive human practices. Still voodoo culture insisted on the sacredness of nature that provided a conscious approach to the natural world. Additionally in voodoo culture it was believed that after death, the remains of the people remains trapped in the world and it requires the priest to carry out the purification process that that releases the body from the waters. In this regard the voodoo culture promoted intricate engagement with nature unlike how it is portrayed in Hollywood today.

An evaluation of the appearance of voodoo in film, television and literature in the western world indicates several misconceptions about the religion. Referring to H.P. Lovecraft’s story a tale ‘‘The Call of Cthulhu.’’  Is developed describing the cult of Cthulhu. From the description, a horrific mystery is told of the cult and the statue of Cthulhu that was based on one of the blackest of the African voodoo circles (Mcgee 241). From the story the initiates of the cult are portrayed as men who are ignorant, degraded, mentally aberrant who are either Negroes or mulattos.  Further the literature continues to describe their rite as primitive and connected to satanic motives.  For instance, he states that the beings were making sounds, writhing around a bonfire devoid of clothes. In the middle of the bonfire stands a great monstrous statue with bodies of marred and mutilated bodies around (Mcgee 241). The essence of this representation is that Lovecraft draws a connection between voodoo and Satanism.

Additionally, contrary to the actual nature of voodoo, the story also draws a connection between mental inferiority of blacks and mixed-race groups to the belief in voodoo. The religion is portrayed as emanating from diseased, inferior and primitive people. More so the general perception is that voodoo is a mere superstition that is merely suited for the inferior. Similarly from the Lovecraft story one can perceive the connection between voodoo, violence and base sexuality (Mcgee 242). For instance from the rite described, naked people dance and jump around a bonfire of their aimed fellow victims.

Association of zombies with voodoo tradition

Zombies are a minor concept in the Haitian voodoo tradition.  The history of the zombies is based on a combination of political historical and cultural environment. considering that Haiti is a land characterized of hybridity following infusion of Christian religion into a culture that already had exotic mystic values the resulting religion became the voodoo culture.  this culture has since the beginning been maligned and misunderstood as a culture that is associated with death and the spiritual world incorporating the use of dolls, voodoo dolls, charms and most importantly the zombies. The concept of the zombies has struck the westerners with fear and fascination resulting in the what is seen as popularity of the zombies in the Hollywood cinema.

With regard to this tradition zombies referred to dead bodies that have been captured either in the form of the body or soul by a sorcerer who then becomes the master of the zombie. In ancient voodoo cultures, the zombies were used to work in the fields tilling land and harvesting crops and all the other work that was designated for slaves. Similarly the zombies were believed to be sent in the form of spirits to drive other victims of the master mad. From this idea of zombies, several theories have been developed towards the meaning and existence of zombies. Inspired by the voodoo idea of the zombies Hollywood film industry has created films that have propagated voodoo culture into international fame. The first film that featured voodoo culture White Zombie (1932) integrated the concept of using a particular tonic that led to creation of enslaved men who worked in a sugar mill (Gelder 91).

Zombie films that were created after White Zombie (1932) focused on the idea of sexualized females. Afterwards, the concept shifted towards creating zombies by the use of biochemical means. With later developments, the concept of zombies changed without incorporating any essence of voodoo culture. Instead, zombies are only created by the use of contagion, disease, isolation and most importantly unregulated science. Additionally the ideas of zombies in the recent movies codes the zombies a distinctly black bringing the question of the person behind the object of aggression. The erotic appeal of the zombies was lost in the 1970s with the creation of the La Rebellion de las Muertas (1973).

Following the popularity of the first horror movie, Hollywood became interested in identifying the next monster to be portrayed in the screens. According to Bishop (141) filmmakers considered the exotic literature of the Caribbean’s that led them not only o the Caribbean’s but to the island of Haiti where they identified powerful voodoo spirits. They became interested in the exotic African mysticism that enabled priests to kill their enemies and then convert them to mindless servants. This concept acquired many people’s interests and therefore led to invention of the notion of the zombie. Initially in the very first movie based on this discovery, White Zombie was based on the exotic setting of Haiti portraying the primitive stereotypes of the natives and at the same time accentuating the superiority of the western imperialists. Similarly apart from the voodoo culture the film focuses on the portrayal of the post colonial society depicting the danger of the white protagonists becoming zombies in themselves. in essence the films present the horror of the westerners being colonized by the pagans through domination of Hollywood cinema by voodoo zombie culture. all in all, the white Zombie sets the pace for the negative stereotyping of Hollywood cinema propagating the imperialist paradigms of the west and negatively portraying race differences and class struggle of the natives (Gelder 91).

Films like the white zombie did not only exploit the nature of the exotic natives but also focused on the ancient lands that comprised of castes and mysterious figures. In this regard the setting and tone the ancient zombie movies is based on the gothic style. However, been though the real action occurs in the Caribbean’s it is evident that they depict more of the western world. In this regard the zombie horror movies are a blend of the Caribbean’s and the west and not entirely exotic. One feature that is not represented in Hollywood film is the main intention of creation of the zombie. In deed the Haitians would strip off a pagan off their will and subject them to the pagan authority leading to loss of autonomy and control. Therefore, this would be one of the post colonial terrors that this native culture would pose to any invading culture. in essence zombie culture was a manifestation of the superiority of a liberated colony hat would use fear to scare off any invading cultures (Bishop 147). However, the cinematic versions of portrayal of zombies only indicate of the master-slave relationship and the nature of colonialism.

Hollywood has  recreated and misused the concept of zombies in what is seen as imperialist hegemonic model (Bishop 147) the outcome is the portrayal that the people in power can at will enslave  others who are in this case considered to be the slaves. This is a reflection of how the colonialists exerted control on their slaves just as the zombies were commanded by their voodoo masters. In essence, the Zombie provides a retaliation ground enabling the oppressed to oppress the oppressor therefore threatening the western imperialists. Additionally the making of a zombie can be seen as backwardness and uncivilization which is utterly exaggerated in the Hollywood films. One of the misrepresentation in the films is that there s no attempt to civilize the zombies and improve their place in the society unlike in the actual ground where the French missionaries attempted to educate and marginalize the natives of the Caribbean’s. although the first zombie film is direct and melodramatic, it intricately portrays a different time which is the early 20th century which s concurrent with the end of occupation of Haiti by the united states (Bishop 148). one clear depiction is that westerners do not subscribe to any beliefs of the local superstition and are only interested in understanding them and exploiting their backwardness for entertainment purposes. The films also portray the white westerners as superiors to the Haitians in all levels such as wealth class and even enlightenment.

Rebellion as a connection of voodoo with Satanism

Haiti being among the first independent nations is known to have a violent and complex history that incorporates people from three main sources, the natives, slaves from Africa  and European imperialists. In essence as the African slaves outnumbered the imperialists a revolt ensued that was based on voodoo celebrations.  Following the invasion by the united states marines who intended to modernize the island, the voodoo rituals and zombie culture was discovered. Meanwhile the voodoo culture continued to be enriched by the influx of the Africans who were transported from west Africa who were more conversant with the rites and practices. As a result voodoo acquired more part of the Haiti culture. additionally, the growth of the culture was based on the absence of influence from the colonialists. As the west continues to discover the voodoo culture the adoption into entertainment was inevitable as in deemed to be fascinating to the western audiences. However, considering that the first audiences of this cinema would be the westerners it was adopted in such a way that it would suit their beliefs. therefore, the Hollywood entertainment does not entirely demonstrate the native voodoo and pagan ritual practices rather it is developed using the imperialist superiority concept that would suit the believes of the west n the 20th century (Bishop 147).

Most of Hollywood films have feature voodoo culture integrate violent scenes which bring about the essence of Satanism in the culture. In essence, in Haitian culture, the violence was a way of defending their environment from encroachment by foreigners. However, the portrayal of violence in Hollywood films depicts demonic association which is only an imaginary form of voodoo. In connection with rebellion, the Hollywood popular culture has for a long time portrayed voodoo as black magic that is based on African magic characterized with casting spells and placing hexes on individuals who have opposed belonging to the religion (Bartkowski 559).

Princes and The Frog Representation of Voodoo

Among the most popular cultures in the Hollywood recently is the Disney movie. However, contrary to the earlier notion of Disney princesses, the films have incorporated voodoo tradition while depicting dynamic Disney princesses. However the main misrepresenting of facts of voodoo is the portrayal that is only one culture that incorporates the aspects of devil worship. The complexity of the religion is neglected through portrayal of worship of snakes. Additionally, voodoo is mixed up with other traditions such as Christianity. However in princess and the frog voodoo is not shown to be an entirely negative religion, some good is associated with practice of the religion such as acquisition of power.  Therefore, the true meaning of voodoo s blurred through incorporation in the Disney princess movies. All in all it is depicted as only a funny religion that allows the practice of black magic to give people powers.

Movement 3: complications/ rebuttals

In line with the claims that voodoo culture is not based on violence the review of the issues of ethnicity in Haiti reveal that the culture indeed articulates charm that were violent and fatal in nature. In 1804 following the expulsion of the French colonialists in Haiti, the black leader declared the land to be a black republic. According to the constitution that was ratified soon afterwards it was declared that no white man was allowed to set foot in the country as a master or owner of any property. The violence was extended to the Haitian Mullatos who were considered inferior to the blacks.

A study of Haitian culture describes it as one of the richest cultures in the world. In essence Haitians may be considered poor but the voodoo culture makes them unique. Although the western world may be considered to be civilized it is noteworthy that the voodoo culture is an essential culture that holds the entire community together, for instance taking account of the dance, the Haitian voodoo culture can be perceived as a sacred practice. Although considered to be primitive by many, the owners pride in its participation. The tradition is recognized in terms of ethnicity and at the same time the community does not acknowledge hybridity. This means that the ethnicity gives it a sense of belonging. While the Hollywood representation may try to indicate modernity, Haiti continues to be presented as a fatal and promiscuous place in that it has held the practices while the rest of the world has revolutionalized. On the contrary the representation of voodoo in Hollywood may be an attempt to indicate the presence of indigenous culture. However, the changes that have been enacted replace some of the original features of the culture that lead to disorientation of the meaning and deviation from the actual reality of how the traditions were practiced. For instance, voodoo culture was originally practiced by black Haitians but in Hollywood films it has been replaced by white men characters. Being a pragmatic religion, it is evident that voodoo beliefs and ritual practices are a relation of reverence of nature, natural spirits and forces associated with fire and water (Bartkowski 560). However, following colonialism there were massive changes on the ecotheological practices of the religion culminating in ease of dispersion and adoption by the western world.

Criminalization of voodoo

Although western film, television and literature have focused on the use of voodoo to appeal to the popular culture, it has at the same time neglected some of the features of the culture that define its originality. However, Hollywood has also challenged some of the stereotypes that have been set by the same culture. For instance it has challenged the issue of criminalization of voodoo depicting some of the primitive reasons that were perpetrated by the culture. In the same way it has challenged some of the racial anxieties that have been brought forward by the initial initiates of the culture. Imminently religious scholars and spiritual leaders have attempted to erase some of the negative beliefs through public image but it is evident that both imaginary voodoo and original voodoo have become intertwined and have gained international popularity. In this regard, it is expected that the beliefs and traditions portrayed in the media will continue t evolve with new discoveries and adjustments while in essence the original traditions will continue to be practiced by followers of the religion.

Parallel to the notion that voodoo is dangerous; the religion can actually be perceived as a way in which the natives used to resists the gendered and racialized violence that was perpetrated mainly by the colonialists. Just as in Coven, the role of the belief system of voodoo was to make sense of experiences that the people of Haiti and the slaves who were brought from Africa a reality (O’Reilly 36). Various adoption of this religion have been aimed at ensuring that that the practices are used as sites of resistance towards racial violence. Just as voodoo for the Haiti was a means of overcoming oppression, magic for films such as coven have been used to document historical moments and at the same time challenge white supremacy. This way voodoo is given social significance as the characters use it to bring about justice. However, although the traditional re given sensationalizations, it is evident that various misconceptions of the religions are used to bring about derogatory representations of voodoo (O’Reilly 36).

Voodoo not black magic but is an actual religion

Ethnographical study of the Haitian culture reveals that contrary to the black magic stereotypes, the religion is actually based on moral beliefs that the followers have to adhere to. additionally, the belies are in harmony with the gods and, therefore, they facilitate spiritual physical and emotional wellbeing of those that practice the religion. Many scholars including Melville J. Herskovits have refuted the inclusion of the tradition as witchcraft citing the ethnographic characteristics (Middleton 158). She describes the tradition as a practice in which the gods are well known to their worshippers. Additionally, the duties that are owed to the gods are well understood and are fulfilled in a systematic and orderly manner using rituals and rites. In return when the rituals are practiced properly the worshippers acquire benefits such as god harvest, goodwill with other men and good health. n some cases voodoo is considered as the cause of Haiti’s impoverishment (McGee 231).  This notion has however been created for a long time through the imagination. This development is brought about by the blend of Haitian voodoo and imagined voodoo that has resulted in the alteration of the real essence and cultural importance of the religion.

In essence, Herskovits’s has also demonstrated that voodoo is considered as a religion in that takes into account the holistic health of the followers considering the spiritual and physical condition of the people (Middleton 160). The importance of this religion is documented in various medical records of death caused by black magic.  Hollywood media has not focused on the representation of importance of voodoo and the ethnomedical practices. While these practices are important in the western world due to the spiritual and historical roles that they play, they have been adamantly been defined as mere superstitions disregarding their utmost importance.

A study of voodoo reveals the feature of pharmacosm indicating the power to both heal and harm the users. However, the voodoo is only demonstrated as evil and primitive with the health reveals being neglected. Additionally voodoo is considered to be crude neglecting the need for animal sacrifice for both physical and spiritual illnesses. Considering that the traditions arose from the beliefs and practices of the enslaved people, their masters were not interested in the slaves’ wellbeing but their capacity to provide labor (Middleton 160). Knowledge of voodoo medicine placed the slaves at the top of the social hierarchy conferring prestige and power to the slaves. Those with the voodoo knowledge were allowed to serve others and therefore would practice medicine under their masters conjuring prescriptions for various illnesses exchanged for coins and brass amulets. In addition to conjure medicine the slave healers would engage in other powerful rituals performed in peculiar circumstances. Although the voodoo has had massive impact in the mainstream medicine, it has not been adequately explored in the Hollywood representation. Similarly the benefits of faith communities in Haiti have been left out in the exploration and adoption of the voodoo culture (Middleton 165). contrary to the superficial representation of voodoo culture the entertainment industry does not dwell on the historical, medical and cultural perspective of the traditions pointing out the benefits of the religions to the users rather it focuses on the superstitious nature of the religion and the hams it could cause to the people..

Conclusion

Too many voodoo is a dangerous practice that threatens the lives of those who practice as well as those who do not subscribe to the beliefs.  this is the belief that has been propagated by the mainstream media. Most of the horror and zombie films have borrowed their concepts from the voodoo culture but in so doing the concepts are selectively applied to indicate the dark side of voodoo that incorporates the use of charms, rituals and violence as well as primitive rites against those that do not subscribe to the beliefs of the religion. However, the authenticity and legitimacy of the religion have been neglected in the description resulting in what is seen as selective understanding of the true essence of the religion. More so this notion negatively paints the religion indicating it as dark, primitive and laced with racialized violence.  For this reasons the work that is left to be done includes further study by ethnographic scholars to acquire a full understanding of the religion. The context cultural, historical and social understanding of the tradition ought to be properly studied and documented.  This will play a major role promoting the understanding of the religion as well as promoting the cultural essence and importance of the religion in the whole world. Most importantly, promoting the authenticity will preserve the culture considering that it is under ecological attack threatening its extinction. An understanding of the religion will also reduce the misrepresentation of the culture in the entertainment industry. Since the topic of voodoo representation has received little scholarly attention, it will be essential to study the essence of enduring appeal of voodoo in the popular culture.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

References

Bishop, Kyle. “The sub-subaltern monster: imperialist hegemony and the cinematic voodoo zombie.” The Journal of American Culture 31.2 (2008): 141-152.

Bartkowski, J. P. (1998). Claims-making and typifications of voodoo as a deviant religion: Hex, lies, and videotape. Journal for the Scientific Study of Religion, 559-579.

Gelder, K. (2000). Postcolonial voodoo. postcolonial studies: culture, politics, economy, 3(1), 89-98.

King, A. K. (2017). A Monstrous (Ly-Feminine) Whiteness: gender, genre, and the abject Horror of the past in American Horror Story: Coven. Women’s Studies, 46(6), 557-573.

McGee, Adam M. “Haitian Vodou and voodoo: Imagined religion and popular culture.” Studies in Religion/Sciences Religieuses 41.2 (2012): 231-256.https://scholar.harvard.edu/files/amcgee/files/mcgee-vodou_and_voodoo_in_sr.pdf.

Middleton, B. (2016). Two-headed medicine: Hoodoo workers, conjure doctors, and Zora Neale Hurston. The Southern Quarterly, 53(3), 156-175.

O’Reilly, J. (2019). ‘We’re more than just pins and dolls and seeing the future in chicken parts’: race, magic and religion in American Horror Story: Coven. European Journal of American Culture, 38(1), 29-41.

Roberts, K. (2018). The secret and irreligious doctrines of voodooism: institutionalization versus cultural stigma in New Orleans civil court. Journal of Church and State, 60(4), 661-680.

Weber, A. S. (2018). Haitian vodou and ecotheology. The Ecumenical Review, 70(4), 679-694

Oh, My Pop Culture Voodoo: <em>The Princess and the Frog</em>

 

Which perceptual factors engage the consumer to process the information at Victoria’s Secret website?

UnderstandingConsumer Behaviour
Lecture 3
Dr.Stephan Dickert
BUSM058 Module
Semester A
Today’s Outline:
•Consumer Psychology
–Test your knowledge (Chapter 2)
–Exposure, Attention & Perception (Chapter 3)
Consumer Behaviour -Chapter 2:
•Test your knowledge:
Needs have all of the following characteristics except
a. are different from wants.
b. can conflict with one another.
c. can be aroused by internal cues.
d. can be aroused by external cues.
e. result in higher levels of perceived risk.
Consumer Behaviour -Chapter 2:
•Test your knowledge:
Ellen is driving down the road with her radio on. An ad for a new store is being aired as Ellen maneuvers through heavy traffic. Although Ellen enjoys shopping and is always interested in new stores, she is paying more attention to her driving than the ad. Thus she has limited ____ to pay attention to the ad.
a. motivation
b. ability
c. opportunity
d. involvement
e. desire
Consumer Behaviour -Chapter 3:
•Today we will understand how marketing information makes its way into consumers’ minds
•Exposure
•Attention
•Perception
•Comprehension
Exposure
“…reflects the process by which the consumer comes into contact with a stimulus.”
•Exposure through sense organs
–Visual
–Auditory
–Taste
–Smell
–Touch
•Exposure to marketing stimuli
–Designed to be noticed by (all) senses.
Exposure
•Factors influencing exposure
–Position of an ad
–Product distribution
–Shelf placement
•Selective exposure
–Zipping (fast forwarding)
–Zapping (muting/switching channels).
Attention
“…the process by which we devote mental activity to a stimulus…necessary for information to be processed…activate our senses.”
Attention
“…the process by which we devote mental activity to a stimulus…necessary for information to be processed…activate our senses.”
Attention
“…the process by which we devote mental activity to a stimulus…necessary for information to be processed…activate our senses.”
Attention
“…the process by which we devote mental activity to a stimulus…necessary for information to be processed…activate our senses.”

•Change Blindness

Attention
•The trick with the downsizing….
Attention
•The trick with the downsizing….
Attention
•Characteristics
–Selective –we only focus on a few stimuli at a time
–Capable of being divided and distracted
–Limited –depends on familiarity and ease of processing of the stimuli
–Habituation –decrease in response to a stimulus after repeated presentations
•Under what conditions do you (not) give full attention to advertising & marketing communication?
Attention
•Enhancing consumer attention via marketing stimuli
–Personally relevant
–Pleasant
–Surprising
–Easy to process.
Attention
•Enhancing consumer attention via marketing stimuli
•Pleasant marketing stimuli
–Attractive models
–Music https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=nTAYmMKSIaw
–Humor https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=U91Zp9wWS30
•Surprising marketing stimuli
–Novelty
–Unexpectedness https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=gNcdu3w9m1g
–Puzzles
Attention
•Enhancing consumer attention via marketing stimuli
•Easy to process marketing stimuli
–Prominent
–Concrete
–Contrasting
•Limit amount of competing information
•KISS (Keep it simple…)
Attention
How to capture attention:
Attention
How to capture attention:
Attention
Groupwork
•Get together in teams and answer the following questions. Be ready to present this to the class.
1.The role of music & mood in marketing:
Find a commercial which uses a well known song and discuss the mood that it sets. Would another song have worked equally well?
2.Is surprise always a good thing in marketing?
Find an advertisement which uses surprise and discuss its merits and problems.
Perception
“…occurs when stimuli are registered by one of our five senses: vision, hearing, taste, smell, & touch”.
“…the process by which physical sensations…are selected, organised, and interpreted. The eventual interpretation of the stimulus allows it to be assigned meaning.
Perception
•Making sense of the environment around us
Perception
Vision
•Size & shape
•Lettering
•Color dimensions, physiological responses, liking
–Color can provoke emotions (or at least is associated with them…)
–Reactions to color are biological and cultural
–What colors are associated with a particular company?
Perception
Vision
•Color Dimensions
•Warm colors:
–elated mood states and arousal
•Cool colors:
–reduce arousal, peacefulness
Perception
Auditory
•Music can increase arousal
–Can influence purchase intention
•Sonic identity
–(e.g., Sound logo https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=bPB-2RwqH0U)
•Sound symbolism
–(e.g., inferences from sound https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=cn_q3jwzcHk)
Perception
Taste
•Varying perceptions of what “tastes good”
•Cultural backgrounds
•In-store marketing
Perception
Smell
•Smell & physiological response/moods
–Odors create moods and promote memories
•Product trial
•Liking Buying
Perception
Haptic (Touch)
•Haptic sense is most basic of senses. Learned before vision and smell.
•Affects product experience
•Touching can lead to attachment
Perception
Applied aspects of sensory perception
•Marketers try to consider the “right” combinations of stimuli
•Visual & auditory in an online context
–Lyrics of songs
–Still images have a smaller effect (Adelaaret al., 2003)
•Olfactory & auditory in an actual store context
–Match between the arousal caused by scent and music
–E.g., low arousal scent (lavender) & slow tempo music
Perception
Applied aspects of sensory perception
•Example
–Touch
–Smell
–Vision
–Sound
Perception
Applied aspects of sensory perception
•Example
–Touch
–Smell
–Vision
–Sound
Sensory Thresholds
• Absolute thresholds
– The minimum amount of stimulation that can be detected
on a given sensory channel
• Differential thresholds
– The amount of stimulation needed to be detected as a
change/difference between two stimuli
Perceiving Marketing Stimuli
•Perceptual organization
–Single units are organized into a whole
•Figure & ground
–Stimuli are interpreted relative to a background
Perceiving Marketing Stimuli
•Perceptual organization
–Single units are organized into a whole
•Figure & ground
–Stimuli are interpreted relative to a background
•Closure
–Perceptions are automatically completed
Perceiving Marketing Stimuli
•Perceptual organization
–Single units are organized into a whole
•Figure & ground
–Stimuli are interpreted relative to a background
•Closure
–Perceptions are automatically completed
•Grouping
–Stimuli are grouped if they belong to each other 
Perceiving Marketing Stimuli
Perceiving Marketing Stimuli
•Perceptual organization
–Single units are organized into a whole
•Figure & ground
–Stimuli are interpreted relative to a background
•Closure
–Perceptions are automatically completed
•Grouping
–Stimuli are grouped if they belong to each other
•Bias for the whole
–Consumers place more values in “wholes” than the sum of its parts (e.g., a $20 bill > $10 + $10)
Comprehension
•Objective (what was said)
•Subjective (what was understood)
•Miscomprehension
•Improving objective comprehension
–Expertise & ability
Comprehension
•Brand names/symbols inferences
−Misleading names/labels
−Inappropriate/similar names
•Product features/packaging
−Product attributes
−Country of origin
−Package design
−Color
Attention
Seminar Exercises (Groupwork):
•Task 1: Visit the Victoria’s Secret website at and answer the following questions:
–How does the company use its home page to provide potential consumers with opportunities for additional exposure to the company and its products?
–What techniques does the company use to attract and hold consumers’ attention at the website?
–Which perceptual factors engage the consumer to process the information at Victoria’s Secret website?
Attention
Seminar Exercises (Groupwork):
•Task 2: outline the design for an appropriate store exterior/interior for a product/service/experience/idea of your choice. Then think of ways you could adapt your store into a virtual environment.
•To help you prepare for the seminar discussion:
–Watch the two videos on QMPLUS
–Read the article “Store atmosphere in web retailing” posted on QMplus.
See you next week!

Are they identical or same as order request and sample? Are the dimensions accurate?

CHAPTER 1: THE COMPANY

1.1. The concept

History

There is no end to nostalgia”

The idea of business is inspired by retro visuals. Twenty years ago, Business Week determined a term so called “nostalgia boom” that create a throughout feeling towards customer society. Thus marketers, they further noted through responds with an emerging range of retro movies, retro fashions, retro autos, retro advertising campaigns and retro beverages (Stephen Brown, 2018).

As a result, many recognized that practising a “retro vibe” was passing fantasy that runs through a form of societal stock-taking in the days of yore the new millennium took off (Stephen Brown, 2018). Further up, another twenty years after such predictions, the established term by Business Week so called ‘nostalgia bonanza’ is remaining strong and showcases small amount or no harbinger of taper off. Which is how the business idea of CEMDE comes into surface, the company’s product offering was conceived from the various photographs collected over the years.

Figure 1. Example of retro photographs. Source: CEMDE.

In fact, market trends are running on cycle and retro is appeared to be attractive to market players which how CEMDE reckon a ‘perfect-timing’ opportunity to be part of this market trends due to its premature realization of this ‘retro’ product trends. The main resource of the product is from a digital collection of retro photographs from the creative directors which bring inspirational images of modernity with a touch of past times.

Additionally, nostalgia being determined as a proactive dimension as well. The proof is currently displayed in the market as: Polaroid instant camera and Volkswagen’s New Beetle fifties-style fridge which have emboldened other entrepreneurs to conduct such business. The leading management gurus suggest companies to deliver old brands back rather than creating new ones (Johnson, 2018), supported by the ever-up-to-date Economists (2014, p.76) who now accepts that in these present times, “the best way forwarding is backwards”.

The business environment

The business is planned to operate within The Netherlands with no physical store available and relying on an online platform to operate the business. The term of this business practice: E-commerce. The level of confidence in this digital age to run a business without a physical store is utterly soaring. The omnipresence of digital connectedness and interactions open doors to a legion of business opportunities for European companies and the survey results stated 89.3% of companies are comprehensively cognizant of the contemporary prospects brought about by the digital revolution (Monitor, 2018).

In technology adoption aspect, it divulges that all start-ups and companies under development have the largest share of adoption with over 78% and firms developed in the national market showcase the lowest share at 47% (Monitor, 2018). According to the research, most start-ups (similar to CEMDE) are digital technology oriented. In European and global markets, an adoption rate is comparatively high, approaching number of 60% and 68%. Through these technological aspects, CEMDE derive into conclusion to establish an e-commerce start-up business in The Netherlands to potentially meet all the targeted market demands and market situation in the country itself.

The use of ’on demand’ production:

The source of the product:

1.2. The Vision Statement

“To experience the touch of pleasant remembrances in modern era living spaces.”

The value behind it: our target market (millennials) can use the product beyond its original function and explore more psychological aspects behind every image. The researcher stated that: nostalgia visualised as “pleasurable therapy” (Lowenthal, 2015, p.47) and as a fast-growing and fashionable area that abundant overture opportunities for ambitious academics (Veresiu et al., 2018).

1.3. Mission Statement

The company is on a mission to provide created nostalgic home decorations, art and designs to compose a livable and aesthetic piece of art or decorations for people with a high sense of aesthetic and minimalist lifestyle.

The mission statement in brief:

•    To bring incipient atmosphere to the world of interior design and provide an ocular perceiver-catching and unique product from vigorous erudition and perpetuating the study of both current and traditional decorating styles and design trends.

•    To ensure quality and valuable product that has a psychological impact.

•    To establish CSR (Corporate Social Responsibility) to contribute to the social cause issue.

1.4. The Products

The product sales forecast

Sales Assumptions Research to Support
Sales Assumptions
Critical Risk/ Weakness of this Assumption

 

1.5. Legal Status and Ownership

The company incorporated as a Limited Liability Partnership (Dutch term: BV) and the management is on the verge of including it. The company will hire the services of a solicitor who will ensure that the various legal requirements complied accordingly. The company owned by Chyntya Dewi who saddled with the responsibility of managing the affairs of the company. Together with the office administrator, the outsources (AA accountant and digital marketing agency), the organization is expected to perform forward thinking for organizational efficiency.

Due to the existing legal obligation to compose articles of association in establishing a BV and create a record, the company is obliged to rely on the service of notary for BV formation. The assets of the BV divided into shares; the manager receives these shares upon incorporation in the capacity of BV founder (s). The manager, as a shareholder, able to participate in the company and claim dividends. With this legal form, the owner’s private assets strictly separated from the business assets of BV.

However, the owner is 100% responsible for any business debts incurred since the legislator is not distinguishing company assets and private assets. As a result, the business owner trades their own risk and expenses within this legal form. The essential aspects of forming BV includes; registration at the Chamber of Commerce (KvK), accounting record, and notary.

1.6. Basic Corporate Information

  • The trading title: CEMDE BV.
  • Country: The Netherlands.
  • City of operation: Amsterdam, North-Holland.

The company will conduct the business under the terms and conditions of a Limited Liability Partnership (LLP). A Limited Liability Partnership (LLP) is a structured business model similar to a partnership; however, in this case, the partners have limited liability as the name itself suggests (Das and Das, 2018). In this business category, the maximal accountability of every partner is enclosed by his share capital in the partnership. Furthermore, this partnership variant selected because it is a popular option for start-ups.

1.7. Company Structures and Human Resources

Figure 1-6. Company Structures and Human Resources.

The company would function as a dynamic with open communication procedures. The team are expected to have creative minded and excellent social skills to ensure the functionality of the company remain productive and actively engaging. The manager would work as the HR person who recruits any potential addition to the team. Hierarchy structures is not part of CEMDE’s company structure; as a small company, CEMDE intends to reach young and independent individual to be part of the team. The reason of this chosen company structure is to allow current generation to participate in the creative industry and provide more innovative and fresh ideas to the company for long-term growth.

The HR plan and details on job descriptions of each role provided in section 5.2 (Operations and Product Development Plan).

CHAPTER 2: INDUSTRY ANALYSIS

2.1. Industry Definition

CEMDE generally belongs to the creative industry, which is a subset of the arts industry. Creative industries definition hotly contested within the early 2000s with debates on the construction of a working definition as well as a sector with which it incorporated. The assumption that creative industries were evolving spaces dealing with multifaceted interactions between cultures, technology, knowledge as well as economics caused a heated discussion (Della Lucia and Segre, 2017). According to the United Nations Conference on Trade and Development (2008), creative industries are “cycles of creation, production, and distribution of goods and services that utilise creativity and intellectual capital as primary inputs; constitute a set of knowledge-based activities, focused, although not limited to arts, potentially generating revenues from trade and intellectual property rights; comprise tangible products and intangible intellectual and artistic services with creative content, economic value and market objectives”. Creative economy includes such sectors as books, arts, films, crafts, paintings, songs, festivals, digital animations, songs as well as designs, among others. The creative economy is essential since it generates income through intellectual property rights. It creates new jobs in places of higher occupational skills, as well as trade, such as exportation, for both middle and small-sized ventures.

The level of originality attained in a work of art is of great paramount in the industry and this is more of the reason most artists keep to the expression of their brilliance and creativity rather than relying on recreation and duplication which may even be considered an intellectual theft if done without a written prior permission of the original creator of the art. The creative industry usually engages in the production of decorative arts objects utilised in the enhancement of everyday life as well as home interiors. These artistic objects include fabrics for upholstery and clothing, furniture, and clothing items among others. The level of originality attained in a work of art is of great paramount in the industry and this is the reason why most artists keep to the expression of their brilliance and creativity rather than relying on recreation and duplication, which may even be considered an intellectual theft if done without a written prior permission of the original creator of the art.

New York City, for instance, is the cultural capital of the United States and probably the whole world. In this city, arts play an important role leading to economic development through expenditures as well as receipt of a host of activities, such as museums, Broadway, non-profit theatres, concerts, dance and opera, galleries, auction houses, television productions as well as motion pictures among others. New York’s venture into creative industries has made the city a significant tourist attraction leading to the attraction of various investments as well as entrepreneurs promoting its growth. Countries have made it a priority in the promotion of creative industries to ensure that they not only pass their culture to other people around the world, but also earn revenues from such sectors. Most developed countries earn billions of moneys every year from creative industries making these industries among the backbones of a country’s GDP (Americans for Arts, 2019)

2.2. Industry Growth and Size

The decorative print market is growing as consumers look to enhance the aesthetics of their homes and businesses. Ornamental printing volume is virtually 13.1 billion square metres in 2018, with a value of more than $18.9 billion.  Smithers (2018), forecasts the market to grow 5% annually from 2018 to 2023. The percentage covers a range of incipient and traditional processes and materials.

The Netherlands:

According to journal published by Dutch Ministry of Education, Culture and Science: Culture at a First Glance (2016), innovation and creativity and innovation are the fundamental elements for the knowledge advancement in the society. The creative industries are magnificently placed to connect these elements to innovation and technology as well as designing new application in some areas as an instance: infrastructure, healthcare, etc.

In addition to that, creative industries are considered as a contributor to Dutch cultural enrichment and economic growth simultaneously with resolving social issues. To accomplish the power of creative enterprise to Dutch advantage, the industry demand to obtain knowledge institution, education sector and authorities to corporate with the creative industry. Thus, as part of its business policy, Dutch government has determined creative industries as one of The Netherlands’ vital economic sectors.

2.3. Industry Characteristics

 

Industry segmentation:

Figure 0‑1.1. Market Segmentation. Source: AMR Analysis (2015).

The world home décor market (AMR, 2015) is segmented as:

Furniture:

  • Kitchen
  • Livingroom and Bedroom
  • Outdoor
  • Lighting
  • Bathroom

Textiles:

  • Bath textiles
  • Bed textiles
  • Kitchen and dining textiles
  • Living room textiles

Floor coverings:

  • Wood and laminate
  • Vinyl and rubber
  • Carpet and rugs
  • Tiles
  • Others (bamboo, concrete, etc.)

The furniture segment encompasses furniture according to its utilisation in different living spaces. The ‘frame’ furniture that utilised in the living room is the one that is cognate to CEMDE products.

The market player(s) in the Netherlands:

Furniture utilised as domestic purposes and commercial purposes, the materials and design are the fundamental factors for the industry as it directly influences the customer’s decision to make a purchase (AMR, 2015). The furniture businesses in the Netherlands are highly competitive in terms of prices and market offers. One brand offers an extreme variety in their product categories which sanctions the customers to obtain abundant resources for their complete home embellishment and renovation. These are visibly some of the most-kenned furniture stores in the Netherlands that withal offers the comparable products as CEMDE:

  • IKEA

This Swedish brand has achieved this prosperity by providing a unique value proposition to consumers which is leading-edge Scandinavian design at bargain prices. Because IKEA inherited unique design from Sweden and lower bargain price advantage, they create compact product which are come in boxed and requires whole assembly at home. Thus, the product reduces shelf space, more facile to convey, and seldom to distribution

Area of specialisation: assembled furniture

  • Rivièra Maison

A Dutch home décor brand, Rivièra Maison, is dedicated to bringing classic interior designs to their devoted base of customers both in-store and online. Their exclusive amassments are meticulously designed with a fixate on detail, providing customers with unique and stylish products to embellish a comfortable home.

Area of specialisation: classic furniture and home décor, flowers and gifts.

  • Wehkamp

Company information: Wehkamp was a frontrunner in the digital revolution. They went as one of the first online in the Netherlands. This recognition gave them a head start in gaining market share in the Netherlands. With the result that they switch to be a consummate e-commerce business in 2010. The enormous prosperity of Wehkamp optically discerned back in the fact that 48% of Dutch families are conventional customers.

Area of specialisation: lifestyle marketplace.

  • VTwonen

VTwonen is a multidisciplinary company that invested in three different industries. These industries are tv making, magazines and home decoration. VTwonen utilises the similarly called tv program and magazine to promote the habitation embellishment they have available on their e-commerce website. By doing circle promotion, they can sustain a constant a wholesome amount of name apperception what avails them to stay a prominent player on the market.

2.4. Industry Trends

The increasing rate of urbanisation:

A key driver for décor print is the magnification of real estate business (Smithers, 2018) which is driving demand for supersession and incipient fixtures, fittings, wallpaper, and furniture. More homes result in more people making culls and redecorating. Incrementing urban population is one of the vigorous impacting factors affecting the domicile décor market.

Due to growing urban populations, the living spaces remodelled into more diminutive and more sumptuous. Although more buildings constructed, the community will have to take into consideration how interior design executed perpetually. Smithers (2018) added that homeowners would find ways to optimise their property through astute divisions and space-preserving furniture, leading to boosting demand for decorative printing.

Fashion trend:

The cull of materials to embellish living spaces is chiefly a matter of personal taste. The industry inspirits continuous updates to counteract tear and wear or per household trends and the transmuting design (Smithers, 2018). The ever-incrementing exposure to luxury workspaces and luxury homes showcased via TV make-over programmes or celebrity photoshoots demonstrate the latest trends in the home décor industry itself.

The Dutch TV program, VTWonen, demonstrate the puissance of home décor through room make-overs, DIY, home inspiration, and latest trends presented by the experienced stylists from the industry.

Figure 2-2 Source: Vtwonen.nl (2016).

Marketing trend:

Buzz marketing in this type of product is emerging on the convivial media platforms as many ‘influencers’ have starting to promote home décor and living space inspiration.

Figure 2-3. Source Instagram post: (Isaya, E. and Bruna, 2019)

CHAPTER 3: MARKET ANALYSIS

MARKET/BUSINESS ENVIRONMENT RESEARCH

Porter’s Five Forces Analysis

3..1. Market Segmentation and Target Market Selection

The goal is to create high-quality prints for the target groups, which is mainly young teenager to adults ranging from 20-35 years old. The reason of specific chosen target market and age range: Millennial Generation is the biggest e-commerce consumers in the world.

According to E-commerce Foundation (2018), millennials generation in The Netherlands have online activities that fully integrated into their lives with the percentage of 53% internet usage from their smartphone to the online shop and 90% of general internet usage of the smartphone by 2017. Additionally, according to the report, Dutch consumer preferences for purchasing a product has ‘furniture and homeware’ as one of the most purchased online products. Additionally, the buying behaviour continually changing, supported by an incremental aspect of offers from international companies and the progress of technology. Further up, the online sales are now booming with additional turnover up to 19% in 2016 (Santander, 2019).

  • Market segmentation:
  • Demographic:

– Gender: Male and Female

– Age: 20-35 years old (Millennials)

– Social status: employed, self-employed professionals, college students, creative industry worker (artists, designers, stylists, photographers, etc.) and blogger.

  • Geographic: The Netherlands.
  • Behavioural patterns: regular online shopper, aware of environmental issues, skilful in decorating private space with aesthetic designs.

CEMDE potential costumers concentrated in the millennial segment of the market. They are more innovative and tend to move with the updates of the technological world. With the right marketing strategy, the company suspects to experience a tremendous growth since the efforts concentrated on attracting this particular segment.

Further up, CEMDE intends to integrate the use of its E-commerce platform through expansion to reach the global market with the same demographic and behavioural patterns, as previously mentioned (in The Netherlands). However, in-depth knowledge of new geographic market research lacked — this research done through monitoring the industry performance in that area through market research.

3.2. Buyer Behaviour

Theoretically, there are factors influencing the consumer buying behaviour:

THE EXTERNAL:

  • Cultural factors: In 2016, 73% of the Dutch population aged 12 or older had ever made online purchases (CBS, 2017). Further up, the most purchased products through the internet by Dutch consumer are clothing, followed by travel and accommodation, tickets to event, books, magazines, newspaper and household goods and appliances (where CEMDE is becoming part of).
  • Social factors: the life satisfaction level of Dutch population is fairly high, with the percentage amount standing around 90% for those people aged 18 years or older which conclude Dutch are customarily happy people (CBS, 2017).

THE INTERNAL:

  • Personal factors: Santander (2019), stated that Dutch consumer is decidedly sensitive to prices and special offers. Additionally, Dutch consumer praise quality as the uttermost crucial factor which drives them to purchase higher price for a product with more top quality. With a GDP per capita of USD 51000 per annum (23rd in the world), according to Santander (2019), the Dutch consumer is relatively well-off yet does not spend effortlessly. Traditionally, Dutch consumer tends to resist change and prefer to purchase natural products.
  • Psychological factors: Dutch consumer is sensitive to advertising and such advertising will reflect on sales efficiency (Santander, 2019). The current trend in the Dutch market is evolving towards sustainable, healthy and practical products. Furthermore, many advertisings have recently done in the vicinity of the environment, which affected Dutch consumers into buying eco-friendly products.

To understand the purchasing pattern of the customer segment, it is equally important to understand buyer behaviour. The company mostly targets the millennial has the habit of acquiring aesthetics and arts of various kinds and are often minimalistic. The acquisition of the photo prints provided by the company will not only be a hot cake in this market segment but also inspire many more people to hone their creativity

3.3. Competitor Analysis

The company’s direct competitors are the companies that are actively involved in the provision of Scandinavian home decorations, art and designs and aesthetics pieces of ornaments. The major competitors for the company are:

  • DESENIO (https://desenio.co.uk)

DESENIO offer a wide range of stylish posters and prints showcasing the latest interior design trends and always with great prices and high quality. With their wide assortment of primarily Scandinavian art designs, they affect good wall art that suits every home.

  • Projeckt Henri (https://projekthenri.com): a newly established online prints for contemporary interiors founded by a German photographer.
  • Paper Collective (https://www.papercollective.com): Denmark-based iconic design posters online seller.

3.4. Estimation of Annual Sales and Market Share

The company seeks to drive sales through various digital platforms, including Etsy, as well as social media, for instance, the company’s web platform. With the integration of the digital sales of the company’s products, the company is set to rapidly capture more markets outside the shores of Europe. Venturing outside its country of origin will not only enhance its customer base or market but also ensure that all its branded products reach out to all art lovers around the world. During inception, most companies tend to shun away from global markets. However, CEMDE will ensure that it increases its market base through international ventures.

The company will conduct several studies in different parts of the world to ensure that it understands both cultures as well as the beliefs of people in various parts of the world. In this way, CEMDE will be able to provide it utilise market segmentation to its advantage by producing products suited for each market. Demand-driven and customer-oriented business strategies will, therefore, be adopted to ensure that products availed at each market are accepted by all target customers increasing the market share (Naghi Ganji et al., 2018).

CHAPTER 4: MARKETING PLAN

The target audience

CEMDE’ target audience for marketing performances ranging from 20-35 years old regardless of gender. Statistics have shown the average annual income in the Netherlands for those target audience, starting from 20-24 years old: €14.440 and 25-29 years old: €27.260 and 30-34 years old: €34.740 (Statista, 2017).

According to CBS (2017), in 2015, over 31% of average household spending for that particular age was spent on housing cost. This percentage reflects the urbanisation population as a part of a market trend where more people demand to own or rent living space that increments the authorisations of buying home décor product.

The most popular marketplace that is used by the Dutch population is Bol.com, followed by Coolblue, Wehkamp, Zalando, etc. (Ecommerce Foundation, 2018).

This figure shows the type of online purchase by the individual based on age in 2016. 5% of the Dutch population between 12-25 have made households goods and appliances purchases, increasingly, 10% of the Dutch population between the age of 25-45 have created an online shopping of the same product category.

Figure 4-3. Netherlands population in 2018. Source: (Statista, 2019)

As the figure illustrated, CEMDE’s target group stand on the second largest population group in The Netherlands, reaching the number of 4.253.083. According to CBS (2018), the current social trends in Dutch population are feminisation in primary education and ageing population. Overall, the research showcased a slight fluctuation in the education sector in The Netherlands, such as lower hourly wages, high absenteeism, etc.

However, CEMDE might require revisions on its current mission to respond to the demographic changes in the present times although the trends have no direct impact on the industry where CEMDE operates. Is there another demand increases from the ageing population? In which way, the company need to respond? Will, the ageing population, results in demand for tangible presence for the business? Will the ageing population require the industry to expand the product line?

The ageing population in The Netherlands are somewhat involved in technological trends occurring in this era. Social media are rising among seniors in The Netherlands in recent years (CBS, 2019). Direct messaging such as WhatsApp as an instance, 8 in 10 Dutch people aged 12 and over currently the user of this platform followed by continuous growth among older adults with above 75s from 15 – 32% in a span two years. Further up, the use of social networks among elderly increased piercingly especially in 2018, the share of 65 – 74-year olds increase to 34% compared to 2012 which reached only the amount of 12% in this particular trend. Moreover, 8 in 10 Dutch consumers shop online as stated by CBS (2019), in 2018 around 11.5 million Dutch people, 78% of the population aged 12 and over had purchased services and goods online. Statistically, the percentage had increased from 64% in 2012 up to 78% in 2018. Among the group of age 65 and over, the share of online purchase has increased from 25% in 2012 to 45% in 2018.

In addition to that, 94% of people among 25 – 44-year olds stated that they had purchased something online in 2018 followed by aged 45 – 64 years with 83% of online purchases (CBS, 2019).

Thus, the conclusion to this situational analysis is the demographic trends in The Netherlands generate small-scale impacts to CEMDE business strategic. Small changes are required in the future to tightly connected to Dutch consumers through a broader range of services and bonuses.

Marketing message:

CEMDE’s chief marketing message generated through social media channels which demonstrates how the product perfectly placed in many living spaces while illustrating sentimental value. The campaigns contain short words that are concise and inspiring, leading the customer to discover the unaware needs. CEMDE will expose the contributors of artworks to present the customer with a factual message on how the product created. Additionally, the promotional campaign will be engendered afterwards, which sanction customers to purchase with discount and bonuses where the promoters will be the social media influencers. Most influencers have their niche, and CEMDE expects to drive traffic to all platforms and eventually generate sales from this brand promoter

4.1. SWOT Analysis

Figure 4-2. The SWOT Analysis.

Strengths: As an art-focused company, the first strength of the company lies in the ability of the company to churn out original products and not based on copy or re-sell of another photographer or artists’ work. CEMDE’s strength lies in the ability to offer the customer the designs at competitive rates, as well as making it easier to acquire through digital channels. The company also has consistent talent searching for young and independent photographers and artists in The Netherlands.

CEMDE’s USP:

The critical point that differentiates CEMDE from similar competitors is the product. Composed by talented and developing young talents with only one specific theme which is retro/vintage artworks for simple, yet elegance finished product. CEMDE aims to provide an old-fashioned and old-times experience in the form of wall art that is universally applicable for all types of interior design, whether it is classic or urban. The competitors have similar business practices as to how CEMDE intends to be, but the theme of the product is considerably different in terms of artwork types and styles.

Weakness: the company has to outsource some work of designs and photography. This issue might be due to the magnitude of the orders the company has received or some other factors. Consistency in collaborating with the best artists and photographers might shift into problems as they might not put this to priority. Additionally, the partnership with a printing company in Amsterdam might cause confusions, miscommunication and less power on production control.

Opportunity: The growth of the art industry is on the rise. Many new companies are scanning for artworks to create designs that will further enhance the looks of their homes, offices, etc. CEMDE intend to capitalise on this knowledge and convert the preferred choice of the target market. The company also uses a web platform for its service delivery to acquire customers outside its base possibly.

Threat: A new competitor offering low-cost products, as well as the creative individuals drawing, snapping pictures and printing, among others, serve as the primary threat in the industry. Another danger CEMDE faces in the industry is the possibility of business imitation by other companies. The rise of a company with a similar strategy to CEMDE, whether intentionally copied or not would serve as a threat against the business.

4.2 MARKETING PLAN

4.2.1. Target market/competitive analysis

4.2.2. The product

Available dimensions:

  • 21×30 cm (A3)
  • 30×40 cm (A4)
  • 40×50 cm (A2)
  • 50×70 cm (A1)

Key features:

The company will make use of very original pictures which uniquely sourced. This picture will afford the company the opportunity of patenting each work and protecting it from the prying eyes of competitors and ensuing copyright infringements. The customers have assured the uniqueness of the company’s art that they hold.

The product theme is inspirational retro photographs. CEMDE presume technological era generate massive changes to recent generation, CEMDE intends to provide the therapeutic product to inspire present life eagerly to the target market.

CEMDE resources are not from history, resources made in modern life and acquiesce the technological advancement re-touch the image to display retro and vintage atmosphere (during the image editing).

The materials:

Customer’s advantage:

The benefits that costumers will achieve through CEMDE’s prints are authenticity and well-crafted product. Customer satisfaction is guaranteed, together with exceptional services and promotional offers.

Workmanship:

The picture on the left side is one of the examples of CEMDE resource in digital form.

 

The product sample will be displayed on right side.

Example:

Figure‑1-4. Example of photograph and product.

Additionally, the main principle of CEMDE products is social responsibility and solid creative partnership with the selected artists and photography students in The Netherlands. To ensure the collaboration with young creatives, CEMDE promotes social responsibility on each product. CSR delivered to CEMDE fundraising plan to support medical access and supply for Indonesian’s tobacco farm who employs children underage. Main reason of medical supports is the fact that those children have to interact with dangerous and toxic ingredients actively. According to Human Rights Watch (2016), the children working on tobacco farms in Indonesia exposed to poisonous pesticides, extreme heat and nicotine. CEMDE fundraising plan is mainly concerned about the health and children’s morals of the problem causes.

PRODUCT SERVICES:

Customer service policies:

– If the customer receives a defected or different product, the revered individual granted with gratuitous product changes upon their cull.

– If the product distribution is delayed and not as promised by the logistic partner, the customer will receive €5 credit on their membership account for the next purchase.

– Secure payment and privacy details bulwark on CEMDE’s website.

Return policy

30 Days Money Back Guarantee.

Unsatisfied customers are eligible to receive 100% refund during the first 30 days after receiving the product. After 30 days, the policy is no longer valid.

Office space:

In consideration to CEMDE operational activities from daily to longer-term, office space is required to fortify the company’s productivity. The chosen office space will be in the Centre of Amsterdam, located in the building with many creative businesses. The office space is as small as 20m2, and the interior design budget deducted from the manager’s investment.

Advantages/disadvantages of the chosen available area:

The office space situated in a unique location with various high-quality facilities. Besides, the office building has a superfast fibre-optic connection and indispensable in today’s business operations.

 

Product risks within the industry:

CEMDE selects Nationale Nederlanden as an insurance provider to protect the essential elements as a start-up. The chosen insurance package has these following services:

  • Inventory-, goods-, and tenant interest insurance
  • Business damage insurance
  • Legal assistance insurance companies
  • Liability insurance companies

4.2.3. Pricing Strategy

The company will adopt the product/market pricing strategy. This concerned with costumer’s benefit in purchasing the product offers and related services across available suppliers. The main focus is obtaining the right position for the price in discovering connection to competitor’s prices at involving market, product and segment. This pricing strategy issues reflection on marketer’s view on how the customers compare prices and particular product in contrast to competitive offerings (Roegner et al., 2005).

The company’s product/market pricing is first to draw the attention of the target market to the product offering of the company. Even though the company seeks to make a profit, the company will ensure that the pricing of the designs is not over and above what the customer segment can afford. The pricing of each product determined by the artwork’s quality and the amount of creativity expended. Among other factors to approach a clearer understanding of what elements of the product that customer perceives as valuable

The price’s amounts are calculated by adding the variable cost, shipping cost, production and VAT.

The variable cost:

– COGS:

These prices are the price from the cooperating printing company that assist the production activity from CEMDE’s digital source. From these prices, CEMDE would accumulate a sustainable base price with market-oriented pricing in consideration to similar products (competition) in the market.

  • 21×30 cm: €2,50
  • 30×40 cm: €3,95
  • 40×50 cm: €5,95
  • 50×70 cm: €7,95

– Shipping: €5.00

– Production: €2.00

– VAT: 21%

 

Total variable cost per-product:

Print size: 21 x 30cm

Shipping

Production cost

VAT

Total:

2,50

5.00

2.00

21%

= 11,50

Print size: 30 x 40cm

Shipping

Production cost

VAT

Total:

3,95

5.00

2.00

21%

= 13,25

Print size: 40 x 50cm

Shipping

Production cost

VAT

Total:

5,95

5.00

2.00

21%

= 15,60

Print size: 50 x 70cm

Shipping

Production cost

VAT

Total:

7,95

5.00

2.00

21%

= 18,00

 

After all the total variable cost are computed, adding a profit margin is the final step to generate profit into the price.

CEMDE intends to earn 10% profit margin from the products over the variable costs.  This percentage is considered to ensure that overall CEMDE prices are acceptable in the market in comparison to our competitors.

Target price = (variable cost per product) / (desired profit margin: 40%)

The profit margin expressed as decimal equals to = 0.40, so the variable cost is divided by = 0.60.

Overall prices of CEMDE products: (rounded up)

Print size: 21×30 cm 11,50 / 0.60 = 19,15
Print size: 30 x 40 cm 13,25 / 0.60 = 22,00
Print size: 40 x 50 cm 15,60 / 0.60 = 25,00
Print size: 50 x 70 cm 18,00 / 0.60 = 30,00

 

An overview of competitors prices with similar products

DESENIO

These prices are:

– include frame

– exclude shipping cost

·         21 x 30cm: 20,71

·         30 x 40cm: 31,13

·         40 x 50cm: 47,34

·         50 x 70cm: 57,30

(prices are in euro: €)

PAPERCOLLECTIVE

These prices are:

– include frame

– exclude shipping cost

·         21 x 30cm (custom order)

·         30 x 40cm: 58.00

·         40 x 50cm (custom order)

·         50 x 70cm: 94.00

(prices are in euro: €)

PROJECTHENRY

These prices are:

– exclude frame

– exclude shipping cost

·         21 x 30cm (not available)

·         30 x 40cm: 56,00

·         40 x 50cm: 63,30

·         50 x 70cm: 91,45

(prices are in euro: €)

4.2.4. Sales and Distribution Plan

The distribution:

In designing distribution channel, CEMDE concerned about these following options:

  • Customer desire and whether the channel convenient for the products.
  • The channel preference from target market based on market trends.
  • Channel location.
  • Delivery time
  • Extensive customer service.

The channel operations should balance customer needs, cost of channel maintenance and customer price sensitivity (Armstrong, Kotler 2005).

As a start-up company, CEMDE considered the optimum usage of the web shop would be the most beneficial in terms of cost savings. The distribution handled by the company itself, which save some amount of distribution cost, and no external warehousing activity is required. Additionally, CEMDE has arranged to establish a logistic partner with DHL and estimating the product will arrive to the customers within 3-5 working days to ensure the efficiency of our distribution process.

Payment methods:

These following payment methods are targeted to be available in CEMDE web shop:

– iDEAL(obligatory)

– PayPal

– Credit card

The sales:

The company’s products will be offered mainly through the company’s website with additional availability in some e-commerce marketplace that is available in The Netherlands, namely: Groupon, Etsy. High marketing investment is strongly advised to attract customers as an online-based company. The combination of these platforms will afford the company the opportunity of acquiring more customers outside the company’s concrete base. Additional return option for every purchased product is available as part of CEMDE customer services upon the return policy, and the customer is allowed to choose between refund or product exchange

4.2.5. Sales Process and Promotion Mix

Promotions and Advertising Plan

Promotion: The management will ensure that all the customers, to a reasonable degree, are satisfied with the prints. This type of first-hand market research will prove invaluable in attracting more customers and retaining existing ones. Social Media includes all internet and mobile-based publishing technologies, including websites, email, etc.

The social media platforms which CEMDE will utilise include but are not limited to:

  • Influencer marketing
  • Facebook, Instagram, Pinterest.

The strategy is to grow the business by nurturing clients, differentiating the company’s prints from our competitors, mainly through service and solid business ethics. All criteria from customer satisfaction, service provision, and price competitiveness are to be looked at thoroughly in the initial stages as areas for improvement.

 

Advertising/Marketing Techniques

Activity Appropriate Maybe Not Appropriate Top Priority?
Advertising (print, broadcast, Internet) ✔︎
Alliances ✔︎
Annual reports & reviews ✔︎
Associations ✔︎
Book and publication writing ✔︎
Brochures & collateral materials ✔︎
Customer advisory boards ✔︎
“Customer experience” enhancements ✔︎
Customer surveys ✔︎
Direct mail ✔︎
Directories ✔︎
Event sponsorships & trade shows ✔︎
Internet-based marketing ✔︎
Newsletters ✔︎
Promotional giveaways ✔︎
Press relations campaign ✔︎
Pricing strategies ✔︎
Referral sources campaign ✔︎
Seminars & public speaking ✔︎
Signage (vehicle, office, roadside) ✔︎
Trade shows ✔︎
Yellow Pages TM ✔︎
Website – unique domain/development ✔︎

Table 4-1. Marketing Techniques

 

“Marketing Mix” of Tools and Techniques

Top Priority Marketing Techniques
(from above list)
Steps needed to implement Estimated Costs

(€)

Timing / Deadlines Person Responsible
1. Internet-based marketing ·         Create an internet marketing plan

·         Create on and off-page SEO and bolster SEM campaign with PPC (Pay-per-click) ad campaigns.

·         Use social media to reach more and specific audience.

·         Use email marketing to send promotional offer

·         Analyse and monitor the web data

– SEO: 500/month

– PPC: 5% monthly ad spend

– Email marketing: 350/month

– Social media marketing: 250/month

1-3 months Digital Marketing Agency
2. Website – unique domain/development Design website that matches the brand identity, attractive content and engaging message. 1-3 months Digital Marketing Agency

Table 4-2. “Marketing Mix” of Tools and Techniques.

CHAPTER 5: OPERATIONS AND PRODUCT DEVELOPMENT PLAN
5.1. Operation Plan

The workflow of on-demand product creation:

  1. Selecting the digital artwork based on the order.
  2. Send the request to Printenbind.
  3. The product printed and framed by Printenbind.
  4. Packing process.
  5. Delivery by DHL.

Quality control:

To support CEMDE’ product quality control, the checklist composed after the first samples are received, the following aspect required on the checklist:

  • Colour (Is the colours consistent? Do the colours crack or fade? Do the colours match the orders?)
  • Materials (Is it identical to the sample? Is it consistent)
  • Size and dimensions (Are they identical or same as order request and sample? Are the dimensions accurate?)
  • Odours (Do the products smell chemical?)
  • Finishes
  • Packing

The operational plan itself is behaving toward short-term detailed processes of the organisation. It supports the daily nature and involves operations functionality of the organisation such as marketing, sales, inventory and budgeting. The plan is to provide continuous optimisation and improvements to achieve these areas: productivity, efficiency, turnaround time, cost reduction, quality, and customer satisfaction.

5.2. Product Development Plan

The essential requirement for production process:

  • Office space
  • Computers and other tools in the assets
  • Complete artwork resources

Production and delivery time frame:

It will take half-a-day to process CEMDE’s orders for one day (if another order comes after this, the order processed the day after); next, one or two CEMDE members will pick up the culminated product to the company and do the ‘warehouse’ in CEMDE office, lastly, the courier will come by the cessation of the day to pick up all the orders and ship it to customers. The customer will receive the product within 1-3 business days.

Production inventory:

CEMDE does not necessarily have storage space (warehouse) for stocks, materials, etcetera. The business operational mostly occurred in CEMDE’ office space, for instance; data management, project management, etcetera. The product control is done in CEMDE headquarter itself to have direct damage fixation before the product continues to the packing and shipment process.

The development project:

5.3. Human Resource Plan

 

Name Title Role Salary According to PayScale/Year
Chyntya Dewi Manager Overseeing the activities of the company Not fixed
  AA Accountant Responsible with all the financial activities and records. 6,000/year

Rate:

€100/hour

Monthly hours: 5 hours

 

Fixed salary per month: €500

 

Yearly working hours:  60 hours

  Office Administrator Provide administrative support to office personnel. 18,000/year

Rate: €25/hour

Monthly hours: 60 hours

 

Fixed salary per month: €1,500

 

Yearly working hour: 720 hours

Table 5-3. Human Resource Plan

 

Role details:

Office Administrator:

  • Carrying out critical rules, include answering phone calls, responding to mails, and preparing documents.
  • Performing bookkeeping tasks; monitor account receivable, budget tracking, and invoicing.
  • Maintain general office files; job files and other operational files.
  • Purchase office supplies, furniture and equipment.
  • Monitor the maintenance of office equipment and facilities.
  • Responsible for budgetary control and planning for all digital communications across all channels.

OUTSOURCE:

Accountant personnel:

  • Responsible for preparing financial reports, budgets, and financial statements for the organization
  • Provides management with financial analyses, development budgets, and accounting reports; analyzes financial feasibility for the most complex proposed projects; conducts market research to forecast trends and business conditions.
  • Responsible for financial forecasting and risks analysis.
  • Performs cash management, general ledger accounting, and financial reporting for one or more properties.

Marketing Digital Agency:

  • Web design and creation
  • Designs effective strategy for the marketing operations of the company.
  • Ensures the implementation of the sales, marketing and promotional plans of the company.
  • Responsible for all social media channels, performance and activity to optimise the performance against KPI (Key Performance Indicator).
  • Managing product campaigns and contents throughout all social media platform (Instagram, Facebook, Pinterest)
  • Building relationship both externally and internally, including social media influencers, brand partners and other digital content creators.
  • Collect monthly reports on performance for all digital communications across all channels.
  • SEO optimisation.
  • Monitor the ROI of social media efforts.
  • Marketing automation to develop nurturing strategy.

External Professional Resources

  • A corporate lawyer who will be hired from time to time to offer legal advice and services to the company. This will include the examination of each contract signed on behalf of the company by the CEO and other delegated staffs.

 

 

 

 

 

 

What are the implications of this case for today’s educational leaders?

Website: mytlc.trident.edu

Ask support team for login info pls

For access to the Trident Online Library

Required Reading

Board of Education of Hendrick Hudson School District v. Rowley, 458 U.S. 176 (1982).

Retrieved from http://caselaw.lp.findlaw.com/scripts/getcase.pl?court=US&vol=458&invol=176.

Brown v. Board of Education, 347 U.S. 483 (1954). Retrieved from http://caselaw.lp.findlaw.com/scripts/getcase.pl?court=US&vol=347&invol=483.

San Antonio Independent School District v. Rodriguez, 411 U.S. 1 (1973). Retrieved from https://www.law.cornell.edu/supremecourt/text/411/1

Strauss, V. (2015). The end of public school desegregation? The Washington Post online. Retrieved

from https://www.washingtonpost.com/news/answer-sheet/wp/2015/12/14/the-end-of-public-school-desegregation/.

Helpful Web Sites for Legal Research

www.caselaw.findlaw.com (Search tool for state and federal cases and laws)

http://blogs.edweek.org/edweek/school_law/ (School law blog, primarily PK-12)

Assignment

EQUAL PROTECTION OF THE LAWS

Case Assignment

Select one of the U.S. Supreme Court cases from the background reading and write a 3- to 4-page analysis of the case that contains the following information:

1.What is the factual background of the case? (this section of the paper should be clear and brief).

2.What is the legal issue in the case?

3.What does the court decide?

4.What is the court’s reasoning/justification for their decision?

5.What are the implications of this case for today’s educational leaders? (this section of the paper should be at least one full page).

 

 

Assignment Expectations

Your work should demonstrate the following:

 

-At least 3-4 pages, not counting the title page and references.

-A clear introduction that orients a reader to the essay main content, and the main points discussed.

-A well-developed, well-balanced essay body that develops each point in its own paragraph.

-A concise conclusion that summarizes the whole essay.

-Include at least three references. Quoted material should not exceed 10% of the total paper (since the focus of these assignments is critical thinking). Use your own words and build on the ideas of others. When material is copied verbatim from external sources, it MUST be enclosed in quotes. The references should be cited within the text and also listed at the end of the assignment in the References section. Follow the APA Style® format, see www.apa.org.

-At least one in-text citation for each reference.

-General format/mechanics.

-A reference page which follows APA requirements.

-Organized in a clear and coherent manner.

-Double spaced with font size of 12.

 

Your writing should:

 

-Be clear, logical, and precise.

-Have breadth and depth.

-Show critical-thinking skills.